manualshive.com logo in svg

Uniden BC346XT, User Manual

The Uniden BC346XT is a feature-packed scanner that allows users to monitor radio frequencies with precision. With its easy-to-use interface and advanced scanning capabilities, this device is perfect for amateur radio enthusiasts. Visit our website to download the free user manual and unlock the full potential of your BC346XT scanner.

Share
Download
background image

Thursday, May 14, 2009 

73 

Search for... 

This menu includes the following items. 

Service Search 
Edit Service 
Custom Search 
Edit Custom 
Search and Store 
Set Search Key 

Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each item. 

Service Search 

You can select from 12 preset search bands for searching. 

Public Safety 
News 
HAM Radio 
Marine 
Railroad 
Air 
CB Radio 
FRS/GMRS/MURS 
Racing 
FM Broadcast 
Special 

Press [E / yes / gps] to exit from Menu Mode and start searching the selected band. 

(See: 

Service Search 

) 

Edit Service 

Select Service Search Range and press [E / yes / gps] to go to each Search Range Setting. 

You can set the following items for each Service Search Range. 

Set Delay Time 
Set Attenuator 
Search with Scan 

Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each setting. 

Note: The first line in the display shows the name of the selected Service Search. 

Summary of Contents for BC346XT

Page 1: ...pecific to each scanner is included in the Individual Scanners links To program things into your scanner start with the Setting Up Radio Systems in your Scanner links below Individual Scanners Setting up radio systems in your scanner Digital scanners only General scanning information Legal and Safety Information General Precautions FCC Information Warranty and Support Information User Guide Inform...

Page 2: ...te that these pages are meant as general instructions While most of the information here applies to all scanners some options may not be available on certain scanner models Model specific options are indicated in the text Radio Systems Overview Deciphering Trunked Systems Location based Scanning Scanning Legally Legal and Safety Information General Precautions FCC Information Warranty and Support ...

Page 3: ...ome Safari 3 1 2 Opera 9 61 If you have difficulty viewing this guide in your current browser please try downloading one of the browsers listed Except as otherwise noted this page applies to the following scanners BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D DImage_090515 Manual UnidenScannersUsersGuides html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11 11 28 AM ...

Page 4: ...r including how to program the various types of radio systems into your scanner we suggest you start with the General Users Guide page General Precautions Quick Start Using Preloaded Systems Feature List Specifications Hardware specifications BCD996XT The Complete Reference is coming soon FCC Information Warranty and Support Information User Guide Information Operation overview Available operation...

Page 5: ...rogramming Quick Keys Programming Search Keys Programming locations Setting alerts Operating your scanner Using Number Tags Using Quick Keys Startup Keys and Search Keys Using Tone Out mode Using Close Call mode Using Band Scope mode Using GPS mode This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC...

Page 6: ...information about using a scanner including how to program the various types of radio systems into your scanner we suggest you start with the General Users Guide page General Precautions Quick Start Using Preloaded Systems Feature List Specifications Hardware specifications BCT15X The Complete Guide is coming soon FCC Information Warranty and Support Information User Guide Information file C Docum...

Page 7: ...Tags Programming Quick Keys Programming Search Keys Programming locations Setting alerts Operating your scanner Using Number Tags State by State Scanning BearTracker Warning System Using Quick Keys Startup Keys and Search Keys Using Tone Out mode Using Close Call mode Using Band Scope mode Using GPS mode This page applies to the following scanner s BCT15X Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Setti...

Page 8: ...tting up the hardware Programming your scanner Operating your scanner Important information For general information about using a scanner we suggest you start with the General Users Guide page General Precautions Quick Start Using Preloaded Systems Specifications Hardware file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD396XT html 1 of 3 5 26 2009 11 11 47 AM ...

Page 9: ...ion modes Menu reference Keys and their functions Reading the display Setting up the hardware Included with the scanner Installing the batteries Connecting the antenna Attaching the belt clip Connecting a GPS receiver Programming your scanner file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD396XT html 2 of 3 5 26 2009 11 11 47 AM ...

Page 10: ...perating your scanner Using Number Tags Using Quick Keys Startup Keys and Search Keys Using Tone Out mode Using Close Call mode Using Band Scope mode Using GPS mode This page applies to the following scanner s BCD396XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD396XT html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11 11 47 AM ...

Page 11: ...BC346XT UnidenMan4 TWiki BC346XT Important information file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346XT html 1 of 4 5 26 2009 11 11 48 AM ...

Page 12: ...g your scanner Operating your scanner Important information For general information about using a scanner we suggest you start with the General Users Guide page General Precautions Quick Start Using Preloaded Systems Specifications Hardware specifications Software reference file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346XT html 2 of 4 5 26 2009 11 11 48 AM ...

Page 13: ...alling the batteries Connecting the antenna Attaching the belt clip Connecting a GPS receiver Programming your scanner Setting up systems Programming Number Tags Programming Quick Keys Programming Search Keys Programming locations Setting alerts Operating your scanner Using Number Tags Using Quick Keys Startup Keys and Search Keys file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImag...

Page 14: ...Using Close Call mode Using Band Scope mode Using GPS mode This page applies to the following product s BC346XTUser Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346XT html 4 of 4 5 26 2009 11 11 48 AM ...

Page 15: ... 1 channel group Channel group properties Create at least 1 channel in each group Channel properties Programming a Conventional System To program a conventional system you ll need to program the required elements in following order click here for information on using the menu Create a system 1 Go to the Program System menu and choose New System 2 The scanner will prompt you for the System Type Sel...

Page 16: ...ystem Delete a system Delete System Create at least 1 channel group Each conventional system can contain up to 20 channel groups and all systems must contain at least 1 channel group 1 On the Program System menu select the system you just created 2 Go to the Edit Group menu and select New Group 3 If you need to change any of the channel group properties you can do that now Unless a property is Req...

Page 17: ...quency for this channel in MHz 4 If you need to change any of the channel properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Channel properties All of these options can be found by selecting the channel name your scanner s Edit Channel menu If necessary the sub menu and the exact option name are listed beside each property ...

Page 18: ...996XT and BCT15 Set Record BCD396XT and BC346XT Not available Attenuator Set Attenuator Lockout Set Lockout Priority Set Priority Volume Offset Volume Offset Available operations Copy a channel Copy Channel Delete a channel Delete Channel This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT UsersGuide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do temp CDImage_090515 Man...

Page 19: ...system you ll need to program the required elements in following order click here for information on using the menu Create a system 1 Go to the Program System menu and choose New System 2 The scanner will prompt you for the System Type Select EDCS 3 The scanner will prompt you for the sub type Select SCAT 4 When the scanner prompts you confirm tap YES 5 The scanner creates the system with a defaul...

Page 20: ... If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside the property Property Option name Required None Recommended Quick key Set Quick Key Optional Attenuator Set Attenuator Hold time Set Hold Time Location information Set Location Info Set State BCT15X Set State Other Models Not available Lockout Set Lockout Modulation Set Modulation Startup key Set Startup Key Available ope...

Page 21: ...ed None Recommended Number tag Set Number Tag Optional Record BCD996XT or BCT15X Set Record BCD396XT or BC346XT Not available Volume Offset Volume Offset Lockout Set Lockout Available operations Delete a frequency Delete Frequency This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 s temp CDImage_090515 Manual EDA...

Page 22: ...ot decode EDACS ProVoice Below is an example of an EDACS trunked system from RadioReference EDACS Wide System Here is a conceptual layout diagram of a basic EDACS Wide system Click here for a legend of the diagram You can download a planning worksheet for EDACS systems as a pdf file or an Excel spreadsheet file Programming an EDACS System Create a system System properties Create at least 1 site Si...

Page 23: ...f you need to change any of the system properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings System properties All of these options can be found under your scanner s Program System menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside the property Property Option name Required None Recommended Name E...

Page 24: ...m menu select the system you just created 2 Go to the Edit Site menu and select New Site 3 If you need to change any of the site properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Site properties All of these options can be found under your scanner s Edit Site menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner a...

Page 25: ...u and select New Frequency 3 Enter at least 1 frequency for this site 4 When you enter a new frequency the scanner will prompt you for the logical channel number or LCN for that frequency Enter a number from 1 through 30 5 If you need to change any of the frequency properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Frequenc...

Page 26: ...and any system you want to scan must contain at least 1 channel group 1 On the Program System menu select the system you just created 2 Go to the Edit Group menu and select New Group 3 If you need to change any of the channel group properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Channel group properties All of these opti...

Page 27: ...oup ID TGID for this channel 4 If you need to change any of the channel properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Channel properties All of these options can be found by selecting the channel name your scanner s Edit Channel menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside the proper...

Page 28: ...kout Priority Set Priority Volume Offset Volume Offset Available operations Copy a channel Copy Channel Delete a channel Delete Channel This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT UsersGuide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 emp CDImage_090515 Manual EDACSTrunkedSystems html 7 of 7 5 26 2009 11 11 51 AM ...

Page 29: ...gend of the diagram You can download a planning worksheet for LTR systems as a pdf file or an Excel spreadsheet file For more information on the different types of LTR systems and how they work see the Logic Trunked Radio page at Radio Reference s Wiki Programming an LTR System Create a system System properties Create at least 1 site Site properties Create at least 1 frequency in each site Frequen...

Page 30: ... the system properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings System properties All of these options can be found under your scanner s Program System menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside the property Property Option name Required None Recommended Name Edit Name Number tag Set Num...

Page 31: ...system you just created 2 Go to the Edit Site menu and select New Site 3 If you need to change any of the site properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Site properties All of these options can be found under your scanner s Edit Site menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside t...

Page 32: ...y 3 Enter at least 1 frequency for this site 4 When you enter a new frequency the scanner will prompt you for the logical channel number or LCN for that frequency Enter a number from 1 through 20 5 If you need to change any of the frequency properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Frequency properties All of these...

Page 33: ...On the Program System menu select the system you just created 2 Go to the Edit Group menu and select New Group 3 If you need to change any of the channel group properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Channel group properties All of these options can be found by selecting the group name under your scanner s Edit G...

Page 34: ...f you need to change any of the channel properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Channel properties All of these options can be found by selecting the channel name your scanner s Edit Channel menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside the property Property Option name Required...

Page 35: ... Set Priority Volume Offset Volume Offset Available operations Copy a channel Copy Channel Delete a channel Delete Channel This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D s temp CDImage_090515 Manual LTRTrunkedSystems html 7 of 7 5 26 2009 11 11 52 AM ...

Page 36: ...available on certain scanner models Model specific options are indicated in the text A Motorola system can be an 800 MHz 400 MHz UHF or 100 200 MHz VHF system Below are some examples of these Motorola systems from RadioReference Motorola 800 MHz System Another Motorola 800 MHz System file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D p CDImage_090515 Manual MotorolaTrunkedSystems html 1 of 8 5 26 200...

Page 37: ...APCO 25 this system and others like it is correctly programmed as a Motorola 800 MHz system per the information given for the System Type Motorola UHF System 400 MHz band file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D p CDImage_090515 Manual MotorolaTrunkedSystems html 2 of 8 5 26 2009 11 11 53 AM ...

Page 38: ...ifferent types of Motorola systems and how they work see the Motorola page at Radio Reference s Wiki Programming a Motorola System Create a system System properties Create at least 1 site Site properties Create at least 1 frequency in each site Frequency properties Programming a system for Scanning Create a channel group Channel group properties Create a channel Channel properties file C Documents...

Page 39: ...er your scanner s Program System menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside the property Property Option name Required Fleet map Edit Fleet Map Required for Motorola Type I or Type I II Hybrid systems only Recommended Name Edit Name Number tag Set Number Tag Optional Automatic Gain Control AGC BCD396XT and BCD996XT Set Audio AGC BC346XT and BCT15X Not availabl...

Page 40: ...e found under your scanner s Edit Site menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside the property Property Option name Required Band plan Edit Band Plan Recommended Name Edit Name Quick key Set Quick Key Optional Attenuator Set Attenuator Hold time Set Hold Time Location information Set LocationInfo Lockout Set Lockout Modulation Set Modulation P25 wait time BCD3...

Page 41: ...ockout Available operations Delete a frequency Delete Frequency Programming a system for Scanning Once you create the system and at least 1 site you can scan the system in ID Search mode In this mode the scanner stops on all system traffic for talk groups you have not locked out If you want to use ID Scan mode you ll need to program channels into the system In ID Scan the scanner only stops on tal...

Page 42: ...ct the channel group you just created 2 Go to the Edit Channel menu and select New Channel 3 Input the Talk Group ID TGID for this channel 4 If you need to change any of the channel properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Channel properties All of these options can be found by selecting the channel name under the...

Page 43: ...ailable Lockout Set Lockout Priority Set Priority Volume Offset Available operations Copy Channel Delete Channel This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D p CDImage_090515 Manual MotorolaTrunkedSystems html 8 of 8 5 26 2009 11 11 53 AM ...

Page 44: ...Standard P25 System Here is a conceptual layout diagram of a basic P25 system Click here for a legend of the diagram For more information on P25 systems and how they work see the Project 25 page at Radio Reference s Wiki Programming a P25 System Create a system System properties Create at least 1 site Site properties Create at least 1 frequency in each site Frequency properties Programming a syste...

Page 45: ...it Name if you want to change it 6 If you need to change any of the system properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings System properties All of these options can be found under your scanner s Program System menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside the property Property Option n...

Page 46: ...menu and select New Site 3 If you need to change any of the site properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Site properties All of these options can be found under your scanner s Edit Site menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside the property Property Option name Required None...

Page 47: ...t least 1 frequency for this site 4 If you need to change any of the frequency properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Frequency properties All of these options can be found by selecting the frequency under the Set Frequencies sub menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside th...

Page 48: ... New Group 3 If you need to change any of the channel group properties you can do that now Unless a property is Required you can operate the system without changing the default settings Channel group properties All of these options can be found by selecting the group name under your scanner s Edit Group menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside the property P...

Page 49: ...g the default settings Channel properties All of these options can be found by selecting the channel name your scanner s Edit Channel menu If necessary the sub menu and option name on each scanner are listed beside the property Property Option name Required TGID Edit Talk Group ID Recommended Name Edit Name Number tag Set Number Tag Optional Alert Set Alert Record BCD996XT only Set Record Priority...

Page 50: ...Man4 TWiki The information on this page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCD396XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D DImage_090515 Manual StandardP25TrunkedSystems html 7 of 7 5 26 2009 11 11 54 AM ...

Page 51: ...gle Frequency P25 System To program a single frequency P25 system you ll need to program the required elements in following order click here for information on using the menu Create a system 1 Go to the Program System menu and choose New System 2 The scanner will prompt you for the System Type Select P25 3 When the scanner prompts you to select Standard Trunk or One Freq Trunk select One Freq Trun...

Page 52: ...h Available Operations Copy system Delete system Review Locked Out IDs Rvw ID Srch L O Clear All Locked Out IDs Clr All L O IDs Create exactly 1 site Each single frequency P25 system must contain exactly 1 site 1 On the Program System menu select the system you just created 2 Go to the Edit Site menu and select New Site 3 Select the Set Frequencies menu and enter the frequencies for this site 4 If...

Page 53: ...ationInfo Lockout Set Lockout Startup key Set Startup Key Available Operations Delete Site Programming a system for Scanning Once you create the system and site you can Search the system with no problems However if you want to Scan the system you ll need to program the required elements in following order click here for information on using the menu Create a channel group Each P25 system can conta...

Page 54: ...Location information Set LocationInfo Lockout Set Lockout Available operations Delete Group Create a channel Each trunked system can contain up to 500 channels in each group 1 On the Edit Group menu select the channel group you just created 2 Go to the Edit Channel menu and select New Channel 3 Input the Talk Group ID TGID for this channel 4 If you need to change any of the channel properties you ...

Page 55: ...Name Edit Name Number tag Set Number Tag Optional Alert Set Alert Record BCD996XT only Set Record Lockout Set Lockout Volume Offset Available operations Copy Channel Delete Channel This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCD396XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do _090515 Manual SingleFrequencyP25TrunkedSystems html 5 of 5 5 26 2009 11 11 55 AM ...

Page 56: ...adio usage has meant that there arent enough individual frequencies available to allow every group to have their own frequency Technology advances have brought down the overall cost and complexity of implementing a trunked radio system while increasing the features available to the agency and individual radio users Roll out of major statewide trunked systems makes it easier for even small agencies...

Page 57: ... ID assignment leaving the frequency free for the next user that becomes active A real life example A typical 20 frequency trunked system can support hundreds of channels For example the Fort Worth system includes over 400 channels providing communication support for Fort Worth agencies Police Fire and Ambulance and agencies in the surrounding cities of Kennedale North Richland Hills Forest Hill H...

Page 58: ...ffic each have one or more dedicated channels for their use as well This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D emp CDImage_090515 Manual RadioSystemsOverview html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11 12 00 AM ...

Page 59: ...rectly call other radio users without tying up a dispatch channel something they could never do before As a scanner user on the other hand you need to know the different types of trunking systems in use what options are available on each system and three key pieces of information about any trunking system before you start any actual programming System Type System Frequencies IDs of the Talk Groups...

Page 60: ... subtypes In the RadioReference database you can generally determine the radio system type by looking at the line labeled System Type at the top of the screen inside the red square in the screenshot file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D DImage_090515 Manual DecipheringTrunkedSystems html 2 of 5 5 26 2009 11 12 03 AM ...

Page 61: ...of the frequencies are between 400 and 512 MHz Motorola VHF all of the frequencies are between 100 and 200 MHz EDACS Systems There are three subtypes of EDACS systems EDACS Wide identified as EDACS Standard in the system type EDACS Narrow identified as EDACS Narrowband in the system type EDACS SCAT identified as EDACS Scat in the system type these systems operate on a single frequency Conventional...

Page 62: ...ystem Unfortunately this means the system voice line can cause a lot of confusion Just remember system voice does not define the system type For example in the system information shown to the left we see that APCO 25 can be used as a voice type on a Motorola system that is not actually a P25 system When we re trying to determine whether a system is a P25 system we need to ignore the System Voice l...

Page 63: ...ion section inside the green rectangle shows the different channels on the system and which agency uses them You ll need to go through the list and make a note of the channels you want to hear Then you can start thinking about how you want to organize those channels Keep in mind that this screenshot shows just a few of the channels on a single system One of the great features available to subscrib...

Page 64: ...a mapping software such as Microsoft Streets and Trips or Delorme Street Atlas that allows you to draw markings and overlays on maps a GPS receiver with a serial data output NMEA There are many different approaches you can use to determine where to place a center point for a system site or channel group The two most common are the geopolitical approach and the antenna centric approach For large tr...

Page 65: ...ur chosen mapping application to zoom out so that the entire target is visible then draw a circle that just covers the targets boundaries Adjust the size of the circle to the nearest 1 2 mile increment Depending on the shape of the territory you may have to choose between a lot of overlap or not covering the entire area jurisdiction you might end up with a large amount of overlap You ll have to de...

Page 66: ...an4 TWiki On the other hand if you sub divide the area you may end up with areas that are not covered file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D mp CDImage_090515 Manual LocationBasedScanning html 3 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 06 AM ...

Page 67: ...g an antenna centric approach you set the physical antenna location as the system sites center point and the antenna s actual reach as the range file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D mp CDImage_090515 Manual LocationBasedScanning html 4 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 06 AM ...

Page 68: ...eferenceor the FCC s Antenna Structure Registration site Both sites list the latitude longitude and height of the antenna and both sites can map the exact location for you Radio Reference is more user friendly so it s easier to file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D mp CDImage_090515 Manual LocationBasedScanning html 5 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 06 AM ...

Page 69: ...l set the geographic coordinates of the antenna as the central location for each site 2 Use the geopolitical approach at the channel group level Within the same system set up a channel group for each agency and set the central point of the agency territory as the group location With both approaches combined into a single system the scanner will now seamlessly switch between file C Documents 20and ...

Page 70: ...urn channel groups on and off as you relocate to different jurisdictions See Also Connecting a GPS receiver Programming locations This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D mp CDImage_090515 Manual LocationBasedScanning html 7 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 06 AM ...

Page 71: ...y is otherwise illegal This scanner has been designed to prevent the reception of cellular telephone transmissions and the decoding of scrambled transmissions This is done to comply with the legal requirement that scanners be manufactured so they are not easy to modify to pick up these transmissions Do not open your scanners case to make any modifications that could allow it to pick up transmissio...

Page 72: ... TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual ScanningLegally html 2 of 2 5 26 2009 11 12 07 AM ...

Page 73: ...r possible hearing damage if the volume suddenly becomes too loud because of the volume control or squelch control setting This might be particularly true of the type of earphone that is placed in the ear canal Liquid Exposure Warning Uniden does not represent this unit to be waterproof To reduce the risk of fire or electrical shock do not expose this unit to rain or moisture Power Disconnection C...

Page 74: ...peration of this product in any way other than as detailed by this User s Guide could void your authority to operate this product Part 15 Information This scanner has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a scanning receiver pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This s...

Page 75: ...nditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual FCCInformation html 2 of 2 5 26 2009 11 12 07 AM ...

Page 76: ...ly Important Evidence of original purchase is required for warranty service WARRANTOR UNIDEN AMERICA CORPORATION Uniden ELEMENTS OF WARRANTY Uniden warrants for one year to the original retail owner this Uniden Product to be free from defects in materials and craftsmanship with only the limitations or exclusions set out below WARRANTY DURATION This warranty to the original user shall terminate and...

Page 77: ...DES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER WHETHER EXPRESS IMPLIED OR ARISING BY OPERATION OF LAW INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER OR PROVIDE FOR THE REIMBURSEMENT OR PAYMENT OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES Some states do not allow this exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse...

Page 78: ...r Boulevard Fort Worth TX 76155 This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BCD346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do age_090515 Manual WarrantyAndSupportInformation html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11 12 08 AM ...

Page 79: ...r completeness of external content Screen grabs used in most examples are provided with the permission of RadioReference com Astro DPL Digital Private Line Motorola PL PRIVACY PLUS Private Line SMARTNET and SMARTZONE are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc LTR is a registered trademark of E F Johnson Co EDACS is a registered trademark of M A COM Private Radio Systems Inc Uniden and Bearcat are r...

Page 80: ...ode PaulOpitz r6 12 May 2009 17 15 BCD996XTCloseCallMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 17 49 BCD996XTGPSMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 17 58 BCD996XTHoldMode PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 18 02 BCD996XTKeySafeMode PaulOpitz r6 12 May 2009 18 08 BCD996XTKeysAndTheirFunctions PaulOpitz r3 31 Mar 2009 20 33 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD996XT html 1 of ...

Page 81: ... 26 BCD996XTToneOutMode PaulOpitz r4 12 May 2009 18 31 CalculatingUpperBaseFrequencies PaulOpitz r6 08 May 2009 14 36 CategoryBCD996XT PaulOpitz r2 24 Mar 2009 18 35 CloseCall PaulOpitz r9 12 May 2009 19 42 ConventionalSystems PaulOpitz r9 12 May 2009 19 58 DecipheringTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD996XT html 2 of 7...

Page 82: ...hannel PaulOpitz r6 15 Apr 2009 15 17 EditGroup PaulOpitz r5 13 Apr 2009 20 25 EditSite PaulOpitz r7 13 May 2009 14 39 EditSysOption PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 19 56 EditTalkGroupID PaulOpitz r10 12 May 2009 15 18 FCCInformation PaulOpitz r7 24 Mar 2009 19 30 GeneralPrecautions file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD996XT html 3 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 ...

Page 83: ...onnectingAGPSReceiver PaulOpitz r4 12 May 2009 21 21 MobileSettingUpTheHardware PaulOpitz r6 12 May 2009 21 23 MobileWiredClone PaulOpitz r4 01 Apr 2009 19 05 MotorolaFleetMaps PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 19 45 MotorolaTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r13 12 May 2009 21 29 NumberTags PaulOpitz r6 14 Apr 2009 15 17 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD996XT ...

Page 84: ...r 2009 20 43 PublishContribHistory PaulOpitz r30 13 May 2009 15 26 QuickKeys PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 21 30 RadioSystemsOverview PaulOpitz r5 24 Mar 2009 20 47 ReadingTheDisplay PaulOpitz r10 13 May 2009 14 45 ScanningLegally PaulOpitz r7 24 Mar 2009 20 54 SearchAndStore PaulOpitz file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD996XT html 5 of 7 5 26 2009 1...

Page 85: ...ar 2009 21 00 SetFrequencies PaulOpitz r7 13 May 2009 14 48 SetLocationInfo PaulOpitz r5 14 Apr 2009 16 11 SettingAlerts PaulOpitz r5 17 Apr 2009 16 00 SingleFrequencyP25TrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r8 13 May 2009 14 50 SrchCloCallOpt PaulOpitz r9 13 May 2009 14 51 StandardP25TrunkedSystems file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD996XT html 6 of 7 5 26 ...

Page 86: ...nnersUsersGuides PaulOpitz r16 13 May 2009 15 52 UsingQuickKeysStartupKeysAndSearchKeys PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 22 15 WXOperation PaulOpitz r8 12 May 2009 22 03 WarrantyAndSupportInformation PaulOpitz r7 24 Mar 2009 22 17 WeatherMode PaulOpitz r5 14 Apr 2009 18 16 Number of topics 65 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD996XT html 7 of 7 5 26 20...

Page 87: ...bleOperationModes PaulOpitz r15 12 May 2009 15 33 BCT15X PaulOpitz r9 12 May 2009 16 30 BCT15XBandScopeMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 18 41 BCT15XCloseCallMode PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 18 42 BCT15XGPSMode PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 17 59 BCT15XHoldMode PaulOpitz r12 12 May 2009 19 18 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCT15X html 1 of 7 5 26 2009 1...

Page 88: ...2 May 2009 21 38 BCT15XScanMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 19 26 BCT15XSettings PaulOpitz r4 12 May 2009 19 27 BCT15XSpecs KeiichiKuroki r7 12 May 2009 04 43 BCT15XToneOutMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 19 35 BearTrackerWarningSystem PaulOpitz r2 08 May 2009 18 44 CalculatingUpperBaseFrequencies PaulOpitz file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCT15X ht...

Page 89: ...kedSystems PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 20 00 EDACSSCATSystems PaulOpitz r7 13 May 2009 14 40 EDACSTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 20 14 EditBandPlan PaulOpitz r5 30 Mar 2009 17 16 EditGroup PaulOpitz r5 13 Apr 2009 20 25 EditSite PaulOpitz r7 13 May 2009 14 39 EditSysOption file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCT15X html 3 of 7 5 26 2009 11 ...

Page 90: ...ges PaulOpitz r8 12 May 2009 20 53 LTRTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r8 12 May 2009 21 11 LocationBasedScanning PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 19 41 MobileConnectingAGPSReceiver PaulOpitz r4 12 May 2009 21 21 MobileSettingUpTheHardware PaulOpitz r6 12 May 2009 21 23 MobileWiredClone PaulOpitz r4 01 Apr 2009 19 05 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCT15X ht...

Page 91: ... 2009 22 25 ProgramLocation PaulOpitz r5 14 Apr 2009 15 22 ProgrammingLocations PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 20 43 PublishContribHistory PaulOpitz r30 13 May 2009 15 26 QuickKeys PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 21 30 RadioSystemsOverview PaulOpitz r5 24 Mar 2009 20 47 ScanningLegally PaulOpitz file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCT15X html 5 of 7 5 26 2009...

Page 92: ...ulOpitz r6 14 Apr 2009 15 53 SetAlertTone PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 21 00 SetBearTracker PaulOpitz r5 13 May 2009 14 46 SetFrequencies PaulOpitz r7 13 May 2009 14 48 SetLocationInfo PaulOpitz r5 14 Apr 2009 16 11 SettingAlerts PaulOpitz r5 17 Apr 2009 16 00 SrchCloCallOpt file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCT15X html 6 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 11 AM...

Page 93: ... Mar 2009 22 09 UnidenScannersUsersGuides PaulOpitz r16 13 May 2009 15 52 UsingQuickKeysStartupKeysAndSearchKeys PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 22 15 WarrantyAndSupportInformation PaulOpitz r7 24 Mar 2009 22 17 WeatherMode PaulOpitz r5 14 Apr 2009 18 16 Number of topics 64 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCT15X html 7 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 11 AM ...

Page 94: ...35 BandScopeMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 17 17 CalculatingUpperBaseFrequencies PaulOpitz r6 08 May 2009 14 36 CategoryBCD396XT PaulOpitz r2 24 Mar 2009 18 33 CloseCall PaulOpitz r9 12 May 2009 19 42 CloseCallMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 19 50 ConnectingAGPSReceiver PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 18 41 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD396XT html 1...

Page 95: ...ystems PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 20 14 EditBandPlan PaulOpitz r5 30 Mar 2009 17 16 EditChannel PaulOpitz r6 15 Apr 2009 15 17 EditGroup PaulOpitz r5 13 Apr 2009 20 25 EditSite PaulOpitz r7 13 May 2009 14 39 EditSysOption PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 19 56 EditTalkGroupID PaulOpitz file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD396XT html 2 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 ...

Page 96: ...6 12 May 2009 21 07 IntroductionToSAMEMessages PaulOpitz r8 12 May 2009 20 53 KeySafeMode PaulOpitz r7 13 May 2009 14 44 KeysAndTheirFunctions PaulOpitz r5 06 Apr 2009 22 24 LTRTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r8 12 May 2009 21 11 LocationBasedScanning PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 19 41 MenuTree file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD396XT html 3 of 7 5 26 200...

Page 97: ...ityScan PaulOpitz r5 06 Apr 2009 22 25 ProgramLocation PaulOpitz r5 14 Apr 2009 15 22 ProgramSystem PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 15 23 ProgrammingLocations PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 20 43 PublishContribHistory PaulOpitz r30 13 May 2009 15 26 RadioSystemsOverview PaulOpitz r5 24 Mar 2009 20 47 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD396XT html 4 of 7 5 26...

Page 98: ...z r4 24 Mar 2009 20 54 SearchFor PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 21 46 SearchKeys PaulOpitz r5 14 Apr 2009 15 44 SearchWithScan PaulOpitz r6 14 Apr 2009 15 53 SetAlertTone PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 21 00 SetFrequencies PaulOpitz r7 13 May 2009 14 48 SetLocationInfo PaulOpitz file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD396XT html 5 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 13 AM ...

Page 99: ...ystems PaulOpitz r8 13 May 2009 14 50 SrchCloCallOpt PaulOpitz r9 13 May 2009 14 51 StandardP25TrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r10 13 May 2009 14 51 StartupKeys PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 21 50 ToneAAndToneBSettings PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 22 09 ToneOutFor PaulOpitz r7 14 Apr 2009 18 14 ToneOutMode file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD396XT html 6 of 7 5...

Page 100: ...ulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 22 15 WXOperation PaulOpitz r8 12 May 2009 22 03 WarrantyAndSupportInformation PaulOpitz r7 24 Mar 2009 22 17 WeatherMode PaulOpitz r5 14 Apr 2009 18 16 WiredClone PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 22 18 Number of topics 64 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBCD396XT html 7 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 13 AM ...

Page 101: ...2009 15 31 AvailableOperationModes PaulOpitz r15 12 May 2009 15 33 BC346XT PaulOpitz r13 14 May 2009 19 33 BC346XTDisplays PaulOpitz r8 12 May 2009 21 37 BC346XTHoldMode PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 15 48 BC346XTSearchFor PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 15 56 BC346XTSettings PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 16 04 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBC346XT html 1 of...

Page 102: ... 08 May 2009 14 36 CategoryBC346XT PaulOpitz r2 24 Mar 2009 18 32 CloseCall PaulOpitz r9 12 May 2009 19 42 CloseCallMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 19 50 ConnectingAGPSReceiver PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 18 41 ConventionalSystems PaulOpitz r9 12 May 2009 19 58 DecipheringTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBC346XT html 2 of 7 ...

Page 103: ...Group PaulOpitz r5 13 Apr 2009 20 25 EditSite PaulOpitz r7 13 May 2009 14 39 EditSysOption PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 19 56 EditTalkGroupID PaulOpitz r10 12 May 2009 15 18 FCCInformation PaulOpitz r7 24 Mar 2009 19 30 GPSMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 20 39 GeneralPrecautions file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBC346XT html 3 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 14 ...

Page 104: ...unctions PaulOpitz r5 06 Apr 2009 22 24 LTRTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r8 12 May 2009 21 11 LocationBasedScanning PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 19 41 MenuReference PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 19 57 MotorolaFleetMaps PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 19 45 MotorolaTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r13 12 May 2009 21 29 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBC346XT html 4 of 7 5 ...

Page 105: ... Mar 2009 20 43 PublishContribHistory PaulOpitz r30 13 May 2009 15 26 QuickKeys PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 21 30 RadioSystemsOverview PaulOpitz r5 24 Mar 2009 20 47 ScanMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 21 42 ScanningLegally PaulOpitz r7 24 Mar 2009 20 54 SearchAndStore PaulOpitz file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBC346XT html 5 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 14...

Page 106: ...itz r7 13 May 2009 14 48 SetLocationInfo PaulOpitz r5 14 Apr 2009 16 11 SettingAlerts PaulOpitz r5 17 Apr 2009 16 00 SettingUpTheHardware PaulOpitz r7 24 Mar 2009 21 07 SrchCloCallOpt PaulOpitz r9 13 May 2009 14 51 StartupKeys PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 21 50 ToneAAndToneBSettings file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBC346XT html 6 of 7 5 26 2009 11 ...

Page 107: ...r16 13 May 2009 15 52 UsingQuickKeysStartupKeysAndSearchKeys PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 22 15 WarrantyAndSupportInformation PaulOpitz r7 24 Mar 2009 22 17 WeatherMode PaulOpitz r5 14 Apr 2009 18 16 WiredClone PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 22 18 Number of topics 65 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryBC346XT html 7 of 7 5 26 2009 11 12 14 AM ...

Page 108: ... 12 May 2009 15 31 WX Operation This menu lets you configure how the scanner operates in Weather WX mode and Weather Alert WX Alert mode Weather Scan Start a normal weather scan AvailableOperationModes PaulOpitz r15 12 May 2009 15 33 Available Operation Modes The scanner has several different operation modes in each mode the scanner s operation display and key functions can be completely different...

Page 109: ... Set Backlight This menu lets you configure the display and key backlight Set Mode Choose how you want the backlight to operate 10 sec The BC346XTSpecs PaulOpitz r10 14 May 2009 19 09 BC346XT Specs Certified in accordance with FCC Rules and Regulations Part 15 Subpart C as of date of manufacture See FCC Information for more details BC346XTSrchCloCallOpt PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 16 14 BC346XT Srch ...

Page 110: ...BCD396XT and BC346XT Band Scope Mode BCT15X Band Scope Mode Band Scope mode Band Scope mode BCD996XTCloseCallMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 17 49 Close Call Mode This page applies only to the BCD996XT For other models see BCD396XT and BC346XT Close Call Mode BCT15X Band Scope Mode When the scanner BCD996XTGPSMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 17 58 GPS Mode This page applies only to the BCD996XT For oth...

Page 111: ...m Program Location Srch CloCall Opt Search for Close Call Priority Scan WX Operation BCD996XTScanMode PaulOpitz r9 12 May 2009 18 16 Scan mode This page applies only to the BCD996XT For other models see BCD396XT and BC346XT Scan Mode BCT15X Scan Mode Scanning vs Searching Scan and BCD996XTSettings PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 18 20 BCD996XT Settings This page applies only to the BCD996XT For other mod...

Page 112: ...T and BC346XT Band Scope Mode BCD996XT Band Scope Mode Band Scope mode Band Scope mode BCT15XCloseCallMode PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 18 42 Close Call Mode This page applies only to the BCT15X For other models see BCD396XT and BC346XT Close Call Mode BCD996XT Close Call Mode When the scanner BCT15XGPSMode PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 17 59 GPS Mode This page applies only to the BCT15X For other models s...

Page 113: ...am System Program Location Srch CloCall Opt Search for Set Bear Tracker Close Call Priority BCT15XReadingTheDisplay PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 21 38 BCT15X displays This page applies to the BCT15X For other models see BCD396XT and BCD996XT Reading the Display BC346XT Reading the Display The display BCT15XScanMode PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 19 26 Scan mode This page applies only to the BCT15X For other...

Page 114: ...r models see BCT15X Band Scope Mode BCD996XT Band Scope Mode Band Scope mode Band Scope mode BearTrackerWarningSystem PaulOpitz r2 08 May 2009 18 44 nop BearTracker Warning System The nop BearTracker Warning System BWS alerts you to nearby public safety radio activity This can give you an advanced warning of CalculatingUpperBaseFrequencies PaulOpitz r6 08 May 2009 14 36 Calculating upper base freq...

Page 115: ...meets the following criteria Outputs NMEA 0183 v3 01 ConventionalSystems PaulOpitz r9 12 May 2009 19 58 Conventional Systems Since a conventional system is really a collection of frequencies the first thing you need to know is the frequency for each channel you want DecipheringTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 20 00 Deciphering Trunked Systems Before you program a trunked system To the avera...

Page 116: ...listed in alphabetical order select the channel you want to EditGroup PaulOpitz r5 13 Apr 2009 20 25 Edit Group When you create a new channel group the scanner automatically assigns a default name of Group XX where XX is a 2 digit sequential number 1 through 20 EditSite PaulOpitz r7 13 May 2009 14 39 Edit Site When you create a new site the scanner automatically assigns a default site name using t...

Page 117: ...st have a compatible GPS receiver GeneralPrecautions PaulOpitz r7 24 Mar 2009 19 32 General Precautions Before you use this scanner please read and observe the following Earphone Warning You can use an optional 32 Omega stereo headset or earphone HoldMode PaulOpitz r6 12 May 2009 21 07 Hold mode This page applies only to the BCD396XT and BC346XT For other models see BCD996XT Hold Mode BCT15X Hold ...

Page 118: ...ual layout diagram of a basic LTR system LocationBasedScanning PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 19 41 Location based Scanning Location based scanning allows you to control which systems sites and channel groups are scanned based on your exact location This frees you MenuReference PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 19 57 Menu reference BC346XT main menu Program System Program Location Srch CloCall Opt Search for Clo...

Page 119: ...he scanner contains 16 pre programmed fleet maps you can select The table below gives the size code for each block of the MotorolaTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r13 12 May 2009 21 29 Motorola Trunked Systems A Motorola system can be an 800 MHz 400 MHz UHF or 100 200 MHz VHF system Below are some examples of these Motorola systems from RadioReference NumberTags PaulOpitz r6 14 Apr 2009 15 17 Number Tags ...

Page 120: ... geographic coordinates you want to use PublishContribHistory PaulOpitz r30 13 May 2009 15 26 Last Published Publisher PaulOpitz Date 13 May 2009 15 22 PublishContrib Dir D twiki pub publish PublishContrib URL http info uniden com twiki pub QuickKeys PaulOpitz r5 12 May 2009 21 30 Quick Keys Quick Keys let you enable or disable systems and channel groups during a scan Disabled systems and channel ...

Page 121: ...nt agencies private SearchAndStore PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 20 54 Search and Store With this feature the scanner searches a system and saves any frequencies it finds activity on When the scanner detects activity on a frequency SearchFor PaulOpitz r7 12 May 2009 21 46 Search for Use this menu to start a search to change the options for the three different types of searches and program the 3 search ...

Page 122: ...encies PaulOpitz r7 13 May 2009 14 48 Set Frequencies This menu lets you create frequencies and edit existing ones All existing frequencies are listed in the order they were created select the frequency SetLocationInfo PaulOpitz r5 14 Apr 2009 16 11 Set LocationInfo Use this menu to configure geographic information for each system or site With this information and a standard NMEA GPS input the sca...

Page 123: ...eral options for how the scanner operates in Search and Close Call modes Freq Lockouts Rvw Search L O This option StandardP25TrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r10 13 May 2009 14 51 Standard P25 Trunked Systems This section deals with standard Project 25 or P25 systems Click here for information on P25 one frequency systems Below is an example StartupKeys PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 21 50 Startup Keys Startup ...

Page 124: ...ith the tone out feature UnidenScannersUsersGuides PaulOpitz r16 13 May 2009 15 52 Uniden Scanners Users Guides These web pages provide a guide to setting up and using your scanner Note that we are continuously updating and improving the content UserGuideInformation PaulOpitz r5 24 Mar 2009 22 19 User Guide Information Illustrations in this guide are used for explanation purposes only Your scanner...

Page 125: ...custhelp com uniden Phone support WeatherMode PaulOpitz r5 14 Apr 2009 18 16 Weather mode Since the 10 NOAA weather channels now cooperate with the FCC and DHS to alert you of other hazards besides weather it s important to understand how WiredClone PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 22 18 Wired Clone This feature allows you to copy all the settings from one scanner to another of the same model 1 Use the in...

Page 126: ...his page applies to the BCD396XT BCD996XT and BC346XT The BCT15X uses preprogrammed state by state data instead System information changes all the time The preloaded systems were accurately programmed several months prior to first production It is possible that a system preloaded in the scanner is no longer operational with the preloaded settings Turning On Off Preloaded Systems To turn a preloade...

Page 127: ...ity MO 43 Las Vegas NV T 43 Las Vegas NV C 44 LosAngelesCntyCA 45 Miami FL 46 MilwaukeeCntyWI 47 New York NY 48 Norfolk VA 49 Newport News VA 50 Pittsburgh PA 51 Portland OR 52 Prescott AZ 53 Nevada Shared 54 Sacramento CA 55 San Diego CA 56 Seattle WA 57 Tuscon AZ 58 OklahomaStatewid 59 Wichita KS BCD396XT BCD996XT SQK System 21 Alaska ALMR 22 Arkansas AWIN file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpit...

Page 128: ...ate System 33 Michigan MPSCS 34 Mississippi MWIN 35 Montana State System 36 North Carolina VIPER 37 Nevada SRS 38 Ohio MARCS 39 Rhode Island RISCON 40 South Carolina C Palmetto 800 41 South Dakota State 42 Texas DPS 43 Utah UCAN 44 Virginia STARS 45 West Virginia WVIRP 46 WyoLink file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D mp CDImage_090515 Manual UsingPreloadedSystems html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11...

Page 129: ...ervice Search Bands 12 Band Scope Span Range 0 2 MHz To 500 MHz Band Scope Step 5 kHz To 100 kHz Frequency Coverage 25 0000 512 0000 MHz 758 0000 823 9875 MHz 849 0125 868 9875 MHz 894 0125 960 0000 MHz 1240 0000 1300 0000 MHz Features TrunkTracker IV with Control Channel Only scanning and I Call monitoring Tracks voice traffic on P25 Motorola EDACS and LTR Trunked systems Supports scanning of Reb...

Page 130: ...tem Channel Number Tagging provides rapid access to a specific system or channel Scan and selected Service Search simultaneously Frequency ID AutoStore automatically store frequencies from a service or limit search into a conventional system or store talk group IDs into a trunked system 16 character text tagging for each system group channel talkgroup search range and SAME group Compatible with BC...

Page 131: ...Upgradeable firmware Channel Alert both tones and backlight color Independent Alert Tone Volume lets you set the volume level of the following tones Key Beep Emergency Alert Channel Alert and Close Call Alert Repeater Reverse Broadcast signal ignore while searching TV and radio station frequencies pagers etc Duplicate Channel Alert PC Programming and Control Wired Cloning Record Output Automatic b...

Page 132: ...trunking systems Dynamic memory allocation capacity Heterodyne System CTCSS and DCS Tones General Attenuation 20dB nominal Audio Output Power 3W nominal into 8Ω speaker 30mW nominal into 32Ω stereo headphone Scan Rate 100 channels per second max Conventional mode Search Rate 300 steps per second max 5kHz steps only External Jacks Antenna Jack BNC Type Phone Jack 3 5mm 1 8 in Stereo Type file C Doc...

Page 133: ...0W Max 77mm 3 0 in Power Requirements DC 11V to 16 6V Ext DC Power Jack or DC Power Jack AC Adapter 13 8V DC 750mA Regulated AD 1009 Operating Temperature Nominal 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Close Call 10 C to 60 C 14 F to 140 F Size 7 2 in W x 5 9 in D x 2 2 in H Weight 3 44 lbs Remote Functions Direct PC control Database management Wired cloning Display 64 x 128 Full Dot Matrix LCD with multi colo...

Page 134: ...08 136 9916 MHz AM 0 2 V 137 173 9875 MHz NFM 0 5 V 174 215 95 MHz WFM 0 3 V 216 224 98 MHz NFM 0 3 V 225 379 975 MHz AM 0 3 V 380 512 MHz NFM 0 3 V 758 960 MHz NFM 0 4 V 1240 1300 MHz NFM Signal Noise Ratio nominal 49dB 25 27 995 MHz AM 41dB 28 53 98 MHz NFM file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTSpecs html 3 of 9 5 26 2009 11 12 21 AM ...

Page 135: ... WFM 41dB 216 224 98 MHz NFM 50dB 225 379 975 MHz AM 40dB 380 512 MHz NFM 41dB 758 960 MHz NFM 37dB 1240 1300 MHz NFM Close Call Sensitivity nominal 140 V VHF Low1 Band 100 V VHF Low2 Band 80 V Air Band 80 V VHF High1 Band 90 V VHF High2 Band file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTSpecs html 4 of 9 5 26 2009 11 12 21 AM ...

Page 136: ...ter Amateur Band 29 7000 49 9900 NFM 10 VHF Low Band 50 0000 53 9800 NFM 20 6 Meter Amateur Band 54 0000 71 9500 WFM 50 VHF TV 72 0000 75 9950 FM 5 Intersystem Astronomy 76 0000 87 9500 WFM 50 VHF TV 88 0000 107 9000 FMB 100 FM Broadcast 108 0000 136 9916 AM 8 33 Aircraft Band 137 0000 143 9875 NFM 12 5 Military Land Mobile 144 0000 147 9950 NFM 5 2 Meter Amateur Band file C Documents 20and 20Sett...

Page 137: ...000 419 9875 NFM 12 5 Federal Government Land Mobile 420 0000 449 9875 NFM 12 5 70 cm Amateur Band 450 0000 469 9875 NFM 12 5 UHF Standard Band 470 0000 512 0000 NFM 12 5 UHF TV 758 0000 787 99375 NFM 6 25 Public Service Band 788 0000 805 99375 NFM 6 25 Public Service Band 806 0000 823 9875 NFM 12 5 Public Service Band 849 0125 868 9875 NFM 12 5 Public Service Band 894 0125 960 0000 NFM 12 5 Publi...

Page 138: ...I II II I hybrid EDACS Systems FM NFM and SCAT LTR Systems APCO Systems Astro Imbe Astro 25 Dynamic memory allocation capacity Systems 500 max Groups 20 per system Site 1000 max All 256 per system Channels 25000 max 40128 memory blocks Channels per Trunked System 500 max Heterodyne System 1st IF 380 7 to 380 8 MHz 265 5 to 265 6 MHz 2nd IF 10 8 MHz 3rd IF 450 kHz CTCSS and DCS Tones file C Documen...

Page 139: ...29 1 233 6 241 8 250 3 254 1 DCS Tone Codes 104 codes total 023 025 026 031 032 036 043 047 051 053 054 065 071 072 073 074 114 115 116 122 125 131 132 134 143 145 152 155 156 162 165 172 174 205 212 223 225 226 243 244 245 246 251 252 255 261 263 265 266 271 274 306 311 315 325 331 332 343 346 351 356 364 365 371 411 412 413 423 431 432 445 446 452 454 455 462 464 465 466 503 506 516 523 526 532 ...

Page 140: ... 631 632 654 662 664 703 712 723 731 732 734 743 754 This page applies to the following scanners BCD996XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTSpecs html 9 of 9 5 26 2009 11 12 21 AM ...

Page 141: ...Alert mode Tone Out mode Band Scope mode Scan mode The scanner checks each frequency in the user programmed list of frequencies For trunked systems it checks each Talk Group ID in the user programmed list When it detects a signal the scanner stays on the channel and opens squelch For trunked systems if the Talk Group ID becomes active the scanner switches to the audio channel and opens squelch Whe...

Page 142: ...an Mode BCD396XT and BC346XT Hand Held Scanner Search Mode BCD996XT BCD996XT Search Mode BCT15X BCT15X Search Mode To enter Search mode FUNCTION tap SCAN The scanner asks if you want to perform the Quick Search tap YES if this is the search you want To start a different search tap NO the scanner takes you to the Search for menu and you can select your search Hold mode The scanner stays on the curr...

Page 143: ...de To enter Close Call mode on the BCD396XT or BC346XT FUNCTION repeatedly tap HOLD until Close Call Pri appears To enter Close Call mode on the BCD996XT repeatedly tap the SQ knob until Close Call Pri appears To enter Close Call mode on the BCT15X Function repeatedly tap the SQ knob until Close Call Pri appears The Close Call icon appears for Close Call Priority mode and is in reverse colors for ...

Page 144: ...ration and other specifics about Close Call Do Not Disturb mode BCD396XT or BC346XT Handheld Scanner Close Call Mode BCD996XT BCD996XT Close Call Mode BCT15X BCT15X Close Call Mode To enter Close Call Do Not Disturb mode on the BCD396XT or BC346XT FUNCTION repeatedly press HOLD until Close Call DND appears To enter Close Call Do Not Disturb mode on the BCD996XT repeatedly press the SQ knob until C...

Page 145: ... in the system option menu as well as tagging the channel as priority Trunked priority only works while scanning that system s control channel or in the case of Motorola systems when the scanner is scanning any channel in the system Priority Plus Scan mode The scanner stops the current operation and only performs Priority Scan checks as described above To enter Priority Plus Scan mode on the BCD39...

Page 146: ...o channels and opens squelch when it detects a signal When the signal stops the scanner continues checking the other weather channels For more information about Weather Mode see Weather Mode To enter Weather mode on the BCD396XT or BC346XT FUNCTION press hold WX To enter Weather mode on the BCD996XT press hold WX To enter Weather mode on the BCT15X FUNCTION press and hold GPS WX Weather Priority M...

Page 147: ...t tone For more information about Weather Alert Mode see Weather Mode To enter Weather Alert mode on the BCD396XT or BC346XT 1 Enter Weather mode 2 FUNCTION tap WX To enter Weather Alert mode on the BCD996XT 1 Enter Weather mode 2 Tap WX To enter Weather Alert mode on the BCT15X 1 Enter Weather mode 2 FUNCTION tap GPS WX Tone Out mode The scanner checks up to 10 user programmed channels for two to...

Page 148: ...s a visual representation of the signal level For more information about Band Scope Mode BCD396XT or BC346XT Hand Held Band Scope Mode BCD996XT BCD996XT Band Scope Mode BCT15X BCT15X Band Scope Mode To enter Band Scope Mode 1 Set one of the 3 search keys to a Band Scope search 2 Enter Search mode 3 FUNCTION Tap the designated search key This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X ...

Page 149: ...ted item appears in reversed out text To select the highlighted item or confirm an option setting tap E YES or press down on the Scroll Function knob To cancel an option setting press NO To go back one level in the menu tap MENU To exit the menu press LOCKOUT The scanner goes back to the operating mode it was in before you entered the menu This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT User...

Page 150: ...uble tap the button FUNCTION Press hold press and release FUNCTION then press and hold the button Using the FUNCTION button When you tap FUNCTION the scroll knob the scanner remembers the FUNCTION key combination for the next 3 seconds during this time it displays an F icon at the top of the screen If you want the scanner to maintain the FUNCTION key combination longer press hold FUNCTION The scan...

Page 151: ...mode key functions Band Scope mode key functions Available functions in Key Safe mode This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ge_090515 Manual BCD996XTKeysAndTheirFunctions html 2 of 2 5 26 2009 11 12 25 AM ...

Page 152: ... The diagram shows common icon locations and table below lists the most common icons and their meanings Attenuator icon Steady The attenuator is turned on for the current channel Blinking The attenuator is turned on globally for all channels Battery level icon Handheld models only x xx The remaining battery voltage is displayed in place of the Xs file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ts...

Page 153: ... data on it ENC The received signal is encrypted P25 digitized voice and the scanner has muted the audio Cxx x The scanner has detected a CTCSS code the received code is displayed in place of the Xs DCSxxx The scanner has detected a DCS code the received code is displayed in place of the Xs NAC xxx The scanner has detected a P25 network address code NAC the received code is displayed in place of t...

Page 154: ...ite are displayed on this line The GQK number of the group that is currently being scanned blinks In Hold mode This line displays the GQK number of the current group only In Custom Search mode The numbers of any programmed search ranges are display on this line The number of the custom range that is currently being searched blinks Hold icon The scanner is in Hold mode IFX icon You switched to the ...

Page 155: ...at is currently being scanned blinks For SQK numbers above 9 the tens digit replaces the X in the icon the ones digits are shown on this line In Hold mode This line displays the SQK number of the current system or site only For SQK numbers above 9 the tens digit replaces the X in the icon the ones digit is displayed on this line In Service Search mode The icon SCR replaces the System numbers if th...

Page 156: ...nidenMan4 TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCD396XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual ReadingTheDisplay html 5 of 5 5 26 2009 11 12 26 AM ...

Page 157: ...nner from the DIN E Sleeve Mounting Using ISO Technique Removing the Display Sticker Connecting an Optional Antenna Connecting an Earphone Headphone Connecting an Extension Speaker Included With Your Scanner Scanner AC Adapter Vehicle Accessory Power Cord Three Wire Harness Mounting Bracket and Hardware Antenna Serial Programming Cable O M on CD ROM Other Printed Materials file C Documents 20and 2...

Page 158: ...ate listening Read the precautions at General Precautions Do not use the scanner in high moisture environments such as the kitchen or bathroom Avoid placing the scanner in direct sunlight or near heating elements or vents Power Related Issues Important To prevent memory from being corrupted do not unplug the AC adapter during the time the memory is accessed for programming or auto store Notes If w...

Page 159: ...ed by the setting of the volume control Use a mono or stereo cable that ends in a 3 5mm plug for the scanner The recorder might have its own requirements as to the proper plug Check the recorder s instructions to be sure Connect the cable to an external or internal VOX control so that the recorder operates when audio is present You can also connect the cable to the appropriate input jack on your P...

Page 160: ...o install your scanner in your vehicle using the optional DIN E sleeve consult your automobile manufacturer dealer or a qualified installer Before installing confirm that your scanner fits in the desired mounting area and you have all the necessary materials to complete the task Your scanner requires a 2 x 7 1 8 x 5 5 16 inch 50 x 180 x 135 mm mounting area Allow an additional 2 3 8 inch 60mm spac...

Page 161: ...t locks in place 8 To remove the unit fully insert the removal keys into each slot on the left and right edges of the front panel Carefully slide the radio from the sleeve Note If you plan to connect a GPS unit or external speaker at a later time expect to remove the unit for ease of making those connections Removing the Scanner from the DIN E Sleeve If you plan to connect other devices or wires t...

Page 162: ...et Uniden does not supply these screws Their diameter length and screw type should be chosen by a qualified installer based on the internal vehicle bracket which will be used in securing the scanner chassis Once the original radio is removed from the vehicle dash and the fit of the scanner is correct be sure to connect all the power audio antenna and any other cables or wires to the scanner before...

Page 163: ...er See the Earphone Warning for important information about using an earphone headphone WARNING Never connect anything other than the recommended amplified extension speaker to the scanner s headphone jack Damage to the scanner might occur Connecting an Extension Speaker In a noisy area an optional amplified extension speaker positioned in the right place might provide more comfortable listening P...

Page 164: ...ver that meets the following criteria Outputs NMEA 0183 v3 01 compliant location data Outputs both the Global Positioning System Fix GGA and Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS RMC data sentences Provides a serial data RS 232 connection Configuring your scanner 1 Go to the Settings menu and select Set Serial Port 2 Select Set Baud Rate 3 Select Set Rear Port 4 Select 4800 bps for the baud rate Conne...

Page 165: ... of 4800 bps but it s possible your receiver is using a non standard baud rate Set the scanner s baud rate to match the GPS receiver s Check the receiver s output mode Some receivers have proprietary signalling modes that are not NMEA compliant but you can usually set them to use a NMEA compliant mode If the scanner recognizes the GPS receiver but doesn t lockout systems as you expected Make sure ...

Page 166: ...ttings to make sure they are correct 3 Make sure the Set GPS Enable option is set to Yes This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D age_090515 Manual MobileConnectingAGPSReceiver html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11 12 33 AM ...

Page 167: ...g Number Tags Assigning an SNT Assigning a CHNT Using Number Tags Programming Number Tags Assigning an SNT SNTs can range from 0 to 999 Systems can have the same SNT but you will get a warning when you create multiples This includes SNTs assigned to the Close Call Hits system or any search ranges To a system 1 Open the Program System menu 2 Select the system you want to assign the number tag to 3 ...

Page 168: ... search range Assigning a CHNT You can assign CHNTs to channels even if the system does not have an assigned SNT However without an SNT you can only navigate to these channels from within that system itself CHNTs can be duplicated within their own system but you will see a warning when you create multiples CHNTs can range from 0 to 999 1 Open the Program System menu 2 Select the system containing ...

Page 169: ...nce i e the first time you select the SNT the scanner will go to the first system assigned with that SNT if you select the same SNT again it will go to the 2nd system assigned with that SNT and so on If two channels in the same system have the same CHNT they will be selected in sequence i e the first time you select the CHNT the scanner will go to the first channel in that system assigned with tha...

Page 170: ...hese search Quick Keys operate like regular SQKs Programming Quick Keys Assigning an SQK Assigning a GQK Using Quick Keys To use SQK 0 through 9 To use SQK 10 through 99 To use a GQK Programming Quick Keys Assigning an SQK Multiple systems sites and search ranges can share the same SQK All systems and sites assigned to the same SQK will be enabled or disabled when you enter the Quick Key SQKs rang...

Page 171: ... Quick Key 4 Enter the Quick Key you want to use for this search range To a custom search range 1 Open the Search for menu 2 Select Edit Custom then select the custom search range you want to assign the Quick Key to 3 Select Search with Scan then select Set Quick Key 4 Enter the Quick Key you want to use for this custom search range Assigning a GQK All channels in the channel group will be enabled...

Page 172: ... currently enabled entering the Quick Key will disable it and vice versa To use SQK 0 through 9 Enter Scan mode Tap the number key that matches the SQK For example if the SQK is 4 just enter 4 Any systems sites or search ranges assigned to this SQK become disabled If they were already disabled they become enabled To use SQK 10 through 99 Enter Scan mode Tap the decimal point NO then enter the SQK ...

Page 173: ... groups assigned to this GQK within the current system only become disabled If they were already disabled they become enabled This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual QuickKeys html 4 of 4 5 26 2009 11 12 34 AM ...

Page 174: ...ng Search Keys To start the search assigned to a Search Key FUNCTION tap that Search Key For example to start the search assigned to Search Key 2 FUNCTION tap 2 You can t use the Search Keys when the scanner is in Scan mode or GPS mode If the Search Key you select starts a Tone Out search the scanner switches to Tone Out mode and searches the most recently used Tone Out channel out of the 10 avail...

Page 175: ...TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual SearchKeys html 2 of 2 5 26 2009 11 12 35 AM ...

Page 176: ...Select the Set LocationInfo menu and enter the latitude longitude and range for this site 5 Change the Set GPS Enable field to On 6 Go back to the Edit Site menu and repeat these steps with any other sites you want to program for this system Programming a location for a channel group Each channel group in a system can have separate location information 1 Open the Program System menu 2 Select the s...

Page 177: ...e 3 Select New Location to create a new location of this type 4 If you want to create a different type of location go back to the Program Location menu and select that location type 5 If you want to change the default location name select Edit Name and enter a new name 6 Select Set LocationInfo and enter the latitude and longitude for this location 7 Select Set Range and enter the distance from th...

Page 178: ...heading For example if you set the heading as North the scanner will trigger an alert if your current heading is North east but not if your current heading is due East Edit an existing location 1 Open the Program Location menu 2 Select the type of location you want to edit the scanner lists the existing locations of that type in alphabetical order 3 Select the location you want to edit then change...

Page 179: ...the group you want 3 Select Edit Channel then select the channel you want to set the alert for 4 Select Set Alert 5 Choose the Alert Tone and Alert Light you want the scanner to use An active Talk Group on a system contains an emergency flag Edit the system properties Edit Sys Option Emergency Alert 1 Go to the Program System menu and select the system you want set the alert for 2 Select Edit Sys ...

Page 180: ...ert Tone and Alert Light you want the scanner to use You approach a particular location Point of Interest POI Dangerous Road Dangerous Intersection Dangerous Xing Edit the location properties 1 Go to the Program Location menu and select the type of location you want set the alert for 2 Select the particular location 3 For a POI select Set Alert then choose the Alert Tone and the Alert Light you wa...

Page 181: ...TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BC346XT BCD396XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual SettingAlerts html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11 12 37 AM ...

Page 182: ... Startup Keys Startup Keys let you lock and unlock several systems sites and search ranges all at the same time When you activate a Startup Key the scanner unlocks all systems sites and search ranges that are assigned to that same Startup Key the scanner also locks all systems sites and search ranges that are assigned to a different Startup Key To activate a Startup Key press hold the number key w...

Page 183: ...channels 1 Press FUNCTION Squelch knob 2 Select the Tone Out channel Tone Out 1 through Tone Out 10 you want to configure 3 Press E to enter the configuration menu and set the properties as desired Required Frequencies Set Frequencies Tone A and Tone B Set Tones Recommended Name Edit Name Optional Automatic Gain Control Set Audio AGC Delay Time Set Delay Time Alert Set Alert Record Flag Set Record...

Page 184: ...h range assigned to this Search Key Key Name 2nd operation Action on Weather 4 IF exchange 5 Level offset 6 Display mode Tap Toggle Weather Priority Mode Enter a digit in Direct Entry mode FUNCTION Tap Toggle Weather Priority Mode Toggle the IF for that the current frequency NA NA Press Hold Go to Weather Scan mode NA NA NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on GPS 7 Attenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modula...

Page 185: ...configuration settings for the selected tone out Key Name 2nd operation Action on SQUELCH VOLUME SCAN SEARCH HOLD RESUME Rotate Adjust Squelch Adjust volume Turn fully counterclockwise past click to turn off scanner NA NA Tap Change Close Call mode Change backlight level Go to Scan mode Toggle Tone Out Hold mode Press Hold Go to Close Call Only mode NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Go to Tone Out Mode Toggle...

Page 186: ...lect the Tone Out to use Tap NA Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress Press Hold NA Lock the FUNCTION mode This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT UsersGuide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 2 mp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTToneOutMode html 4 of 4 5 26 2009 11 12 40 AM ...

Page 187: ...his prevents the audio from cutting out every 2 seconds In Close Call Only mode the scanner only performs Close Call checks The Close Call menu lets you change the operation settings of the Close Call feature You can change the overall Close Call options through the Srch CloCall Opt menu Key Operation in Close Call Mode Key Name 2nd operation Action On PRIORITY 1 Search 1 2 Search 2 3 Search 3 Tap...

Page 188: ...isplay Turn off the associated Close Call range NA NA Press hold NA NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Switch to the GPS Navigation display Toggle the attenuator state NA Change the modulation FUNCTION Press hold NA Toggle the attenuator state for all signals If stopped on a frequency that has a valid reverse input frequency show the repeater reverse frequency for the current frequency the scanner returns to t...

Page 189: ...SQUELCH VOLUME SCAN SEARCH HOLD RESUME Rotate Adjust Squelch Adjust volume Turn fully counterclockwise past click to turn off scanner NA NA Tap Turn off Close Call mode Change backlight level Go to Scan mode Hold on the most recent Close Call hit frequency If you have not received a Close Call hit NA Press Hold NA NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Go to Fire Tone Out Mode Go to P25 status mode Go to the Quick...

Page 190: ...lockout review mode NA Double Tap If stopped on a frequency permanently lockout the frequency NA Press Hold If stopped on a frequency unlock all search frequencies Latch the FUNCTION mode Scanner stays on the current system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION mode until you tap the control again This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POp...

Page 191: ... In Max Hold Search mode the scanner displays the strongest signal that it found If you manually set the mode to NFM or FM the scanner will not reliably detect signals that are modulated in either FMB or WFM To turn on Band Scope mode Band Scope mode is the default setting for Search Key 3 To turn on Band Scope mode enter Hold or Search mode then tap FUNCTION 3 SR3 To change the Search Key assignm...

Page 192: ...y Name 2nd operation Action On PRIORITY 1 Search 1 2 Search 2 3 Search 3 Tap NA NA FUNCTION Tap NA Start the search range assigned to this Search Key file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 p CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTBandScopeMode html 2 of 5 5 26 2009 11 12 45 AM ...

Page 193: ...NA NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on GPS 7 Attenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modulation Tap Switch to the GPS Navigation display NA FUNCTION Tap Switch to the GPS Navigation display Toggle the attenuator state NA Change the modulation FUNCTION Press hold NA Toggle the attenuator state for all signals NA NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Menu No Decimal 0 Yes Enter file C Documents 20and 20Settings ...

Page 194: ...tion on SQUELCH VOLUME SCAN SEARCH HOLD RESUME Rotate Adjust Squelch Adjust volume Turn fully counterclockwise past click to turn off scanner NA NA Tap Change Close Call mode Change backlight level Resume scanning Hold on the current frequency Press again to resume Press Hold Go to Close Call Only mode NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Go to Tone Out Mode Go to P25 status mode Switch between Max Hold Search m...

Page 195: ...except CF Function Rotate NA Change the marker frequency one bar per click Tap In Band Scope setting mode return to the normal Band Scope mode Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress Function Tap Restart the Band Scope NA This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT UsersGuide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 p CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTBandScopeMode html 5 of 5...

Page 196: ...you might want to use a GPS receiver with your scanner an explanation of two different approaches to location based scanning some information on finding antenna locations Programming locations contains details on how to program locations for systems sites and channels details on how to program Points of Interest POI Dangerous Roads and Dangerous Intersections Dangerous Xing information on reviewin...

Page 197: ...displays are available if you select a POI Large arrow shows direction to the POI Current Direction of Travel Distance to the POI Upper right corner depends on display mode ETA to POI Current time Current elevation Current speed Location Display file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTGPSMode html 2 of 5 5 26 2009 11 12 47 AM ...

Page 198: ...ous Crossing or Dangerous Road Location review display These displays show the details of each location you ve set SCROLL to go to the next location Keypad controls in GPS Review Location Mode Keys not listed have no function in this mode Key Name 2nd operation Action on GPS MENU Yes Enter LOCKOUT Tap NA Return to GPS Mode Go to the menu mode Change the lockout status of the current location file ...

Page 199: ...N mode for the next keypress Go to Scan Mode Go to Scan Hold mode Press Hold NA NA Latch the FUNCTION mode Scanner stays on the current system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION mode until you tap the control again NA NA Keypad controls in GPS Mode Keys not listed have no function in this mode Key Name 2nd operation Action on GPS MENU Yes Enter LOCKOUT 6 DISPLAY Tap NA Go to the Menu mode Go to t...

Page 200: ...de for the next keypress Return to previous operation Hold on the current channel Press Hold NA NA Latch the FUNCTION mode Scanner stays on the current system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION mode until you tap the control again NA Hold on the current system If already holding on a system resume normal scanning when in scan mode Function Rotate NA NA Quickly skip to the location starting with t...

Page 201: ...ystem Number Tags 999 Preprogrammed Service Search Bands 12 Band Scope Range 0 2 to 500 MHz Band Scope Steps 5 kHz to 100 kHz Frequency Coverage 25 512 MHz 758 823 9875 MHz 849 0125 868 9875 MHz 894 0125 960 MHz 1240 1300 MHz Features TrunkTracker III tracks the following trunked systems Motorola Type I 800 Motorola Type II 800 900 UHF VHF including rebanded 800 MHz systems EDACS Wide standard Nar...

Page 202: ...e Out Alert Fire Tone Out Search determines the tones received for easy tone out programming Motorola Control Channel Only trunking DCS CTCSS Rapid Decode Channel Volume Offset Band Scope Search with Scan Frequency ID AutoStore automatically store frequencies from a service or limit search into a conventional system or store talk group IDs into a trunked system 16 character text tagging for each s...

Page 203: ...agers etc Quick Recall quickly navigates to a specific Channel by choosing the System Group and Channel DIN E and ISO Vehicle Mountable DIN E sleeve not included optional Reversible Display Lets you reverse the display to mount unit upside down and hear the speaker from the top Record Out you can connect an output jack to a VOX controlled recorder or PC sound input to record the received audio Dup...

Page 204: ... Functions Band Scope Function Two Tone Sequential WX Alert Supported trunking systems Dynamic memory allocation capacity Heterodyne System CTCSS and DCS Tones General Attenuation 20dB nominal Audio Output Power 3W nominal into 8Ω speaker 30mW nominal into 32Ω stereo headphone Scan Rate 100 channels per second max Conventional mode Search Rate 300 steps per second max 5kHz steps only External Jack...

Page 205: ... Speaker 8 0Ω 5 0W Max 77mm 3 0 in Power Requirements DC 11V to 16 6V Ext DC Power Jack or DC Power Jack AC Adapter 13 8V DC 750mA Regulated AD 1009 Operating Temperature Nominal 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Close Call 10 C to 60 C 14 F to 140 F Size 7 2 in W x 5 9 in D x 2 2 in H Weight 3 42 lbs Remote Functions Direct PC control Database management Wired cloning Display 64 x 128 Full Dot Matrix LCD...

Page 206: ... 136 9916 MHz AM 0 3 V 137 173 9875 MHz NFM 0 5 V 174 215 95 MHz WFM 0 3 V 216 224 98 MHz NFM 0 3 V 225 379 975 MHz AM 0 3 V 380 512 MHz NFM 0 3 V 758 960 MHz NFM 0 4 V 1240 1300 MHz NFM Signal Noise Ratio nominal 48dB 25 27 995 MHz AM 41dB 28 53 98 MHz NFM file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XSpecs html 3 of 9 5 26 2009 11 12 50 AM ...

Page 207: ...M 41dB 216 224 98 MHz NFM 50dB 225 379 975 MHz AM 40dB 380 512 MHz NFM 41dB 758 960 MHz NFM 37dB 1240 1300 MHz NFM Close Call Sensitivity nominal 160 V VHF Low1 Band 110 V VHF Low2 Band 90 V Air Band 90 V VHF High1 Band 100 V VHF High2 Band file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XSpecs html 4 of 9 5 26 2009 11 12 50 AM ...

Page 208: ...r Amateur Band 29 7000 49 9900 NFM 10 VHF Low Band 50 0000 53 9800 NFM 20 6 Meter Amateur Band 54 0000 71 9500 WFM 50 VHF TV 72 0000 75 9950 FM 5 Intersystem Astronomy 76 0000 87 9500 WFM 50 VHF TV 88 0000 107 9000 FMB 100 FM Broadcast 108 0000 136 9916 AM 8 33 Aircraft Band 137 0000 143 9875 NFM 12 5 Military Land Mobile 144 0000 147 9950 NFM 5 2 Meter Amateur Band file C Documents 20and 20Settin...

Page 209: ...0 419 9875 NFM 12 5 Federal Government Land Mobile 420 0000 449 9875 NFM 12 5 70 cm Amateur Band 450 0000 469 9875 NFM 12 5 UHF Standard Band 470 0000 512 0000 NFM 12 5 UHF TV 758 0000 787 99375 NFM 6 25 Public Service Band 788 0000 805 99375 NFM 6 25 Public Service Band 806 0000 823 9875 NFM 12 5 Public Service Band 849 0125 868 9875 NFM 12 5 Public Service Band 894 0125 960 0000 NFM 12 5 Public ...

Page 210: ...a Systems Type I II II I hybrid EDACS Systems FM NFM and SCAT LTR Systems Dynamic memory allocation capacity Systems 500 max Groups 20 per system Site 1000 max All 256 per system Channels 9000 max 21120 memory blocks Channels per Trunked System 500 max Heterodyne System 1st IF 380 7 to 380 8 MHz 265 5 to 265 6 MHz 2nd IF 10 8 MHz 3rd IF 450 kHz CTCSS and DCS Tones file C Documents 20and 20Settings...

Page 211: ... 1 233 6 241 8 250 3 254 1 DCS Tone Codes 104 codes total 023 025 026 031 032 036 043 047 051 053 054 065 071 072 073 074 114 115 116 122 125 131 132 134 143 145 152 155 156 162 165 172 174 205 212 223 225 226 243 244 245 246 251 252 255 261 263 265 266 271 274 306 311 315 325 331 332 343 346 351 356 364 365 371 411 412 413 423 431 432 445 446 452 454 455 462 464 465 466 503 506 516 523 526 532 54...

Page 212: ...631 632 654 662 664 703 712 723 731 732 734 743 754 This page applies to the following scanners BCT15X Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XSpecs html 9 of 9 5 26 2009 11 12 50 AM ...

Page 213: ... highlighted item appears in reversed out text To select the highlighted item or confirm an option setting tap E YES or press down on the Scroll Function knob To cancel an option setting press NO To go back one level in the menu tap MENU To exit the menu press LOCKOUT The scanner goes back to the operating mode it was in before you entered the menu This page applies to the following scanner s BCT1...

Page 214: ...TION tap press and release FUNCTION then tap the button FUNCTION Double tap press and release FUNCTION then double tap the button FUNCTION Press hold press and release FUNCTION then press and hold the button Using the FUNCTION button When you tap FUNCTION the scroll knob the scanner remembers the FUNCTION key combination for the next 3 seconds during this time it displays an F icon at the top of t...

Page 215: ...e key functions Close Call mode key functions Priority Scan mode key functions GPS mode key functions Tone Out mode key functions Band Scope mode key functions Available functions in Key Safe mode This page applies to the following scanner s BCT15X Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D mage_090515 Manual BCT15XKeysAndTheirFunctions html 2 of 2 5 26 2009 11 12 53 AM ...

Page 216: ...y The display icons vary depending on the status of the scanner and what youre doing at any given time The diagram shows common icon locations and table below lists the most common icons and their meanings General Display when Function is not activated file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XReadingTheDisplay html 1 of 5 5 26 2009 11 12 55 AM ...

Page 217: ...lly for all channels Channel Info icon Cxx x The scanner has detected a CTCSS code the received code is displayed in place of the Xs DCSxxx The scanner has detected a DCS code the received code is displayed in place of the Xs Close call icon Normal open icon Steady Close call priority mode is on Blinking Close Call Only mode is on or the scanner has detected a close call signal file C Documents 20...

Page 218: ...e GQK number of the current group only In Custom Search mode The numbers of any programmed search ranges are display on this line The number of the custom range that is currently being searched blinks Hold icon The scanner is in Hold mode IFX icon You switched to the intermediate frequency IF exchange This icon appears above the System Number Line in the Function mode Not illustrated GPS icon GPS ...

Page 219: ...line The SQK number of the system or site that is currently being scanned blinks For SQK numbers above 9 the tens digit replaces the X in the icon the ones digits are shown on this line In Hold mode This line displays the SQK number of the current system or site only For SQK numbers above 9 the tens digit replaces the X in the icon the ones digit is displayed on this line In Service Search mode Th...

Page 220: ...ys you can cycle through Band Scope mode display Hold mode displays GPS mode display This page applies to the following scanner s BCT15X Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XReadingTheDisplay html 5 of 5 5 26 2009 11 12 55 AM ...

Page 221: ...e locks out systems that are set to a different state and uses the current state preprogrammed data during state by state scanning Using the Built In State by State Agencies To use the built in State by State agencies repeatedly tap DOT POL PRI and Bear Paw HP ALT until the desired agency type s icon shows in the bottom row of the display PL Local Police DT Department of Transportation HP Highway ...

Page 222: ...WS will use frequencies most often used in your state to alert you to nearby activity Selecting your State To select the frequencies for your state tap FUNC the scroll knob then the Volume knob Use the scroll knob to select your state or Canadian province then press E or tap the scroll knob to use your selection Turning on the BearTracker Warning System To turn on the BearTracker Warning System re...

Page 223: ...ngSystem UnidenMan4 TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCT15X Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D CDImage_090515 Manual BearTrackerWarningSystem html 2 of 2 5 26 2009 11 12 56 AM ...

Page 224: ...one Out channel Tone Out 1 through Tone Out 10 you want to configure 3 Press E to enter the configuration menu and set the properties as desired Required Frequencies Set Frequencies Tone A and Tone B Set Tones Recommended Name Edit Name Optional Delay Time Set Delay Time Alert Set Alert Record Flag Set Record Using Tone Out Mode To start a Tone Out search MENU Tone Out for Tone Out Standby The sca...

Page 225: ...us 4 IF exchange 5 Level offset 6 Display mode Tap Go to Scan mode Enter a digit in Direct Entry mode FUNCTION Tap Start scanning in Alert Plus mode Toggle the IF for that the current frequency NA NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on GPS Weather 7 Attenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modulation Tap Switch to the GPS Navigation display Enter a digit in Direct Entry mode FUNCTION Tap Toggle Weather Alert Pri...

Page 226: ...E SCAN SEARCH HOLD RESUME Rotate Adjust Squelch Adjust volume Turn fully counterclockwise past click to turn off scanner NA NA Tap Temporarily mute alerts Tap again to restore Change backlight level Go to Scan mode Toggle Tone Out Hold mode Press Hold Permanently mut alerts Tap again to restore NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Toggle Close Call modes Select the state to use for state by state searches Prompt...

Page 227: ...lect the Tone Out to use Tap NA Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress Press Hold NA Lock the FUNCTION mode This page applies to the following scanner s BCT15X UsersGuide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XToneOutMode html 4 of 4 5 26 2009 11 12 59 AM ...

Page 228: ... Call Only mode the scanner only performs Close Call checks The Close Call menu lets you change the operation settings of the Close Call feature You can change the overall Close Call options through the Srch CloCall Opt menu Key Operation in Close Call Mode Key Name 2nd operation Action On DOT Police PRIORITY 1 Search 1 2 Search 2 3 Search 3 Tap Go to Scan mode Turn on off the associated Close Cal...

Page 229: ...he attenuator state NA Change the modulation FUNCTION Press hold Go to Weather Scan mode Toggle the attenuator state for all signals If stopped on a frequency that has a valid reverse input frequency show the repeater reverse frequency for the current frequency the scanner returns to the original frequency when you release the key NA When holding on a frequency Same functions as normal Close Call ...

Page 230: ...alert tone and set temporary alert mute Tap to release mute Change backlight level Go to Scan mode Hold on the most recent Close Call hit frequency If you have not received a Close Call hit NA Press Hold Set permanent alert mute Tap to release mute NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Turn off Close Call mode and return to scan Select the State Go to the Quick Search prompt If on a Close Call hit hold on the cur...

Page 231: ... Tap If stopped on a frequency permanently lockout the frequency NA Press Hold If stopped on a frequency unlock all search frequencies Latch the FUNCTION mode Scanner stays on the current system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION mode until you tap the control again This page applies to the following scanner s BCT15X Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 emp CDImage_090515 Ma...

Page 232: ... Hold Search mode the scanner displays the strongest signal that it found If you manually set the mode to NFM or FM the scanner will not reliably detect signals that are modulated in either FMB or WFM To turn on Band Scope mode Band Scope mode is the default setting for Search Key 3 To turn on Band Scope mode enter Hold or Search mode then tap FUNCTION 3 SR3 To change the Search Key assignment see...

Page 233: ...eration Action On Police DOT PRIORITY 1 Search 1 2 Search 2 3 Search 3 Tap Go to Scan Mode NA FUNCTION Tap NA Start the search range assigned to this Search Key file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 emp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XBandScopeMode html 2 of 5 5 26 2009 11 13 04 AM ...

Page 234: ...e Toggle the attenuator state NA Change the modulation FUNCTION Press hold Start Weather Scan Toggle the attenuator state for all signals NA NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Menu No Decimal 0 Yes Enter Tap Enter the Menu Mode Press to enter the Band Scope Setting mode and select a setting The selected setting flashes In Band Scope Setting mode selects the next setting NA Set the marker frequenc...

Page 235: ... Permanently mute alerts Press again to cancel NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Toggle Close Call Modes Select the current state Switch between Max Hold Search mode and Search Mode Hold on the current frequency Press again to resume Key Name 2nd operation Action on LOCKOUT SCROLL FUNCTION Rotate NA Change the marker frequency one step frequency per click In Band Scope Setting mode change the selected paramet...

Page 236: ...and Scope mode Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress Function Tap Restart the Band Scope NA This page applies to the following scanner s BCT15X UsersGuide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 emp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XBandScopeMode html 5 of 5 5 26 2009 11 13 04 AM ...

Page 237: ...ou might want to use a GPS receiver with your scanner an explanation of two different approaches to location based scanning some information on finding antenna locations Programming locations contains details on how to program locations for systems sites and channels details on how to program Points of Interest POI Dangerous Roads and Dangerous Intersections Dangerous Xing information on reviewing...

Page 238: ...isplays are available if you select a POI Large arrow shows direction to the POI Current Direction of Travel Distance to the POI Upper right corner depends on display mode ETA to POI Current time Current elevation Current speed Location Display file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XGPSMode html 2 of 5 5 26 2009 11 13 07 AM ...

Page 239: ...rossing or Dangerous Road Location review display These displays show the details of each location you ve set SCROLL to go to the next location Keypad controls in GPS Review Location Mode Keys not listed have no function in this mode Key Name 2nd operation Action on GPS Weather MENU Yes Enter LOCKOUT Tap NA Return to GPS Mode Go to the menu mode Change the lockout status of the current location fi...

Page 240: ...e for the next keypress Go to Scan Mode Go to Scan Hold mode Press Hold NA NA Latch the FUNCTION mode Scanner stays on the current system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION mode until you tap the control again NA NA Keypad controls in GPS Mode Keys not listed have no function in this mode Key Name 2nd operation Action on GPS Weather MENU Yes Enter LOCKOUT 6 DISPLAY Tap NA Go to the Menu mode Go t...

Page 241: ...de for the next keypress Return to previous operation Hold on the current channel Press Hold NA NA Latch the FUNCTION mode Scanner stays on the current system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION mode until you tap the control again NA Hold on the current system If already holding on a system resume normal scanning when in scan mode Function Rotate NA NA Quickly skip to the location starting with t...

Page 242: ...unction Two Tone Sequential WX Alert Supported trunking systems Dynamic memory allocation capacity Heterodyne System CTCSS and DCS Tones General Attenuation 20dB nominal Audio Output Power 310mW nominal into 24Ω speaker 20mW nominal into 32Ω stereo headphone Scan Rate 100 channels per second max Conventional mode Search Rate 300 steps per second max 5kHz steps only External Jacks Antenna Jack SMA ...

Page 243: ...ature Nominal 20 C to 60 4 F to 140 F Close Call 10 C to 60 C 14 F to 140 F Size 2 40 in W x 1 22 in D x 5 35 in H Without Antenna Weight 0 37 lbs Without Battery and Antenna Remote Functions Direct PC control Database management Wired cloning Display 64 x 128 Full Dot Matrix LCD with multi color back light Sensitivity nominal 12dB SINAD 0 4 V 25 27 995 MHz AM 0 3 V 28 53 98 MHz NFM file C Documen...

Page 244: ... 3 V 216 224 98 MHz NFM 0 3 V 225 379 975 MHz AM 0 3 V 380 512 MHz NFM 0 3 V 758 960 MHz NFM 0 5 V 1240 1300 MHz NFM Signal Noise Ratio nominal 50dB 25 27 995 MHz AM 41dB 28 53 98 MHz NFM 55dB 54 71 95 MHz WFM 47dB 72 75 995 MHz FM 60dB 76 107 9 MHz FMB file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD396XTSpecs html 3 of 8 5 26 2009 11 13 09 AM ...

Page 245: ...380 512 MHz NFM 41dB 758 960 MHz NFM 37dB 1240 1300 MHz NFM Close Call Sensitivity nominal 350 V VHF Low1 Band 160 V VHF Low2 Band 70 V Air Band 60 V VHF High1 Band 56 V VHF High2 Band 100 V UHF Band 200 V 800MHz Band Frequency Range file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD396XTSpecs html 4 of 8 5 26 2009 11 13 09 AM ...

Page 246: ...1 9500 WFM 50 VHF TV 72 0000 75 9950 FM 5 Intersystem Astronomy 76 0000 87 9500 WFM 50 VHF TV 88 0000 107 9000 FMB 100 FM Broadcast 108 0000 136 9916 AM 8 33 Aircraft Band 137 0000 143 9875 NFM 12 5 Military Land Mobile 144 0000 147 9950 NFM 5 2 Meter Amateur Band 148 0000 150 7875 NFM 12 5 Military Land Mobile 150 8000 161 9950 NFM 5 VHF High Band 162 0000 173 9875 NFM 12 5 Federal Government 174...

Page 247: ...470 0000 512 0000 NFM 12 5 UHF TV 758 0000 787 99375 NFM 6 25 Public Service Band 788 0000 805 99375 NFM 6 25 Public Service Band 806 0000 823 9875 NFM 12 5 Public Service Band 849 0125 868 9875 NFM 12 5 Public Service Band 894 0125 960 0000 NFM 12 5 Public Service Band 1240 0000 1300 0000 NFM 25 25 cm Amateur Band Special Functions Band Scope Function Frequency Span 0 2 MHz To 500 MHz Frequency S...

Page 248: ...annels 25000 max 40128 memory blocks Channels per Trunked System 500 max Heterodyne System 1st IF 380 7 to 380 8 MHz 265 5 to 265 6 MHz 2nd IF 10 8 MHz 3rd IF 450 kHz CTCSS and DCS Tones CTCSS Tone Frequencies 50 frequencies total Hz 67 0 69 3 71 9 74 4 77 0 79 7 82 5 85 4 88 5 91 5 94 8 97 4 100 0 103 5 107 2 110 9 114 8 118 8 123 0 127 3 131 8 136 5 141 3 146 2 151 4 156 7 159 8 162 2 165 5 167 ...

Page 249: ...3 225 226 243 244 245 246 251 252 255 261 263 265 266 271 274 306 311 315 325 331 332 343 346 351 356 364 365 371 411 412 413 423 431 432 445 446 452 454 455 462 464 465 466 503 506 516 523 526 532 546 565 606 612 624 627 631 632 654 662 664 703 712 723 731 732 734 743 754 This page applies to the following scanners BCD396XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ents temp CDIm...

Page 250: ...ting has been modified and extensive editing has been performed to make the text more readable However you will almost certainly find a handful of odd turns of phrases Mostly though we hope that this reference work can help you better understand and use your BCD396XT This document isn t intended to be a guide for how to use your scanner you ll find that information in the Owner s Manual but rather...

Page 251: ...0 Channel Alert 10 Alpha Tagging 10 Duplicate Input Alert 10 Number Tag 10 Trunk Tracking 10 Multi Site System 11 Control Channel Only 11 P25 One Frequency Trunking 11 Priority ID Scanning 11 Preemptive Priority ID Scanning 11 Trunking Activity Indicators 11 Custom Search 11 Quick Search 11 Frequency Autostore 11 Search Speed Turbo Search 11 Search Lockout 12 Search Key 12 Service Search 12 Broadc...

Page 252: ...ng 13 Band Scope 13 PC Control 14 LCD and Keypad Backlight 14 Alert Tone Level 14 Battery Low Alert 14 Battery Save 14 Key Lock 14 Key Safe Mode 14 Audio AGC 14 Repeater Reverse 14 Memory Backup 14 Design 15 Controls and Keys 16 Displays 21 LCD Design 21 Icons 21 Dot Matrix 22 LCD Flashing Time 22 Tones 23 General Tones 23 Weather Alert Sirens 23 Tones in Menu Mode 24 Selecting a menu item 24 Edit...

Page 253: ...27 Menu Mode 28 General Operations 28 Error Messages 31 Top Menu 32 Program System 32 Program Site 45 Program Group 55 Program Channel 59 Program Location 67 Srch CloCall Opt 72 Search for 78 Close Call 89 Priority Scan 94 WX Operation 95 Tone Out for 98 Wired Clone 102 Settings 103 SCAN MODE 111 Display during Scan Mode 111 Startup Key Operation 111 Start Scanning 111 Scanning Order 113 Scanning ...

Page 254: ...n During Priority Scan 143 PRIORITY ID SCAN 144 Priority ID Scan 144 Key Operation During Priority ID Scan 144 SEARCH MODE 145 Display during Search Mode 145 General Operation 145 Service Search 146 Custom Search 147 Custom Search in Control Channel Only Mode 148 Search and Store 149 Quick Search 149 Key Operation During Search Mode 151 SEARCH HOLD MODE 153 General Operation 153 Go to Quick Search...

Page 255: ...ration During Weather Alert Scan Hold Mode 170 TONE OUT MODE 172 Display during Tone Out Mode 172 Tone Out Standby Mode 173 Tone Out Search Mode 175 Tone Out Hold Mode 176 Key Operation During Tone Out Mode 177 GPS MODE 179 Display Mode in GPS Mode 179 Location Alert Operation 181 Registration of Location Information 184 Review Location Mode 185 Key Operation During GPS Mode 187 BAND SCOPE MODE 18...

Page 256: ... 202 Battery Type Select 202 Charging the Battery 202 OTHERS 205 AVAILABLE SYSTEM SETTINGS 205 System Settings 205 System Option Settings 205 Site Settings 206 Site Frequency Settings 206 Channel Settings 207 TGID FORMAT FOR TRUNKED SYSTEM 208 FLEET MAP 215 PRESET FLEET MAPS 216 WEATHER CHANNELS 217 CTCSS FREQUENCY 217 DCS CODE 217 CEA2009 SAME EVENT CODE ANSI CEA 2009 A October 2005 218 REMOTE CO...

Page 257: ...deral Government 174 0000 215 9500 WFM 50 0 TV Broadcast 7 13 216 0000 224 9800 NFM 20 0 1 25 Meter Amateur Band 225 0000 379 9750 AM 25 0 UHF Aircraft Band 380 0000 399 9875 NFM 12 5 Military Band 400 0000 405 9875 NFM 12 5 Miscellaneous 406 0000 419 9875 NFM 12 5 Federal Government Land Mobile 420 0000 449 9875 NFM 12 5 70 cm Amateur Band 450 0000 469 9875 NFM 12 5 UHF Standard Band 470 0000 512...

Page 258: ...m Notes about limits The actual results will be limited by the first absolute limit you hit For example if you have created 1000 sites you will not be able to create a new system even though you have created fewer than 500 systems You can check the of memory used by using the menu Channel Memory Scan The scanner can scan any combination of trunked and conventional systems simultaneously Priority S...

Page 259: ...ystem or search range so that it can be automatically locked out or unlocked during power up Channel Alert You can set a separate audible visual alert for each channel Alpha Tagging You can assign an alphanumeric name to each System Site Channel Group Channel Location Custom search range SAME group and Tone Out You can use 16 characters per tag Duplicate Input Alert The scanner will alert you if a...

Page 260: ...rity ID Scanning For Motorola systems that have channel priority active on the system if you flag a channel as priority and the system also has that TGID identified as a priority channel the scanner will preempt any current transmission if the TGID becomes active Trunking Activity Indicators The scanner shows all trunked activity when you hold on the control channel Custom Search You can program u...

Page 261: ...dcast Screen Allows the scanner to ignore hits on Pager FM UHF TV VHF TV NOAA WX and custom band frequencies Attenuator You can attenuate the incoming signal for channels that get interference from strong signal sources You can set a global attenuator to apply attenuation to all reception Code Search Rapid search for the CTCSS DCS used during a transmission The scanner does not detect or decode P2...

Page 262: ...or fire tone out standby If you do not know the tones being used the scanner can detect the tones when it receives a page Location Based Scanning The scanner can automatically lock and unlock systems sites and channel groups based on your current location as provided by an external GPS unit not included Location Alert System The scanner alerts you when you approached a stored location Navigation M...

Page 263: ...his alert level is set at the same level as the key beep volume level Battery Save You can turn on off this function by Menu Operation This works when there is no transmission over 1 minute in the following modes This feature turns off RF power for 1 second and turns on it 300 ms to extend the battery life Scan Hold Mode at a Channel of conventional System without Priority Scan Any Search Hold Mod...

Page 264: ...Thursday May 14 2009 15 Design The below is a design reference There might be some differences between this image and the actual final design ...

Page 265: ...ach Function Mode returns to Normal Mode and the F icon disappears Scroll Control Selects a channel or frequency in Hold Mode Selects Menu items in Menu Mode Selects a character while editing the Name Sets the level in Volume Squelch Level Control mode Scroll Control Push Pressing this works the same operation as pressing E yes gps in Menu Mode Press this to set the volume level in the mode that i...

Page 266: ...tting of Close Call Long press to start Close Call Only Mode L O Lockout Key Press once to temporarily lock out a system channel a search frequency or a location data This lock out is canceled when the power is turned off then back on Press twice within one second to permanently lock out a system channel a search frequency or a location data This lockout remains even if the power is turned off Lon...

Page 267: ...ata If you press no pri the scanner returns to the previous mode without unlocking Light Power Key Lock Press to illuminate the LCD back light according to Menu setting Press and hold to turn the scanner on or off Function Key Press to lock or unlock the keypad 1 9 0 Key Press to enable or disable the System Site Search Quick Key for system or search range Scan Mode Press to turn on or off each cu...

Page 268: ...t WX Scan except WX Scan Mode Decimal no pri Priority Key Press to cancel these displays while displaying Error or Warning message Press to input decimal for frequency Press to input or i for TGID Press to input a space in editing a data name Press twice to clear the data in editing data name Press to input or i for Direct Enter in Hold Mode Close Call Only Mode Tone Out Mode Press in Scan Mode to...

Page 269: ...enu Mode Press to go back up one menu level when in the Menu Mode Press after entering the value to indicate going to a number tagged system or channel Function Menu Key Press to go to the editing menu for the current system search range or location data ...

Page 270: ...Key for Systems Channel Group are displayed The number for the currently scanned SQK set flashes In SCAN HOLD mode the Quick Key number for the current System Channel Group appears Enabled User Range numbers appear in Custom Search the current range s number blinks HOLD This icon appears in Scan Hold Search Hold and Close Call Hold Mode L O This icon appears at a locked out Channel or frequency PR...

Page 271: ...l set to Priority On Signal Indicator This icon shows strength of the signal from 0 to 5 KEYPAD LOCK This icon will appear only when the KEYLOCK function is On BATTERY Low Alert This icon blinks when the battery voltage is low This icon blinks when a bad battery is installed and an AC adapter is connected This icon appears during battery check Close Call Pri This icon appears in Close Call Priorit...

Page 272: ...s gps key etc to accept the entry or setting the scanner will sound high middle beep 75 ms high beep 25 ms silent 75 ms middle beep Error Tone When you press a key that does not have a valid function in the current mode the scanner will sound a triple low beep 75 ms beep 25 ms silent repeat 2 times Weather Alert Sirens The scanner sounds the following tones until any key is pressed or for 8 second...

Page 273: ...Scroll Control knob When you move the cursor from the left to the right the scanner will sound a single middle beep 100 ms Or when you move the cursor from the right to the left the scanner will sound a double middle beep 75 ms beep 25 ms silent 75 ms beep If you store data by pressing E yes gps the scanner sounds the Exec Tone Alert in Scanner Mode You can select channel or frequency alert from A...

Page 274: ...is also backed up Notes on the Last Mode LAST MODE means the mode when the scanner is turned off It resumes Scan Mode Custom Service Quick Search Mode Weather Mode Close Call Only Tone Out Mode each Hold Mode GPS Mode and Band Scope Mode for LAST MODE In ID Search Hold Mode if ID has already been registered LAST MODE will be ID Search Hold Mode If ID has not been registered yet LAST MODE will be S...

Page 275: ...me Adjustment Press Scroll Control again or wait for 10 seconds to quit from the volume level control mode Press Function Scroll Control to enter the P25 Condition Mode Squelch Adjust Mode To adjust the squelch level press Function Scroll Control When the squelch level indicator appears rotate Scroll Control to change the squelch level The squelch level can set from 0 to 15 Squelch Adjustment Pres...

Page 276: ...r setup The number following ERR indicates the APCO decoder error rate This number preceding AUTO shows threshold value Press Scroll Control key or Function Scroll Control key to quit the P25 Condition Mode This mode doesn t have a time out State Transition Diagram Normal Mode Volume Adjust Squelch Adjust P25 Condition Push F Scroll Ctrl Push Scroll Ctrl Push F Scroll Ctrl Push F Scroll Ctrl Push ...

Page 277: ...to previous mode Notes Tapping the Scroll Control can be used instead of E yes gps in Menu Mode or at various prompts NEXT item is a lower item in this document Therefore the next item of the lowest Item is highest item Menu items are described as the bold letter in this specification Display Format in Menu Mode The Menu Item screen is four line mode The first line displays the Menu Item Name and ...

Page 278: ...ame custom search range name or other system name A group name is the same as another group name in the same system A channel name is the same as another channel name in the same group A custom search range name is the same as a system name service search range name or other custom search range name A SAME name is the same as another SAME name A Tone Out name is the same as another Tone Out name N...

Page 279: ... out of the range in Band Coverage the scanner displays Out of Band Press Any Key and sounds an Error Tone Press any key to return to editing mode Out of Band Press Any Key For Channel Frequencies in conventional System if the entered frequency is already stored into the same Group it displays Frequency Exists Accept Y N and sounds a Confirmation Tone Press E yes gps to ignore message and proceed ...

Page 280: ... longitude input The acceptable range of latitude and longitude is as follows Latitude 90º00 00 00 S 00º00 00 00 N 90º00 00 00 N Longitude 180º00 00 00 E 000º00 00 00 W 180º00 00 00 W The actual navigation distance may differ from the calculated one when a latitude exceeding 85 degrees either North or South is used Error Messages If the scanner tries to create a new System Location Site Group Chan...

Page 281: ...enu Items These systems are sorted by the order in which they were created New System is displayed as the last menu item Note When no systems have been programmed only New System appears The limit of Systems is 500 So if you try to select New System when there are already 500 Systems the scanner displays Over Limit and sounds an Error Tone Then it returns to Top Menu Over Limi t Press Any Key Sele...

Page 282: ...or a P25 One Freq Trunk system If you select an EDCS type you need to select more system type information from the following WIDE NARROW Select for an EDACS WIDE NARROW system SCAT Select for an EDACS SCAT system Once you select the system type the scanner prompts Confirm and Yes E No Confi rm Yes E No Press E yes gps to confirm and the system will be created Press no pri to reject and return to t...

Page 283: ...nces The first line displays the System name For example the following figure shows it is in settings of the System named System 1 C System 1 C Edit Name Edit Sys Opti on Edit Group Turn the Scroll Control and press E yes gps or tap the Scroll Control to go to each setting Edit Name You can name the system Refer to FONT DATA for the characters that can be entered Press E yes gps to accept the name...

Page 284: ... System when the scanner is Scan Mode Turn the Scroll Control to select the Quick Key for the System The Quick Key can be set from 0 to 99 and Not assigned Press a number key to jump the cursor to the head number of ten s place For example if you press 2 sr2 the cursor jumps to 20 Press E yes gps to accept and return to the previous menu Note The highest number of priority is Quick Key 1 and lowes...

Page 285: ...anner is forced to hold and scan System Channels before moving to the next System even if there is no traffic on the Channels You can set it from 0 to 255 seconds by pressing a number key Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu If you enter over 255 for the Hold Time the scanner prompts Out of Range and Set Max Y N When E yes gps is pushed maximum value 255 will be set ...

Page 286: ...rola 800 Type I Hybrid Systems require a Fleet Map that sets specific Fleet SubFleet parameters There are 16 preset Fleet Maps listed in PRESET FLEET MAP that you can choose and these are usually a good place to start when setting up a Type I Hybrid System If you choose a preset map and still have difficulty following complete conversation then you will have to program a Custom Fleet Map Note A Hy...

Page 287: ...revious menu However Size Codes once selected by pressing E yes gps are not canceled Motorola 800 Type I and Type II Select Custom and set all blocks to Size Code 0 The scanner treats this System as Motorola Type II In other cases it treats the System as Motorola Type I Note If you change the Fleet Map setting the ID display format will also change Priority ID Scan This setting controls how the sc...

Page 288: ...his menu Set Alert Tone Set Alert Light Press E yes gps to enter the setting Set Alert Tone If Set Alert Tone is selected user can determines how the scanner treats the Talk Group that set with emergency flag Off The scanner ignores the emergency flag Alert1 9 The scanner sounds the Emergency Alert Tone when any Talk Group goes active with the emergency flag set When you select Off the scanner ret...

Page 289: ...ht blinks fast Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set ID Format DEC HEX You can select the format for TGIDs on P25 and MOT type system Decimal Format The scanner uses decimal format for TGIDs Hex Format The scanner uses hexadecimal format for TGIDs Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set ID Format AFS DEC You can select the format fo...

Page 290: ...ys Unlock Y N and other lines display TGIDs that are locked out Turn the Scroll Control to choose TGIDs Unlock Y N ID 12340 ID 11111 ID 34567 Press E yes gps to unlock the TGID Press no pri to advance to the next locked TGID Press Menu to return the previous menu If no TGIDs have been locked the scanner displays Nothing Locked Press any key to return to the previous menu If all TGIDs are unlocked ...

Page 291: ...isplays Nothing Locked Then press any key to return to previous menu Nothi ng Locked Press Any Key Set Audio AGC When Audio AGC function is On the scanner judges the volume level and changes the volume automatically You can turn either Analog or Digital audio On or Off Analog On Off Digital On Off On Audio AGC is on Off Audio AGC is off Turn Scroll Control to focus the cursor on the item Press E y...

Page 292: ... This menu is used to set P25 NAC Network Access Code option for the P25 One Freq Trunk systems You can select from the following items Search The scanner search for all the P25 NAC Set P25 NAC The scanner uses the programmed P25 NAC When you select Search The scanner returns to the previous menu When you select Set P25 NAC Press the number key to enter P25 NAC valid range is from 0 to FFF hex Pre...

Page 293: ...Note This operation also copies all sites Groups and Channels belonging to the System Delete System You can delete the current system and all associated settings by select this menu item The scanner prompts Confirm Delete to confirm deletion Press E yes gps to delete the current system Press no pri to cancel deletion and return to the previous menu Note If you confirm to delete the system all site...

Page 294: ... displays Over Limit and sounds an Error Tone Creating a New Site Press E yes gps to create a new site After a new site is created the scanner assigns a default site name of Site xxx yyy TTT xxx System index number yyy 1 3 digit sequential site index number TTT abbreviation for the site type as follows MOT Type MOT EDACS WIDE NARROW EDC LTR Type LTR P25 Standard Type P25 P25 One Freq Type 1FQ Site...

Page 295: ...o the previous menu Edit Band Plan P25 This setting menu is shown when the selected system is a P25 Standard Trunked system Usually the scanner stores the plan automatically when it receives the plan from a repeater Therefore you do not have to set the plan in most systems The plan must be set manually only when the repeater doesn t send the plan You can set 16 bands for a site First select the Ba...

Page 296: ...or each System To select the custom Band Plan number turn the Scroll Control to select its number from 1 to 6 Band Plan 1 Band Plan 2 Band Plan 3 Band Plan 4 Band Plan 5 Band Plan 6 Then press E yes gps is pressed You are then prompted to set the detailed information of band plan Set Base Freq Set Offset Set Spacing When you select Set Base Freq you are then prompted to Input Lower then Input Uppe...

Page 297: ...e table are Band Plan Base Freq Lower Base Freq Upper Offset Polarity Spacing 1 851 025MHz 854 000MHz 440 25 kHz 2 851 0125MHz 868 9875MHz 0 25 kHz Set Site Type You can select the site type for EDACS WIDE NARROW system Wide Standard EDACS wide site Narrow EDACS narrow site Press E yes gps to accept and return to the previous menu Set Frequencies You can select a stored frequency or enter a new sy...

Page 298: ...allow frequency duplication in a System If the entered frequency is already stored into that System the scanner sounds an Error Tone and displays Frequency Exists Frequency Exi sts Press Any Key Then press any key to return to the editing mode Valid frequency ranges are in Band Coverage If the entered frequency is out of range the scanner sounds an Error Tone and displays Out of Band And the scann...

Page 299: ...ly locked out Lockout The system is locked out Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Volume Offset SCAT systems only This option is used to set a volume offset for each site frequency The feature can let you adjust the volume level relative to other channels when the frequency is active Setting level are 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 Press E yes gps to accept the selection and re...

Page 300: ... the previous menu Set Lockout This option allows you to lock or unlock the current system When the system is locked out the scanner does not check it Unlocked The system is unlocked Temporary L O The system is temporarily locked out Lockout The system is locked out Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Set Hold Time In Trunked Systems this setting is applied only...

Page 301: ... gps to go to the settings Set Latitude Press the number keys to enter latitude data Press any number key when the cursor is in the last position to toggle between south latitude S and the north latitude N Press E yes gps to accept and return to the previous menu If DMS DDD MM SS ss is selected in Set Pos Format the display is the following If DEG DDD dddddd is selected in Set Pos Format the displ...

Page 302: ...setting unit is determined by the setting in Set Unit When you select mile in Set Unit the displayed unit will be mile When you select km in Set Unit the displayed unit will be km The valid setting range is from 0 5 to 125 0 in 0 5 steps Press E yes gps to accept the setting and return to the previous menu Set GPS Enable When this option is set to On the scanner will control L O status of this sit...

Page 303: ...00 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms 900 ms 1000 ms Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Delete Site You can delete the current system and all associated settings by select this menu item The scanner prompts Confirm Delete to confirm deletion Press E yes gps to delete the current system Press no pri to cancel deletion and return to the previous menu New Site Press E...

Page 304: ...m is 20 So if you try to select New Group when there are already 20 Groups in that System the scanner displays Over Limit and sounds an Error Tone Then it returns to Group selection Select the Group Name or New Group and press E yes gps to go to the Group Settings Menu If the New Group is selected the scanner appends a Group to the System with a default Group name of Group xx xx 1 2 digits sequent...

Page 305: ...t LocationInfo You can set location data for the current channel group so it is automatically locked and unlocked as you change location when using an external GPS You set the following items Set Latitude Set Longitude Set Range Set GPS Enable Turn Scroll Control to select an item to set and press E yes gps to go to the settings Set Latitude Enter the latitude data using the number keys Press any ...

Page 306: ... DDD MM SS ss is selected in Set Pos Format the display is the following Set Longi tude 000 00 00 00 W If DEG DDD dddddd is selected in Set Pos Format the display is the following Set Longi tude 000 0000 W Set Range In this menu the setting unit depends on the setting in Set Unit When you select mile in Set Unit the displayed unit is mile When you select km in Set Unit the displayed unit is km The...

Page 307: ...ou to lock or unlock the current system When the system is locked out the scanner does not check it Unlocked The system is unlocked Temporary L O The system is temporarily locked out Lockout The system is locked out Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Delete Group You can delete the current system and all associated settings by select this menu item The scanner ...

Page 308: ...New Channel and enter a TGID when there are already 500 Channels in the system the scanner displays Over Limit and sounds an Error Tone Then it returns to Channel selection The limit of Channels and System frequencies is 25000 If you select New Channel and enter the frequency or TGID when there are already 25000 Channels and System frequencies the scanner displays Over Limit and sounds an Error To...

Page 309: ... the TGID Note Numbers only up to 5 digits Motorola Type ID Hex Format ID Turn Scroll Control to select Hex character from 0 to F Press 4 LEFT ifx or 6 RIGHT disp to move cursor left or right Press E yes gps to set the Hex ID Note When the custom Fleet Map setting set to Size Code 0 for all Blocks the scanner treats the System as a Motorola Type I or Hybrid system In these cases Hexadecimal input ...

Page 310: ...r LTR systems Press the number keys to enter the Area code Home repeater and User ID Note 6 digit numbers Area code 0 or 1 Home repeater 01 20 User ID 000 254 I Call Motorola EDACS P25 For any MOT System EDCS Wide and Narrow P25 Standard Trunk or P25 One Freq Trunk system First press the decimal key to enter i for I Call Then press the number keys to enter the ID Note For details of TGID format pl...

Page 311: ...y Edit Name You can provide a name for the channel Refer to FONT DATA for the characters that can be entered Press E yes gps to accept the name entered The scanner returns to the previous menu Edit Frequency If you select to edit the frequency the scanner displays the current frequency in edit mode See Edit Frequency Edit TGID If you select to edit the TGID the scanner displays the current ID You ...

Page 312: ... can set the CTCSS DCS options from the following items However these options do not display when setting for trunked system Off The scanner ignores all tones and opens squelch on any signal Search The scanner displays any tone being used but opens squelch on any signal CTCSS The scanner prompts you for the appropriate setting Squelch will open for this Channel only if the code matches DCS The sca...

Page 313: ...ulation FMB The scanner uses FM Broadcast demodulation Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set Attenuator You can attenuate RF reception on the frequency On The frequency will be attenuated Off The frequency will not be attenuated Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Set Priority This option sets the Channel as a Priority Channel Y...

Page 314: ...15 The alert is fixed to the selected audio level Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set Alert Light You can select whether the scanner should have an alert light when this Channel becomes active Off Blue Red Magenta Green Cyan Yellow White If you select Off the scanner returns to the previous menu If you select an alert light color the scanner goes to the Alert Li...

Page 315: ... accept the selection and return to the previous menu Copy Channel You can copy a Channel and all associated settings by selecting this menu item The Channel Information is copied to the Copy Buffer when this item is selected The Copy Buffer just has the last copied Channel Information The scanner displays Copy Channel and Copied to Buffer when you press E yes gps Note Pasting a Channel will not c...

Page 316: ... Location Mode POI Settings You can set the following items Edit Name Set Type Set Alert Set LocationInfo Set Range Set Lockout Delete Location New Location Turn Scroll Control and press E yes gps to go to each setting Dangerous Xing Road Settings You can set the following items Edit Name Set Type Set Alert Volume Set Alert Light Set LocationInfo Set Heading Set Speed Limit Set Lockout Delete Loca...

Page 317: ... you select Alert1 4 the scanner goes to the Alert Level selection Auto The alert is set to the same volume as normal audio Level1 15 The alert is fixed to the selected audio level Set Alert Light You can select whether the scanner should have an Alert Light when you approach the set Location Off Blue Red Magenta Green Cyan Yellow White If you select Off the scanner returns to the previous menu If...

Page 318: ...y Fast Blink The alert light blinks fast Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Note This setting menu appears in Dangerous Xing and Dangerous Road Set LocationInfo You use this option to set the location data First you set the latitude Press the number keys to enter latitude data Press any number key when the cursor is in the last position to toggle between south lati...

Page 319: ... on the Alert Light when you go into range of the location North 0º South 180º NE 45º SW 225º East 90º West 270º SE 135º NW 315º Press E yes gps to accept the and return to the previous menu Note This setting menu appears in Dangerous Xing and Dangerous Road Set Speed Limit This option sets the speed limit for location alerts The scanner only alerts when your speed is over this setting In this men...

Page 320: ...Delete Location You can delete the current system and all associated settings by select this menu item The scanner prompts Confirm Delete to confirm deletion Press E yes gps to delete the current system Press no pri to cancel deletion and return to the previous menu New Location If you select this in the POI setting menu and press E yes gps the scanner creates a New POI and goes to POI Settings Or...

Page 321: ...se Call and CC Auto Store The mode in which a setting is applied showed in the following table Service Search 1 Custom Search 1 Quick Search Search and Store Close Call CC Auto Store CC Hits System Band Scope Freq Lockouts O O O O O O Broadcast Screen O O O 2 O O Tone Code Search O O O O O O Repeater Find O O O Max Auto Store O O Set Delay Time O O O Set Attenuator O O O O Set Audio AGC O O O P25 ...

Page 322: ...s that are locked out in Search Mode or Close Call Mode Any frequency in this list will be skipped if encountered in these modes The first Line displays Unlock Y N and the remaining lines display locked out frequencies Turn Scroll Control to choose frequencies Unlock Y N 30 8600MHz 160 9050MHz 455 0375MHz T T will be displayed following the frequency if it is a temporary lockout frequency Press E ...

Page 323: ...ner then returns to the previous menu Set Each Band You can turn on or off each of the following bands Pager On Off Various according to FCC allocation FM On Off 88 1000 107 9000 MHz UHF TV On Off 470 0000 512 0000 MHz VHF TV On Off 54 0000 72 0000 MHz 76 0000 88 0000 MHz 174 0000 216 0000 MHz NOAA WX On Off 161 6500 161 7750 162 4000 162 4250 162 4500 162 4750 162 5000 162 5250 162 5500 163 2750 ...

Page 324: ...yes gps to set this setting and return to the previous menu Note For AM WFM or FMB modulation this setting is ignored and the scanner treats this setting as Off If you set this function to CTCSS DCS Search the scanner will not decode APCO P25 signals Repeater Find This option sets whether the scanner attempts to locate the transmission on a repeater output frequency when it detects a transmission ...

Page 325: ...um 1 Or press no pri to return to editing state and the entered value is set to 1 If you enters over 256 the scanner prompts Out of Range and Set Max Y N Press E yes gps to set the value to maximum 256 Or press no pri to return to editing state and the entered value is set to 256 Set Delay Time This setting controls how long the scanner stays on frequency after a transmission ends before resuming ...

Page 326: ...rol to focus the cursor on the item Press E yes gps to change the setting on off and press Menu to return to the previous menu P25 Waiting Time The feature is used to set a wait time for P25 decode After receive a transmission the scanner will wait for the set duration to check if there is any P25 signal Selectable waiting times are 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms 900 ...

Page 327: ...r CB Radio FRS GMRS MURS Racing FM Broadcast Military Air Special Press E yes gps to exit from Menu Mode and start searching the selected band See Service Search Edit Service Select Service Search Range and press E yes gps to go to each Search Range Setting You can set the following items for each Service Search Range Set Delay Time Set Attenuator Set Audio AGC P25 Waiting Time Search with Scan Pr...

Page 328: ... attenuate RF reception on all frequencies in the search range On The frequencies are attenuated Off The frequencies are not attenuated Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set Audio AGC When Audio AGC function is On the scanner judges the volume level and changes the volume automatically You can turn either Analog or Digital audio On or Off Analog On Off Digital On ...

Page 329: ...You can select a Quick Key from 0 to 99 or Not assigned by turning Scroll Control Quick Key for search is used to rapidly enable or disable the range The searching order does not change by this setting Press E yes gps to accept and return to the previous menu Set Startup Key The scanner locks or unlocks the system according to setting of this option by pressing and holding a number key at power on...

Page 330: ...ch this range before moving to the next even if there is no traffic on the frequencies You can change the hold time from 0 the scanner checks all frequencies of the range regardless of time to 255 seconds by using number keys If the setting is something other than 0 the scanner goes to the next system or search when the hold time elapses However it does not go to next one while receiving a signal ...

Page 331: ...AGC P25 Waiting Time Search with Scan Press E yes gps to enter each item Note The first line displays the name of the selected Custom Search Edit Name You can name the custom range Refer to FONT DATA for the characters that can be entered Press E yes gps to accept the name entered The scanner returns to the previous menu Edit Srch Limit You need to set 2 limits for searching First enter the lower ...

Page 332: ... scanner uses Narrowband FM demodulation FM The scanner uses FM demodulation WFM The scanner uses Wideband FM demodulation FMB The scanner uses FM Broadcast demodulation Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set Attenuator You can select to attenuate RF reception on all frequencies in the search range On The frequencies are attenuated Off The frequencies are not atten...

Page 333: ... of the following options to assign a band plan that the scanner will use if it detects a Motorola control channel Note that if the actual received channel does not use the specified band plan the scanner will not follow voice traffic on the system The instructions for doing this are the same as for setting a band plan for a programmed system See Edit Band Plan Mot for option settings Set Audio AG...

Page 334: ... will wait for the set duration to check if there is any P25 signal Selectable waiting times are 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms 900 ms 1000 ms Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Search with Scan This menu is same as the one in the Edit Service Menu See Search with Scan ...

Page 335: ...o FRS GMRS MURS Racing FM Broadcast Military Air Other Once a search range is selected by pressing E yes gps any time a frequency in that search range goes active the scanner checks to see if that frequency has been previously stored in that System If so it resumes searching Otherwise it stores the frequency into the Group named Found Channels the scanner automatically creates this group if it doe...

Page 336: ...elongs is turned off Nothing to Scan The Group that stores found Channels already has the number of Max Auto Store or more Channels stored Over Limit Note The following selections are invalid The scanner displays Error Message and Press Any Key Press any key to return to System selection Error Condition Error Message EDACS SCAT System is selected Invalid System A system that does not store a site ...

Page 337: ...ode Pressing Menu exits this mode and the scanner goes to the Menu Mode If you exit from Menu Mode the scanner goes to each Search Mode selected Search for storing operation Pressing FUNC Menu also exits from this mode and goes to each Menu Note In this mode you cannot hear any transmission Set Search Key The scanner has three search keys that let you quickly start a search range Search Key 1 Sear...

Page 338: ... the scanner automatically stores new CC hits up to the limit set by the Max Auto Store setting into the Group named Found Channels of System named Close Call automatically created if it does not exist See Close Call Auto Store Note In this mode you cannot hear any Close Call transmission Hits with Scan These are the settings for the Close Call temporary stored system The setting items are as foll...

Page 339: ... all frequencies of the range regardless of time to 255 seconds by using the number keys If you choose a setting other than 0 the scanner goes to next system or search when the hold time elapses However it does not go to the next one while receiving a signal Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu If you enter over 255 for the Hold Time the scanner prompts Out of Range ...

Page 340: ...ncy Detail of this setting Close Call Search Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set CC Alert You can edit these settings Set Alert Tone Set Alert Light Set CC Pause Press E yes gps to enter each item Set Alert Tone This item can select the type and the level alert Off Beep doesn t sound Alert1 9 The scanner sounds Alert1 9 with CC found If you select Off the scanne...

Page 341: ...ert Light Pattern selection On The alert light is set to on Slow Blink The alert light blinks slowly Fast Blink The alert light blinks fast Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set CC Pause This option can set time from the reception of a Close Call hit to when it returns to previous mode Turn Scroll Control to set from the following item 3 sec 5 sec 10 sec 15 sec 30...

Page 342: ...6 9916 MHz VHF High 1 On Off 137 0000 224 9800 MHz VHF High 2 On Off 225 0000 319 9500 MHz UHF On Off 320 0000 512 0000 MHz 800MHz On Off 758 0000 787 9937 MHz 788 0000 823 9875 MHz 849 0125 868 9875 MHz 894 0125 960 0000 MHz 1240 0000 1300 0000 MHz Turn Scroll Control to move the cursor and press E yes gps to change the setting On The scanner check Close Call in this Band Off The scanner does not...

Page 343: ...sec Press no pri to return to the editing state If you enter over 10 sec for the interval time the scanner prompts Out of Range and Set Max Y N Press E yes gps to select the maximum value 10 sec Press no pri to return to the editing state MaxCHs Pri Scan You can set the Maximum priority channel numbers that are scanned during one priority scan interrupt using this menu If there are more scannable ...

Page 344: ...nged from default setting the displayed items are as follows Alert Only SAME 1 SAME 2 SAME 3 SAME 4 SAME 5 All FIPS If you select Alert Only the scanner immediately sounds a Weather Alert Siren for Weather Alert Tone when it detects the 1050 Hz Weather Alert Tone then opens squelch and remains on the Weather Channel If you select one of the SAME Groups the scanner attempts to decode the SAME data ...

Page 345: ... Group has 8 entries You can edit the desired FIPS Code Stored codes are displayed as Menu Items For example if the SAME Group has 043221 043227 and selectable items are as follows No 1 043221 No 2 043227 No 3 No 8 Select the item and press E yes gps to enter the editing state In the editing state the editing cursor is displayed Press the number keys to enter the FIPS code The cursor moves to the ...

Page 346: ...he previous menu Set Audio AGC When Audio AGC function is On the scanner judges volume of the signal and changes the volume automatically You can turn On or Off AGC for Analog audio Analog On Off On Audio AGC is on Off Audio AGC is off Turn Scroll Control to focus the cursor on the item Press E yes gps to change the setting and press Menu to return to the previous menu WX Alt Priority This setting...

Page 347: ... The Names of the Tone Out channels are displayed as Menu Items Default names as follows Tone Out 1 Tone Out 2 Tone Out 3 Tone Out 10 Select the Name and press E yes gps to go to Tone Out Settings Tone Out Settings You can edit these settings Edit Name Set Frequency Set Tone Set Delay Time Set Alert Set Audio AGC Press E yes gps to go to each setting Note The first line displays the name of select...

Page 348: ...ner uses FM demodulation Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu If the system type is MOT LT or EDCS SCAT when the default modulation of the frequency in Band Defaults is not FM or NFM the scanner will operate as FM Set Attenuator You can attenuate RF reception on the frequency On The frequency will be attenuated Off The frequency will not be attenuated Press E yes gps...

Page 349: ...t Alert Light Press E yes gps to enter the setting Set Alert Tone You can set whether the scanner should sound an Alert Tone when a tone out channel becomes active Off No alert sounds Alert 1 9 The scanner sounds Alert1 9 with the Channel becomes active If you select Off the scanner returns to the previous menu If you select Alert1 9 the scanner goes to Alert Level selection Auto The alert is set ...

Page 350: ...Blink The alert light blinks slowly Fast Blink The alert light blinks fast Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Active means that the scanner detects Tones and Mute state is set to Off Set Audio AGC When Audio AGC function is On the scanner judges volume of the signal and changes the volume automatically You can turn On or Off AGC for Analog audio Analog On Off On Au...

Page 351: ...Connect two BCD396XTs and select this menu to copy and override all data from one to another Master Slave The scanner you set to Master s data will be copied to the scanner you set to Slave Then go to Wired Clone Mode See WIRED CLONE MODE ...

Page 352: ... has the following items Set Mode Set Dimmer Set Color Press E yes gps to enter each setting Set Mode This option can be used to set the backlight activation mode You can select from the following options 10 sec 30 sec Squelch Keypress Infinite Press E yes gps to accept the data and return to the previous menu Set Dimmer This option can be used to set the brightness level of the display You can se...

Page 353: ... E yes gps to set the Beep volume level and return to the previous menu Battery Option This menu has the following items Set Battery Save Set Charge Time Press E yes gps to enter each setting Set Battery Save This option can be used to set the battery save feature On Set battery save on Off Set battery save off Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Set Charge Time...

Page 354: ... Time for Analog AGC Selectable values are from 4 to 6 by steps of 1 Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Reference Gain In this menu you can set the Reference Gain for Analog AGC Selectable values are from 5 to 5 by steps of 1 Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Gain Range In this menu you can set the Gain Range for Analog AGC...

Page 355: ...ference Gain for Digital AGC Selectable values are from 5 to 5 by steps of 1 Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Adjust Contrast This function sets the contrast of the display from Contrast 1 to Contrast 15 Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Set C CH Output The scanner can output the data stream on control channel by using th...

Page 356: ... option sets the time format 12H The scanner uses 12 hour format 24H The scanner uses 24 hour format Press E yes gps to accept the data and return to the previous menu Set Time Zone This option sets the time zone and daylight savings time You can set an offset value from GMT from 14 0 H to 14 0 H in 0 5H increments Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Set Unit Th...

Page 357: ...nu items 25 0 AM 5 0 26 9 AM 5 0 27 4 AM 5 0 28 0 NFM 20 0 29 7 NFM 10 0 50 0 NFM 20 0 54 0 WFM 50 0 72 0 FM 5 0 76 0 WFM 50 0 88 0 FMB 100 0 108 0 AM 8 3 137 0 NFM 12 5 144 0 NFM 5 0 148 0 NFM 12 5 150 8 NFM 5 0 162 0 NFM 12 5 174 0 WFM 50 0 216 0 NFM 20 0 225 0 AM 25 0 380 0 NFM 12 5 400 0 NFM 12 5 406 0 NFM 12 5 420 0 NFM 12 5 450 0 NFM 12 5 470 0 NFM 12 5 758 0 NFM 6 25 788 0 NFM 6 25 806 0 NF...

Page 358: ...rent band as FMB modulation Turn Scroll Control to select the value press E yes gps to set the selection and go to the Step Setting menu Selectable step values are 5 0 kHz 6 25kHz 7 5kHz 8 33kHz 10 0 kHz 12 5 kHz 15 0 kHz 20 0 kHz 25 0 kHz 50 0 kHz 100 0 kHz Turn Scroll Control to select the value press E yes gps to set the selection and return to the Band Defaults setting menu P25 LP Filter This ...

Page 359: ... that is used the number and percent of systems sites and channels that are created This display is as follows Memory Used 62 SYSTEM 135 27 SITE 921 92 CHN 15758 63 The Value is displayed until you press any key and return to the previous menu Firmware Version When you select this option the scanner displays the firmware version as Version And the serial number of the unit is displayed as SN on th...

Page 360: ...not match are locked out Systems and Sites whose startup key are assigned are not affected if they were locked or unlocked before their lockout status does not change Quick keys for the matching systems and sites are also enabled Start Scanning When you press Scan srch to go to the Scan Mode the scanner scans all sites and systems that are not locked out and whose System Site quick key is enabled ...

Page 361: ... out 3 The Quick Key for groups to which that group belongs is disabled 4 The system site containing the channel is locked out 5 The Quick Key for systems sites to which that system belongs is disabled Scan Mode Nothi ng to Scan S0 GRP If the Channels are unlocked by cancellation of any of the above mentioned states the scanner will start scanning immediately Scan for conventional system ID Scan f...

Page 362: ...Call Hits system the scanner scans from top system again You can change the scanning direction by turning Scroll Control The scanning order of the systems sites belonging to the same Quick Key is the order registered to that Quick Key The scanning order of the systems sites belonging to no Quick Key is the order set to none When a system site is created the scanner automatically sets the Quick Key...

Page 363: ...ystems belonging to disable SQKs are not scanned You cannot enable or disable an SQK if no system or site is assigned to it The displayed GQKs channel Group Quick Keys show the status of GQKS for the system currently being scanned For example the scanner displays as follows if the SQKs 3 4 6 and 9 are disabled The details of scanning depend on whether the System is a conventional System or a trunk...

Page 364: ...channel the received signal must match for the scanner to hold on the transmission Not for AM WFM or FMB modulation The scanner continuously scanning each system for the duration of the system s system hold time setting However the scanner surely scans all unlocked channels at least 1 time even if this takes longer than the set time The scanner will advance to the next system once the scanner scan...

Page 365: ...nother TGID it monitors the found TGID But if there is only the TGID that was being monitored just before it monitors that TGID again Press L O to lock out the TGID and store it to the list of ID Lockouts of the system See Clr All L O IDs This lock out information is common to every site in the system Then the scanner returns to the C Ch If the transmission ends it returns to the C Ch and exclusiv...

Page 366: ...Decimal Format ID i123456h Hexadecimal Format EDACS I Call ID i12345 I Call wild card i0 The scanner will display the received I Call for wild card Example I Call wild card ID i0 while scanning ID i123456 when it receives a ID MOT Individual Call The scanner displays both IDs under communication as ID xxxxxx yyyyyy In order to show that IDs are Individual Call i is displayed on the left end of IDs...

Page 367: ... that matches the PARTIAL ID it displays the full received ID Example PARTIAL ID ID 01 01 while scanning ID 01 015 when it receives a ID Quick Save for ID Search Press E yes gps to quickly store a TGID when the scanner stops on the TGID in ID Search The scanner prompts Quick TGID Save Quick TGI D Save 4128 Press E yes gps to store the TGID The scanner creates a channel group named Qck Save Grp in ...

Page 368: ...receives a trunked system channel grant the V Ch blinks and the C Ch lights The scanner has 30 Channel Activity Indicators to visualize trunked system activity This shows which site frequencies are in use The following figure shows that the scanner is staying on LCN1 and LCN3 and LCN4 are active While the scanner is staying on a V Ch the voice channel blinks and its C Ch turns on The following fig...

Page 369: ...e name on second line GPS Location Unlock Site 1 1 MOT S0 GRP When the scanner goes outside the set range the group or site is automatically temporarily locked out The scanner displays Location L O on first line and the group name or the site name on second line GPS Location L O Site 1 1 MOT S0 GRP This operation does not affect systems sites whose SQK is disabled If a GPS is detected as soon as t...

Page 370: ...ata Stream Output Extend When data stream output function is set to extend the scanner will output the data stream in the following format Msg Type CC data decoded description Msg Type ASCII character 3 chars MOT Motorola EDW EDACS Wide EDN EDACS Narrow LTR P25 Motorola Digital CC data OSW Data on Control Channel It is deferent each Trunk System Type MOT System MOT cmd prv id cmd command or LCN He...

Page 371: ...ter Number Hex 2 digits 5 bits III ID Number Hex 2 digits 8 bits FF Free Repeater Number Hex 2 digits 5 bits For example LTR 0 01 01 FA 02 P25 P25 X1X2X3X4X5X6X7X8X9XAXBXC X1 XC message Hex 24 digits 96 bits For example P25 34007502403201ED251EDB45 MOT Subaudio MOT id id ID Hex 4 digit 16 bits For example MOT D110 decoded description ...

Page 372: ...k Group ID Hex 4 digits 16 bits dddd Talk Group ID for Receiver Hex 4 digits 16 bits ccc LCN Hex 3 digits 10 bits ffffffff Frequency BCD 8 digits CPT TG tttt CH ccc VC ffffffff Call for Patch Multiselect tttt Talk Group ID Hex 4 digits 16 bits ccc LCN Hex 3 digits 10 bits ffffffff Frequency BCD 8 digits EVM Event Command for Multiple OSW SID ssss System ID ssss System ID Hex 4 digits PAT pppp MEM ...

Page 373: ...LCN Hex 2 digits 5 bits ffffffff frequency BCD 8 digits PAT ppp MEM mmm Patch List Update ppp Patch ID Hex 3 digits 11 bits mmm Member ID Hex 3 digits 11 bits SIT ss Site ID ss Site ID Hex 2 digits 6 bits For LTR system Decoded Description Remark CAL TG a hh dd Free ee CH gg VC ffffffff Call for Talk Group a Area Hex 1 digits 1 bit hh Home Ch Hex 2 digits 5 bits dd ID Hex 2 digits 8 bits ee Free C...

Page 374: ... CNM TG tttt CH ccc VC ffffffff Group Voice Channel Grant Update tttt Talk Group ID Hex 4 digits 16 bits cc LCN Hex 3 digits 12 bits ffffffff Frequency BCD 8 digits CIV TG tttttt TGR dddddd CH ccc VC ffffffff Call for ICALL tttttt Unit ID Hex 6 digits 24 bits dddddd Unit ID of Recievor Hex 6 digits 24 bits cc LCN Hex 3 digits 12 bits ffffffff Frequency BCD 8 digits SID ssss SUB uu SIT ii System ID...

Page 375: ...eturn to the previous mode without unlocking In a trunked system press Scan srch key in Function Mode to change ID Search and ID Scan for the system When you select a system while the scanner is Temporary System Hold without a timeout the scanner scans only the selected system If the selected system is locked out it is automatically unlocks and scans the system Other lockout states are not unlocke...

Page 376: ... gps or the Scroll Control to select a system and return to the previous mode Press L O in Function Mode to toggle lockout state for the selected system Press 1 9 0 in Function Mode to enable or disable GQKs for the selected System Quick System Select Resume Pressing FUNC or E yes gps or press the Scroll Control resumes scanning immediately from the selected system even if the system is locked out...

Page 377: ...ional channel and the scanner is detecting a CTCSS DCS tone data or P25 NAC data you can store the tone data into the current channel by pressing E yes gps The scanner prompts Set Found CTCSS DCS and Yes E No Set Found CTCSS DCS Yes E No Press E yes gps to store the tone data and go to the editing menu for the current channel Press no pri to go to the editing menu for the current channel without s...

Page 378: ... channel or TGID is unlocked Press this key twice within one second to lockout the monitored channel or TGID in ID Search Mode When the scanner is turned off these lockouts remain Long press this key to unlock all channels and TGIDs in the current system when the scanner is receiving a signal 1 9 0 key Press these keys to enable or disable SQKs no pri key Press this key to go to the mode that sele...

Page 379: ... a system site or a search range When the scanner is turned off these lockouts remain Long press this key to display the prompt Unlock All Systems to unlock all systems sites search ranges and Close Call Hits system and enable all Quick Keys for all systems sites Press E yes gps to unlock all data Press no pri to return to the previous mode without unlocking F 1 9 0 key Press this key to enable or...

Page 380: ...tor On Sx This icon appears with icons of the SQK from 0 to 99 x shows the current ten s place for the SQK GRP This icon appears with icons of the GQK 1 9 0 General Operation Turn Scroll Control to select the channel trunk frequency TGID or search frequency Hold on a Channel in Conventional System The scanner alternately displays the system and channel group name on the first line and it displays ...

Page 381: ...nventional system it displays just like Mode 1 for conventional For example the scanner displays as follows when the channel name for 162 4000MHz is Channel A In Display Mode 2 and 3 even if the Close Call setting is CC Pri or CC DND the Close Call icon is not displayed when CTCSS DCS setting is set or tone data has been detected in CTCSS DCS Search mode F HOLD T001 001 Group 1 Channel A AM IFX V ...

Page 382: ...ction Mode to change the Display Mode In Display Mode 1 the scanner displays the TGID name on the second line and the V Ch frequency under the second line In Display mode 2 the scanner displays the TGID name on the second line and TGID under the second line In Display mode 3 the scanner displays the TGID name on the second line and trunking activity indicators under the second line For example the...

Page 383: ...ngs When the scanner receives a TGID it displays the received TGID on the second line If the TGID is already stored into the system and it is named the channel name is displayed instead of the TGID The holding trunked frequency is displayed under the TGID display In a P25 System pressing FUNC key causes the scanner to display the WACN Wide Area Communications Network ID instead of System ID on fir...

Page 384: ...oll Control clockwise when the scanner is on the last channel in the system the scanner goes to the next system If you turn Scroll Control counterclockwise when the scanner is on the first channel in the system it goes to the previous system Hold on Trunked System Turn Scroll Control to select the site frequency and channel TGID Turn Scroll Control clockwise to select the next system frequency or ...

Page 385: ...l number tags assigned Store Frequency You cannot use this function to store a frequency for a trunked System To quickly store a frequency into a channel for a conventional system enter the frequency including the decimal point using the keypad then press E yes gps The scanner prompts Quick Freq Save If you press Hold without pressing E yes gps key the scanner goes to Quick Search Hold Mode at the...

Page 386: ...t a system to store this TGID Select the system and the channel group then the TGID is stored In system selection the scanner displays only the systems whose TGID format matches the TGID you entered The ID format and system type relation are the following Input TGID n number System Type nnn nn nnnn n n nnn nnnn nnn n nnnnn innnnn Motorola Systems Type I Type II nnnnn innnnnnnn P25 Systems nn nnn n...

Page 387: ...e at the entered number tag For example if you want to select Channel E from the below example press 7 5 Menu System A Number tag 1 Channel A Number tag 1 Channel B Number tag 5 Channel C Number tag 100 System B Number tag 7 Channel D Number tag 10 Channel E Number tag 5 Channel F Number tag 3 System number tag Channel number tag You do not have to enter the system number tag to select a channel i...

Page 388: ...ess this key to unlock all channels in the current system for conventional systems Long press this key to unlock all frequencies of the site and all TGIDs of the current system for trunked system sites 1 9 0 key Press this key to enter numbers and go to Direct Entry no pri key Press this key to input decimal point hyphen or i for Direct Entry E yes gps key Press this key to edit the data for the c...

Page 389: ...Search Hold Mode for the current frequency If the current system is a trunked system Press E yes gps to start ID Search Press no pri to go to Search for Press L O to cancel this prompt Press Hold to go to Scan Hold Mode Hold key Press this key to toggle Close Call functions Long press this key to start Close Call Only Mode L O key Press this key once to temporarily lock out a system or a search ra...

Page 390: ... global attenuator setting 8 rev key Long press this key to show the reverse frequency for the current frequency And release this key to return to the current frequency 9 mod key Press this key to toggle the modulation state for global setting 0 wx key Press this key to change WX Alert Priority Mode Long press this key to start WX Scan no pri key Press this key to toggle Priority Mode for conventi...

Page 391: ... the scanner is unable to scan over 100 channels at once If there are more than 100 unlocked priority channels the first 100 channels will be scanned for priority scanning but others won t The priority for P Channels is determined by System and Group Quick Key settings The highest priority is for P Channels to which the SQK and GQK are 1 And the lowest priority is for P Channels to which the SQK i...

Page 392: ...all Priority Channels are locked out the scanner displays Priority Scan No Channel and sounds an Error Tone Then Priority Plus Scan stops Press any key to cancel it Priority Scan is turned off automatically and it starts normal scanning Key Operation During Priority Scan Key operations are the same as in Scan Mode and Scan Hold Mode See Key Operation During Scan and Key Operation During Scan Hold ...

Page 393: ...hannel delay period Motorola system can receive priority IDs while the scanner is on the voice channel However for this to work the channel must also be assigned as a priority channel by the radio system otherwise the TGID will never be sent on the voice channel s low speed data HOLD Site 1 1 MOT ID 16524 P 851 0125 S0 1 2 5 7 8 0 GRP 1 2 6 0 The scanner can only look for priority channels on the ...

Page 394: ...ayed on right end HAM Radio 29 6000MHz NFM While searching locked out frequencies are skipped The lockout information is common to all Searches and Close Call You can confirm or unlock these locked out frequencies at Freq Lockouts Press Hold to go to Search Hold Mode for the current frequency If CTCSS DCS Search is On See Tone Code Search the scanner searches for any active CTCSS DCS on the freque...

Page 395: ... Public Safety 30 9000MHz NFM If the search range is one that includes channel numbers like CB or Marine the scanner displays the frequency and the channel number The frequency unit is not displayed For example if it stops on 27 4050 MHz of CB Radio the scanner displays as follows CB Radi o 27 4050 CH40 AM While monitoring the transmission press SCAN srch in Function Mode or turn Scroll Control to...

Page 396: ...s Locked Out then resumes searching from the next frequency If you turn off the current search range number the scanner searches from the next range The scanner stays on a frequency until the delay time expires after a transmission ends When you start a Custom Search by selecting Custom Search from the Menu the frequency is initialized and the scanner starts searching When searching in ascending o...

Page 397: ...earching resumes immediately Receive Motorola Control Channel The scanner starts trunking Acquired TGIDs are displayed The first line displays the system name and system ID name ID in turn The second line displays the TGID The C Ch frequency is displayed in the line under the TGID display If you have set the correct band plan for the received control channel at Set MOT BandPlan the scanner will au...

Page 398: ...n make the scanner perform this function by menu selection See Search and Store for details In this operation the setting of Set C Ch Only is invalid Quick Search Quick Search searches all bands You can start Quick Search by pressing SCAN srch key in Function Mode during Scan Mode Scan Hold Mode Close Call Mode Weather Scan Mode and Tone Out Mode The scanner prompts Quick Search Quick Search Yes E...

Page 399: ...on the frequency and the second line displays the frequency While monitoring the frequency press SCAN srch in Function Mode or turn Scroll Control to resume searching Press L O once to lock out the frequency temporarily The scanner displays Temporary L O Press L O twice in a second to lock out the frequency permanently The scanner displays Locked Out then resumes searching from the next frequency ...

Page 400: ...frequencies that are locked out in Search Mode and Close Call Mode 1 9 0 key Press this key to turn on or off each custom search range However this key operates only in Custom Search and does not operate in other searches E yes gps key Press this key to quickly store the current frequency MENU key Press this key to go to the Menu Mode at Top Menu Function Mode Scroll Control knob Turn this knob to...

Page 401: ...oggle the attenuator state for the search range Long press this key to toggle global attenuator 8 rev key Long press this key to show the reverse frequency for the current frequency And release this key to return to the current frequency 9 mod Key Press this key to change the modulation 0 WX key Press this key to change WX Alert Priority Mode Long press this key to start WX Scan E yes gps key Pres...

Page 402: ...locked Press SCAN srch in Function Mode or Hold key to restart searching Custom Search Range Select Turn Scroll Control knob in Function Mode to select the Custom Search Range Once the Range is changed the monitoring frequency is set to upper limit frequency or lower limit frequency depends on searching direction If the direction is ascending order the frequency is set to lower limit frequency of ...

Page 403: ...f you store the detected frequency while receiving location data from a GPS unit the channel name of the stored frequency becomes the current Latitude Longitude data The channel name format depends on the format set in Set Pos Format DMS DDD MM SS ss is set If the latitude data is 32 57 33 60 N and the longitude data is 97 05 34 18 W the channel name becomes 3257 33 09705 34 DEG DD dddddd is set I...

Page 404: ...frequencies that are locked out in Search Mode and Close Call Mode 1 9 0 key Press this key to enter numbers and go to Direct Entry no pri key Press this key to input decimal point hyphen or i for Direct Entry E yes gps key Press this key to quickly store the current frequency MENU key Press this key to go to the Menu Mode at Top Menu Function Mode Scroll Control knob Turn this knob to select a cu...

Page 405: ...this key to toggle the attenuator state for the search range Long press this key to toggle global attenuator 8 rev key Long press this key to show the reverse frequency for the current frequency And release this key to return to the current frequency 9 mod Key Press this key to change the modulation 0 WX key Press this key to change WX Alert Priority Mode Long press this key to start WX Scan E yes...

Page 406: ...requency or a reverse frequency it does not prompt for any new Close Call hits The scanner checks Close Call transmissions while scanning or searching every 2 seconds If a Close Call hit is found the scanner alerts the user according to the setting of Set CC Alert and the Close Call icon blinks CC DND is set The scanner does not make Close Call checks when it is already receiving a voice transmiss...

Page 407: ...n Set CC Pause to ignore the Close Call hit and return to the previous state In this state pressing Scroll Control L O or Menu operates the same as pressing no pri and other keys are invalid If you ignored the hit during the CC Pause time the scanner will not check for any Close Call transmission for 10 seconds Press Hold to go to Close Call Hold Mode with the frequency When the scanner gets a Clo...

Page 408: ... Otherwise it returns to the previous mode Press L O once to temporarily lock out the frequency The scanner displays Temporary L O Press L O twice in a second to permanently lock out the frequency The scanner displays Locked Out then resumes searching from the next frequency The scanner stays on the frequency until the Delay time expires even if the transmission ends Then the scanner checks the re...

Page 409: ...se Call hit frequency Or if it has not yet received a Close Call hit the keypress is ignored and the scanner sounds an Error Tone Press the number keys from 1 sr1 to 7 att to switch each band on or off You can also use the menu to turn bands on or off See Set CC Bands If the scanner gets a Close Call hit the scanner displays CC Found and Press Any Key And the band number that the found close call ...

Page 410: ...layed For example if the scanner finds a transmission on 174 0000 MHz it displays as follows In this condition the scanner does not check for other Close Call hits While holding on a frequency turning Scroll Control goes to Quick Search Hold with the held frequency And Close Call Mode will be set to off Press Hold to return to the previous state If the Close Call transmission is found again the sc...

Page 411: ...Mode If you exit from Menu Mode it goes to Close Call Only Mode Pressing Menu in Function Mode exits this mode and goes to the Close Call Menu Pressing Scan srch in Function Mode prompts Quick Search and exits this mode Then press E yes gps to go to Quick Search Mode press no pri to go to Search Menu press L O to cancel the prompt and go to Close Call Only Mode or press Hold to go to Quick Search ...

Page 412: ... lock out the current frequency When the scanner is turned off the frequency is unlocked Press this key twice in a second to permanently lock out the current frequency When the scanner is turned off the frequency stays locked out Long press this key to unlock all frequencies that are locked out in Search Mode and Close Call Mode 1 7 key Press these keys to turn on off each Close Call Band This ope...

Page 413: ...s key to toggle the global attenuator status 8 rev key Long press this key to show the reverse frequency for the current frequency And release this key to return to the current frequency 9 mod Key Press this key to change the modulation 0 WX key Press this key to change WX Alert Priority Mode Long press this key to start WX Scan E yes gps key Press this key to change to the GPS Mode Menu key Press...

Page 414: ...e Scan srch key Press this key to display the prompt for starting Quick Search The scanner displays the prompt Press E yes gps to start Quick Search press no pri to go to Menu Mode at Search for press L O to cancel the prompt or press Hold to go to Quick Search Hold Mode Hold key Press this key to set the Close Call Mode to off and go to Scan Mode L O key Press this key to go to Rvw Search L O 1 3...

Page 415: ...Press this key to change the modulation mode 0 WX key Press this key to change WX Alert Priority Mode Long press this key to start WX Scan E yes gps key Press this key to change to the GPS Mode Menu key Press this key to go to Close Call ...

Page 416: ...X Scan 162 5500MHz CH1 FM If the signal is lost the scanner resumes scanning for Weather Channels Weather Alert Scan The scanner starts this when you either select the Weather Alert function in Menu Mode at Weather Alert or press Function key and 0 WX key in Normal Weather Scan Mode to start this mode The scanner scans 10 Weather Channels and alerts when it detects a 1050 Hz Weather Alert Tone or ...

Page 417: ...EOM For example the scanner displays as follows when it decodes the SAME data that has an Event Code of EAN Warning WX EMG Notify If the scanner is set to All FIPS the scanner sounds a Weather Alert Siren for Warning Watch or Advisory when it decodes the SAME data packets that precede the Alert Tone It displays the warning level and Event Code then opens squelch and remains on the Weather Channel ...

Page 418: ...ch and remains on the Weather Channel If you presses any key again the scanner goes to Weather Scan Hold Mode WX Alt Priority function does not work while the scanner is in Weather Scan Mode Search and Store Mode Tone Out Mode or CC Auto Store Direct Entry Quick Save When the scanner is holding on a Weather Channel enter a frequency or TGID by pressing the number and decimal keys then press E yes ...

Page 419: ...ess this key to toggle global attenuator 0 WX key Press this key to change to WX Scan or WX Alert Scan If you press this key in WX Scan Mode you can selects how the WX Scan works and the scanner starts WX Alert Scan Or the scanner immediately starts WX Scan when this key is pressed in any WX Alert Scan Mode E yes gps key Press this key to change to the GPS Mode MENU key Press this key to go to WX ...

Page 420: ...arch range set at Set Search Key 4 LEFT ifx Key Press this key to exchange IF intermediate frequency for the current frequency 7 att key Press this key to toggle the attenuator state for the search range Long press this key to toggle global attenuator 0 WX key Press this key to switch between WX Scan or WX Alert Scan If you press this key in WX Scan Mode you can select how the WX Scan works and th...

Page 421: ... Out Search FM These icons show the modulation type ATT This icon shows the attenuator status of the current channel When Global attenuator is on this icon blinks IFX This icon shows when the current channel is an IF exchange frequency Tone Out Search Tone Out 1 FM ATT IFX CH1 A 0 0Hz B 0 0Hz This shows Tone Out Search Status This shows Tone Out channel name This shows Tone Out channel number Tone...

Page 422: ...Tone A If the first tone matches Tone A the scanner confirms that the tone is present for more than 250ms Then the second tone is confirmed whether it detects second tone less than 500ms If the second tone matches Tone B and the tone is present for more than 100ms the scanner opens squelch and activates the alert tone and alert light that you set for this tone set Then the scanner goes to Tone Out...

Page 423: ...0000 NFM On 1800 0 2800 0 CH 5 137 0000 FM Off 2000 0 3000 0 CH 6 138 0000 Auto NFM Off 1000 0 2000 0 Modulation setting Auto follows the initialization of Band Coverage However when modulation of the frequency in Band Coverage is not FM or NFM it is forced to FM And Auto is compared as NFM or FM with other channel s setting The scanner detects the Tone on the channel that its number is the smalle...

Page 424: ... For single tone pages the Tone must be present between 1 25 3 75 seconds For group tones Tone must be present for more than 3 75 seconds If one kind of these tones is detected the scanner begins to check whether it has been registered in another tone out channel with the same setting for frequency Modulation and Attenuator If it has been registered the scanner goes to Tone Out Hold Mode with the ...

Page 425: ...a new tone out sequence that has not been register yet The found tone out sequence will flash You can return to the Tone Out Search Mode by pressing Hold If you press E yes gps you will be prompted to save the new detected tone out sequence Set Found Tone A and B Yes E No Press E yes gps to save the new tone out sequence and move to the tone out setting menu Tone Out Settings Press no pri to cance...

Page 426: ... Mode press this key to go to Tone Out Hold Mode and release the mute In Tone Out Hold Mode press this key to go to Tone Out Standby Mode or Tone Out Search Mode and the scanner is muted 1 9 0 key Press this key to enter a frequency or a TGID for Direct Entry no pri key Press this key to input i for Direct Entry E yes gps key Press this key to go to the channel menu at Tone Out Settings Menu Key P...

Page 427: ...ey to go to Close Call Only Mode 1 3 sr 1 3 key Press this key to start searching the search range set at Set Search Key 4 LEFT ifx key Press this key to exchange IF intermediate frequency for the current frequency 7 att key Press this key to toggle the attenuator setting Long press this key to toggle the global attenuator setting 9 mod key Press this key to change the modulation 0 WX key Press th...

Page 428: ...MC Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS Data based on NMEA 0183 ver 3 01 Display Mode in GPS Mode There are 6 kinds of Display Mode in GPS Mode GPS DATA ETA Clock Elevation Speed and Location And there are two displays for a GPS Data receipt error If you do not select any POI the Display Mode can be selected from GPS DATA and Location Press 6 RIGHT disp in Function Mode to change the Display Mode to ...

Page 429: ...direction to the selected POI The left side of the 1st line displays the current direction of travel The 2nd line displays the distance to the selected POI The right side of the 1st line displays individual information ETA Display Mode shows the ETA Estimated Time for Arrival to the selected POI Clock Display Mode shows the present time Elevation Display Mode shows the elevation of the current loc...

Page 430: ...splayed as DDDD dd mi DDDD dd distance According to the setting of Set Unit mi mile or km is displayed for a unit The ETA to the POI This is displayed as hhh mmm hh hour mm minute The latitude This is displayed as N or S and DDºMM SS ss for DMS format or DD dddddd for DEG format The longitude This is displayed as W or E and DDDºMM SS ss for DMS format or DDD dddddd for DEG format Error Display Whe...

Page 431: ...plays POI as Location Alert System Type and the distance to the destination Dangerous Xing Road The scanner may ring an Alert three times at different timings The screen displays ALERT for on the first line And the second line displays the Location Alert System Type and the distance to the Alert Location An arrow which shows the direction of Alert Location is displayed too Alert Light is turned on...

Page 432: ... If Car 1 is running at speed lower than the limit set for the point the scanner does not ring an alert the display changes to Location Alert Mode If Car 1 accelerates to a speed higher than the limit set for the point after it enters range the scanner will ring an Alert and the Alert Light is turned on On the other hand no Alert Alert display Alert Light and Alert Beep will sound for Car 2 regard...

Page 433: ...ing value by long pressing E yes gps key in Function Mode The moment you press E yes gps key in Function Mode the scanner holds the current location data Then the scanner displays the dialog for selecting a location type By pressing E yes gps for type selection registration is completed and the name and location of stored location are displayed The stored data is named as T YYMMDD hhmmss that show...

Page 434: ...isplayed under the second line For POI Range is displayed as RANGE 0 10 MILE or RANGE 0 10 KM For Dangerous Xing or Dangerous Road Heading and Limit Speed are displayed as HEAD xxx and LS 75M or LS 75K The xxx is one of ALL N NE E SE S SW W and NW Latitude and Longitude are displayed at the bottom of the screen Displays of each Type are as follows POI Dangerous Xing Dangerous Road Key Operation Ke...

Page 435: ...oad Settings However pressing MENU in this edit menu returns to Review Location Mode and pressing L O in this menu goes to GPS Mode If you select New Location in the editing menu the scanner returns to Review Location Mode with new Location activation If you select Delete Location in the editing menu the scanner returns to Review Location Mode and the next Location is selected If you ve deleted al...

Page 436: ...r operation is Scan Mode or Search Mode the scanner goes to Hold Mode by pressing this key Or it is Scan Hold or Search Hold the scanner resumes scanning or searching L O key Press this key once to temporarily lockout the current Location Alert during a Location Alert When the scanner is turned off the frequency is unlocked Or the scanner automatically unlocks the locked out location when it moves...

Page 437: ...f the frequency is unlocked Or the scanner automatically unlocks the locked out location when it moves 4 miles or more from the Alert Point Press this key twice in a second to permanently lockout the current Location Alert during a Location Alert When the scanner is turned off these locations remain locked out 6 RIGHT disp key Press this key to change the GPS Display E yes gps key Long press this ...

Page 438: ...can monitor the displayed frequency Close Call Priority Scan Weather Scan and GPS functions do not work in Band Scope Mode Scope Mode SRCH MF 850 8125 START END 850 00 852 00 Search Mode with Normal Screen MAX MF 850 8125 CF 851 0000 SPN 2M STP 12 5K Search Mode with Setting Screen HOLD MF 850 8125 START END 850 00 852 00 Hold Mode with Normal Screen F HOLD MF 850 8125 NFM ATT I FX Hold Mode in Fu...

Page 439: ...ches and displays the signals of the frequency range in real time The scanner displays SRCH The frequency range expressed in 32 bars is determined by the center frequency and span If the frequency range includes outside of the range from 25 0000 to 1300 0000 MHz the scanner does not search that range While searching the center frequency icon and the bar which shows the current frequency blink The ...

Page 440: ... Setting Screen This screen is displayed to operate the band scope settings This screen displays center frequency of the range search step and span of the range on the bottom line You can change these parameters Press no pri while on the normal screen to display this screen In this screen press no pri to select the next setting item The icon of the selected item blinks You can change the selected ...

Page 441: ...192 You can restart searching by pressing FUNC L O The scanner also restarts searching if you change any parameter or search mode In Hold Mode the scanner searches a search range only once ...

Page 442: ...n select from 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 MHz Search Step You can change the search step to find a transmission The search time changes depending on the search step size You can select from 5 6 25 7 5 8 33 10 12 5 15 20 25 50 100 kHz Modulation Modulation can be selected from AUTO AM NFM FM WFM FMB This parameter is used in HOLD Mode Whe...

Page 443: ... this key to enter the Menu Mode Normal Mode during Setting Screen Scroll Control Knob Sets the level in Volume Squelch Level Control mode Turn this knob to change the selected item parameter except CF item Scan srch Key Press this key to go to Scan Mode Hold Key In Search or Max Hold Search Mode press this key to go to Hold Mode In Hold Mode press this key to return to the previous search mode no...

Page 444: ...ess this key to start Service Search Custom Search Tone Out Mode or Band Scope Mode in Set Search Key 4 LEFT ifx Key In Hold Mode press this key to exchange IF intermediate frequency 7 att key Press this key to toggle the attenuator state for the search range Long press this key to toggle global attenuator 9 mod Key Press this key to change the modulation 0 wx Key Press this key to change WX Alert...

Page 445: ...econd it fails with an error Press L O to return to Menu Mode at Wired Clone In the Slave Unit when Scan srch key is pressed and the display is Clone Slave Waiting Data the only control that will work is for turning off the scanner and turning on the backlight Transferring State During the data transfer the scanners display a progress message shows progressing transfer Complete State When the data...

Page 446: ...e Slave Unit receives invalid data it continues waiting for valid data Key Operation During Clone Mode Confirm State Scan srch key The scanner start data transfer Menu key The scanner goes to Menu at Wired Clone FUNC Menu key The scanner goes to Menu at Wired Clone L O key The scanner goes to Menu at Wired Clone key Turn off the power supply or illuminate the LCD backlight Another State L O key Th...

Page 447: ...d On or Off While the keypad is locked any key operation other than Hold Func and turning Scroll Control key are invalid Of course Func key is also valid to cancel the keypad lock status Pressing any other key causes the scanner displays Keypad Lock and On and does not sound any beep Keypad Lock On Keypad Lock Off ...

Page 448: ...ifx 5 lvl 6 RIGHT disp 7 att 8 rev 9 mod 0 wx no pri E yes gps O O O O O O O O Menu O O O O O O O O O Function Mode Scan srch O O O O O Hold O 4 O 4 O 4 O 4 O 4 O 4 O 4 O 4 L O O O O O 1 3 sr1 3 O 5 O O O O O O O 4 LEFT ifx O 5 O 3 O 3 O 3 O 3 O 3 O O 5 lvl O 5 6 RIGHT disp 7 att O 5 O O O O O O O 8 rev 9 mod O 5 O O O O O O 0 wx O 4 5 O 4 O 4 O 4 O O 4 O 4 O 4 no pri E yes gps O O O O O O O O O M...

Page 449: ...FUNC key and the number key the scanner does not set Key Safe Operation LAST MODE means the mode when the scanner is turned off It resumes Scan Mode Custom Service Quick Search Mode Weather Mode Close Call Only Tone Out Mode each Hold Mode GPS Mode and Band Scope Mode for LAST MODE In ID Search Hold Mode if ID has already been registered LAST MODE will be ID Search Hold Mode If ID has not been reg...

Page 450: ...ff the scanner during initialization the scanner starts initializing again at next power on After clearing data the scanner displays Restore Preprogram List Yes E No then you can select whether to restore the Preprogram List Restore Preprogram Li st Yes E No Press E yes gps to restore the Preprogram List Or pressing no pri to use without restoring the Preprogram List Then other keys are invalid an...

Page 451: ...To charge the batteries connect the AC adapter to the scanner s power jack after installing the Ni MH batteries with correct setting of the battery type switch The scanner charges the installed Ni MH batteries You can change the charging time See Set Charge Time Never use non rechargeable batteries in the scanner with the switch set to Ni MH Charging the Battery If an AC adapter is connected to th...

Page 452: ...rge time elapses it displays Charge Complete Charge Complete If a battery is not installed it displays No Battery No Battery If the scanner detects that the battery cannot be charged it displays Battery Error Battery Error If there is a battery and Battery Type of the scanner is set to ALKALINE it displays Charge Off Charge Off ...

Page 453: ...ood the scanner charges the battery and it operates ordinarily When the scanner cannot judge the battery to be a good one at once the scanner checks the battery and the battery icon is displayed If the scanner judges the battery good the scanner starts charging and the battery icon disappears If it cannot regard the battery as good within 60 seconds the scanner stops checking and the battery icon ...

Page 454: ...stem O O O O O O O Delete System O O O O O O O System Option Settings System Option Settings CNV P25 MOT EDACS LTR Standard Trunk One Freq Trunk WIDE NARROW SCAT Set Quick Key O Set Startup Key O Set Number tag O O O O O O O Set Lockout O Set Hold Time O ID Scan Search O O O O O Set Delay Time O O O O O O O Edit Fleet Map O Priority ID Scan O O O O Set Status Bit O Set End Code O Emergency Alert O...

Page 455: ...O O O Set Modulation O O O O Set Attenuator O O O O O O Set Lockout O O O O O O Set Hold Time O O O O O O Set LocationInfo O O O O O O P25 Waiting Time O Delete Site O O O O O New Site O O O O O Site Frequency Settings Site Frequency P25 MOT EDACS LTR Standard Trunk One Freq Trunk WIDE NARROW SCAT Edit Frequency O O O O O O Input LCN O O Set Number tag O Set Lockout O O O O O O Volume Offset O Del...

Page 456: ...Edit Name O O O O O O Edit Frequency O Edit TGID O O O O O Set Audio Type O O Set Number tag O O O O O O Set Modulation O Set Attenuator O Set Priority O O O O O Set Alert O O O O O O Set Lockout O O O O O O Volume Offset O O O O O O Copy Channel O O O O O O Delete Channel O O O O O O New Channel O O O O O O ...

Page 457: ... is 1 digit FFF is 3 digits 6 NNNNN Normal ID when SIZE CODE is 0 N is 1 5 digit s 7 iNNNNN I CALL ID N is 5 digits 0 filling Input Format 1 BFF SS Normal ID B is 1 digit FF should be 2 digits 0 filling SS is 1 2 digit s 2 BFFF S Normal ID when FLEET is 100 127 B is 1 digit FFF is 3 digits S is 1 digit 3 B Partial ID free FLEET and SUB FLEET B is 1 digit 4 BFF Partial ID fleet SUB FLEET B is 1 dig...

Page 458: ...T 0 3 SIZE CODE 2 FLEET 00 15 SUB FLEET 0 7 SIZE CODE 3 FLEET 00 07 SUB FLEET 0 7 SIZE CODE 4 FLEET 00 SUB FLEET 0 15 SIZE CODE 5 FLEET 00 63 SUB FLEET 0 3 SIZE CODE 6 FLEET 00 31 SUB FLEET 0 7 SIZE CODE 7 FLEET 00 31 SUB FLEET 0 3 SIZE CODE 8 FLEET 00 15 SUB FLEET 0 3 SIZE CODE 9 FLEET 00 07 SUB FLEET 0 3 SIZE CODE 10 FLEET 00 03 SUB FLEET 0 7 SIZE CODE 11 FLEET 00 01 SUB FLEET 0 15 SIZE CODE 12 ...

Page 459: ...rmal ID 1 65535 I CALL ID i00000 i65535 Note TYPE2 format cannot support PARTIAL ID Hexadecimal Format Display Format 1 NNNh Normal ID NNN is 1 3 digit s 2 iNNNNh I CALL ID NNNN is 4 digits 0 filling Input Format 1 NNN Normal ID NNN is 1 3 digit s 2 iNNNN I CALL ID NNNN is 1 4 digits Range Normal ID 001 FFF I CALL ID i0000 iFFFF Note TYPE2 format cannot support PARTIAL ID Normal ID Hexadecimal For...

Page 460: ...is 1 8 digits Range Normal ID 1 65535 I CALL ID i00000 i16777215 Note P25 format cannot support PARTIAL ID Hexadecimal Format Display Format 1 NNNN Normal ID NNNN is 1 4 digit s 2 iNNNNNN I CALL ID NNNNNN is 6 digits 0 filling Input Format 1 NNNN Normal ID Hexadecimal Format NNNN is 1 4 digit s 2 iNNNNNN I CALL ID NNNNNN is 1 6 digits Range Normal ID 0001 FFFF I CALL ID i000000 iFFFFFF Note P25 fo...

Page 461: ...ree FLEET and SUB FLEET AA should be 2 digits 0 filling 3 AA FF Partial ID free SUB FLEET AA should be 2 digits 0 filling FF should be 2 digits 0 filling Range AA AGENCY 2digits 00 15 FF FLEET 2digits 00 15 S SUB FLEET 1digit 0 7 ALL0 00 00 0 is invalid Note Both AFS and Decimal Format are valid to input regardless of AFS setting Display Format depends on AFS Decimal setting except for I CALL ID U...

Page 462: ...NN is 1 4 digit s 2 iNNNNN I CALL ID NNNNN is 1 5 digit s Range Normal ID 1 2047 I CALL ID i00000 i16383 Note Both AFS and Decimal Format are valid to input regardless of AFS setting Display Format depends on AFS Decimal Setting except for I CALL ID I CALL format is always showed as Decimal Format regardless of AFS setting Decimal format cannot support Partial ID ...

Page 463: ...mat 1 A RR NNN Normal ID A is 1 digit RR is 2 digits NNN is 3 digits 2 ARRNNN Normal ID Easy Way A is 1 digit RR should be 2 digits 01 20 NNN should be 3 digits 000 254 3 A RR Partial ID free ID A is 1 digit RR should be 2 digits 01 20 Range A AREA CODE 1digit 0 or 1 RR HOME REPEATER 2digit 01 20 NNN ID 3digit 000 254 Note LTR System has no I CALL ID ...

Page 464: ...pped because Block 2 is set to Size Code 12 Block 2 and Block 3 are treated as Size Code 12 Then the scanner advances to Block 4 to select its Size Code Size Code 13 occupies 4 Blocks and this can be set only for Block 0 or Block 4 If you try to set this to Block number 1 3 it is set to Block 0 And if you try to set this to Block number 5 7 it is set to Block 4 When you set a block to Size Code 13...

Page 465: ... there are 4 Fleets and the range is from 0 to 3 PRESET FLEET MAPS The numbers in the table shows the number of SIZE CODE BLOCK No 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Preset 1 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 Preset 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Preset 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 12 12 Preset 4 12 12 4 4 4 4 4 4 Preset 5 4 4 12 12 4 4 4 4 Preset 6 3 10 4 4 12 12 12 12 Preset 7 10 10 11 4 4 4 4 4 Preset 8 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Preset 9 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 Preset...

Page 466: ... 186 2Hz 218 1Hz 77 0Hz 100 0Hz 131 8Hz 165 5Hz 189 9Hz 225 7Hz 79 7Hz 103 5Hz 136 5Hz 167 9Hz 192 8Hz 229 1Hz 82 5Hz 107 2Hz 141 3Hz 171 3Hz 196 6Hz 233 6Hz 85 4Hz 110 9Hz 146 2Hz 173 8Hz 199 5Hz 241 8Hz DCS CODE The scanner can detect the following 104 hexadecimal DCS codes 023 051 114 143 174 245 266 332 411 452 506 612 703 025 053 115 145 205 246 271 343 412 454 516 624 712 026 054 116 152 212...

Page 467: ... Demo O System Demo DSW Dust Storm Warning O Dust Storm EAN Emergency Action Notification O EMG Notify EAT Emergency Action Termination O EMG Terminate EQW Earthquake Warning O Earthquake EVA Evacuation Watch O Evacuate Note EVI Immediate Evacuation O Evacuate Note FCW Food Contamination Warning O Food FFA Flash Flood Watch O Flash Flood FFS Flash Flood Statement O Flash Flood FFW Flash Flood Warn...

Page 468: ...m SVR Severe Thunderstorm Warning O Thunderstorm SVS Severe Weather Statement O Severe WX TOA Tornado Watch O Tornado TOE 911 Telephone Outage Emergency O 911 Phone Outage TOR Tornado Warning O Tornado TRA Tropical Strom Watch O Tropical Storm TRW Tropical Storm Warning O Tropical Storm TSA Tsunami Watch O Tsunami TSW Tsunami Warning O Tsunami TXB Transmitter Backup On O TX Backup On TXF Transmitt...

Page 469: ... like multi line because of the page width but their formats are only single line actually In set command only parameters are not changed 6 The set command is aborted if any format error is detected 7 INDEX or xxx_INDEX is the index of internal memory chain Dynamic Memory Allocation Structure always uses it as a handle to access data and to trace forward reverse or up down index The range of the i...

Page 470: ...tatus GLG Get Reception Status JPM Jump Mode JNT Jump to Number Tag MNU Menu Mode System Information MDL Get Model Info VER Get Firmware Version Program Control Mode PRG Enter Program Mode EPG Exit Program Mode System Settings BLT Get Set Backlight O BSV Get Set Battery Info O COM Get Set COM port setting O CLR Clear All Memory O KBP Get Set Key Beep and setting O OMS Get Set Opening Message O PRI...

Page 471: ...gs O GLF Get Global Lockout Freq O ULF Unlock Global L O O LOF Lock Out Frequency O CLC Get Set Close Call Settings O Service Search Settings SSP Get Set Service Search Settings O Custom Search Settings CSG Get Set Custom Search Group O CBP Get Set C Ch Only Custom search MOT Band Plan O CSP Get Set Custom Search Settings O Weather Settings WXS Get Set Weather Settings O SGP Get Set SAME Group Set...

Page 472: ...CAT system site LTR LTR system site P25S P25 STANDARD system site P25F P25 One Frequency TRUNK system site TGID TGID ID_SRCH_MODE ID SCAN ID SEARCH Mode 0 ID SCAN Mode 1 ID SEARCH Mode NAME1 SYSTEM SITE NAME Alpha Tag NAME2 GROUP NAME Alpha Tag NAME3 TGID NAME Alpha Tag FUNCTION This command return TGID currently displayed on LCD If you get the TGID once the scanner returns r until next reception ...

Page 473: ...R LIGHT LOCK KEY_MODE P Press L Long Press H Hold Press and Hold until Release receive R Release Cancel Hold state Ex 1 Press MENU KEY KEY M P r OK r Ex 2 Press F SCAN KEY KEY F P r Hold F KEY OK r KEY S P r Press SCAN KEY F SCAN KEY operation OK r KEY F P r Release F KEY OK r Ex 3 Press and Hold L O KEY KEY L L r OK r The status of KEY HOLD does time out in 10 seconds after having received the co...

Page 474: ...0 1 2 5 10 30 CODE_SRCH CTCSS DCS P25 NAC Search 0 OFF 1 CTCSS DCS 2 P25 NAC Search BSC Broadcast Screen 16digit each is 0 or 1 Band10 0 means OFF 1 means ON Band 2 Band 1 Reserve NOAA WX VHF TV UHF TV FM Pager REP Repeater Find 0 OFF 1 ON AGC_ANALOG AGC Setting for Analog Audio 0 OFF 1 ON AGC_DIGITAL AGC Setting for Digital Audio 0 OFF 1 ON P25WAITING P25 Waiting time 0 100 200 300 900 1000 0 0ms...

Page 475: ...n AUTO AM FM NFM WFM FMB ATT Attenuation 0 OFF 1 ON DLY Delay Time 10 5 2 0 1 2 5 10 30 CODE_SRCH CTCSS DCS Search 0 OFF 1 CTCSS DCS Search 2 P25 NAC Search BSC Broadcast Screen 16digit each is 0 or 1 Band10 0 means OFF 1 means ON Band 2 Band 1 Reserve NOAA WX VHF TV UHF TV FM Pager REP Repeater Find 0 OFF 1 ON RSSI RSSI A D Value 0 1023 SQL Squelch Status 0 CLOSE 1 OPEN AGC_ANALOG AGC Setting for...

Page 476: ...RQ SQL r CSC RSSI FRQ SQL r CSC RSSI FRQ SQL r CSC OK r RSSI RSSI A D Value 0 1023 FRQ Current Frequency SQL Squelch Status 0 CLOSE 1 OPEN This command outputs custom search status of each frequency sequentially Use CSC OFF command to stop the output This command is invalid when the scanner is in Menu Mode during Direct Entry operation during Quick Save operation COMMAND PWR Get RSSI Level Control...

Page 477: ...r fixed length L8_MODE Line8 Display Mode 16char SQL Squelch Status 0 CLOSE 1 OPEN MUT Mute Status 0 OFF 1 ON RSV Reserve Parameter This is always only 0 BAT Battery Low Status 0 No Alert 1 Alert WAT Weather Alert Status 0 No Alert 1 Alert Alert SAME CODE SIG_LVL Signal Level 0 5 BK_COLOR Backlight Color OFF BLUE RED MAGENTA GREEN CYAN YELLOW WHITE BK_DIMMER Backlight Dimmer 0 OFF 1 Low 2 Middle 3...

Page 478: ... S1 5 L5_CHAR L5_MODE GRP 2 WX L6_CHAR L6_MODE 0 1 0 0 1 GREEN r Returns current scanner status COMMAND GLG Get Reception Status Controller Radio GLG r Radio Controller GLG FRQ TGID MOD ATT CTCSS DCS NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 SQL MUT SYS_TAG CHAN_TAG P25NAC r GLG r FRQ TGID Frequency or TGID MOD Modulation AM FM NFM WFM FMB ATT Attenuation 0 OFF 1 ON CTCSS DCS CTCSS DCS Status 0 231 See CTCSS DCS CODE LIS...

Page 479: ...dio Controller JPM OK r JUMP_MODE SCN_MODE Scan mode SVC_MODE Service Search mode CTM_MODE Custom Search mode CC_MODE Close Call Only mode WX_MODE WX SCAN mode FTO_MODE Tone Out mode INDEX SCN_MODE Channel Index SVC_MODE PublicSafety News HAM Marine Railroad Air CB FRS GMRS MURS Racing FM Special Military CTM_MODE RESERVE CC_MODE RESERVE WX_MODE NORMAL A_ONLY SAME_1 SAME_2 SAME_3 SAME_4 SAME_5 ALL...

Page 480: ...AN_TAG r Radio Controller JNT OK r SYS_TAG System Number Tag 0 999 NONE CHAN_TAG Channel Number Tag 0 999 NONE When both SYS_TAG and CHAN_TAG are set as blank scanner returns error When SYS_TAG is set as blank CHAN_TAG is set with a number tag scanner jump to the channel number tag in current system When SYS_TAG is set with a number tag CHAN_TAG is set as blank scanner jump to the first channel of...

Page 481: ...Program Mode COMMAND EPG Exit Program Mode Controller Radio EPG r Radio Controller EPG OK r The scanner exits from Program Mode Then the scanner goes to Scan Hold Mode COMMAND BLT Get Set Backlight Controller Radio BLT r BLT EVNT COLOR DIMMER r Radio Controller BLT EVNT COLOR DIMMER r BLT OK r EVENT IF INFINITE 10 10sec 30 30sec KY KEYPRESS SQ SQUELCH COLOR BLUE RED MAGENTA GREEN CYAN YELLOW WHITE...

Page 482: ... r COM OK r BAUDRATE OFF OFF 4800 4800bps 9600 9600bps 19200 19200bps 38400 38400bps 57600 57600bps 115200 115200b Note When receive COM OK next command should not be send in 2 second Only PC Control Baud Rate does not become an initial setting value COMMAND CLR Clear All Memory Controller Radio CLR r Radio Controller CLR OK r All the memories are set for initial setting This command is only accep...

Page 483: ...S OK r L1_CHAR Line1 Characters max 16char L2_CHAR Line2 Characters max 16char L3_CHAR Line3 Characters max 16char L4_CHAR Line4 Characters max 16char If only space code is set in character area the message returns default message This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND PRI Get Set Priority Mode Controller Radio PRI r Get Priority Mode Setting PRI PRI_MODE MAX_CHAN INTERVAL r R...

Page 484: ...ting This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND SCT Get System Count Controller Radio SCT r Radio Controller SCT r 0 500 Returns the number of stored System This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND SIH Get System Index Head Controller Radio SIH r Radio Controller SIH SYS_INDEX r Returns the first index of stored system list This command is only acceptable in Pro...

Page 485: ... 39 30 PAGE4 Quick Key41 49 40 PAGE5 Quick Key51 59 50 PAGE6 Quick Key61 69 60 PAGE7 Quick Key71 79 70 PAGE8 Quick Key81 89 80 PAGE9 Quick Key91 99 90 This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode It cannot turn on off the Quick Key that has no System Site COMMAND QGL Get Set Group Quick Lockout Controller Radio QGL SYS_INDEX r QGL SYS_INDEX r Radio Controller QGL r QGL OK r each is 0 2 Grou...

Page 486: ...ndex of Created System PROTECT Protect bit Status 0 OFF 1 ON Creates a system and return created system index The index is a handle to get set system information Returns 1 if the scanner failed to create because of no resource This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND DSY Delete System Controller Radio DSY SYS_INDEX r Radio Controller DSY OK r SYS_INDEX System Index This command ...

Page 487: ...x Head of the conventional system or Site Index Head of the Trunked System CHN_GRP_TAIL Channel Group Index Tail of the conventional system or Site Index Tail of the Trunked System SEQ_NO System Sequence Number 1 500 START_KEY Startup Configuration Key 0 9 dot means none NUMBER_TAG Number tag 0 999 NONE AGC_ANALOG AGC Setting for Analog Audio 0 OFF 1 ON AGC_DIGITAL AGC Setting for Digital Audio 0 ...

Page 488: ...ode 7 C Size Code 12 3 Size Code 3 8 Size Code 8 D Size Code 13 4 Size Code 4 9 Size Code 9 E Size Code 14 TGID_GRP_HEAD TGID Index Head of the System TGID_GRP_TAIL TGID Index Tail of the System ID_LOUT_GRP_HEAD L O TGID Group Index Head of the System ID_LOUT_GRP_TAIL L O TGID Group Index Tail of the System MOT_ID Motorola P25 ID Format 0 Decimal 1 HEX EMG_COLOR Emergency Alert Light color OFF BLU...

Page 489: ...PE P25WAITING RSV r SIF OK r INDEX Site Index NAME Name max 16char QUICK_KEY Quick Key 0 99 dot means none HLD Site Hold Time 0 255 LOUT Lockout 0 Unlocked 1 Lockout MOD Modulation AUTO FM NFM ATT Attenuation 0 OFF 1 ON C CH This parameter is always 1 REV_INDEX Reverse Site Index of the Scan Setting FWD_INDEX Forward Site Index of the Scan Setting SYS_INDEX System Index CHN_HEAD Channel Index Head...

Page 490: ...PER3 STEP3 OFFSET3 LOWER4 UPPER4 STEP4 OFFSET4 LOWER5 UPPER5 STEP5 OFFSET5 LOWER6 UPPER6 STEP6 OFFSET6 r MCP OK r INDEX Site Index LOWER n Lower Frequency n UPPER n Upper Frequency n STEP n Step n 500 5 0k 625 6 25k 1000 10 0k 1250 12 5k 1500 15 0k 1875 18 75k 2000 20 0k 2500 25 0k 3000 30 0k 3125 31 25k 3500 35 0k 3750 37 5k 4000 40 0k 4375 43 75k 4500 45 0k 5000 50 0k 5500 55 0k 5625 56 25k 6000...

Page 491: ...25 0000MHz to 1300 0000MHz 5 0Hz step Base_FREQ_n base frequency 10 6 5 Hexadecimal number SPACING_FREQ_n Spacing frequency kHz 0 125kHz to 128 0kHz 0 125kHz step SPACING_FREQ_n spacing frequency 10 3 125 Hexadecimal number n Base Plan number EX Base frequency 851 00625MHz Spacing frequency 6 25kHz BASE_FREQ_n 851 00625 10 6 5 A2510A2 H SPACING_FREQ_n 6 25 10 3 125 32 H Band Plan that has no data ...

Page 492: ...0 999 NONE VOL_OFFSET Volume Offset 3 3 In set command only parameters are not changed The set command is aborted if any format error is detected This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode For Motorola or EDACS SCAT System LCN is ignored When the system protect bit is ON except REV_INDEX FWD_INDEX SYS_INDEX GRP_INDEX other parameters will be send as a reserve parameter in the Radio Contro...

Page 493: ...X NAME QUICK_KEY LOUT LATITUDE LONGITUDE RANGE GPS ENABLE r Radio Controller GIN GRP_TYPE NAME QUICK_KEY LOUT REV_INDEX FWD_INDEX SYS_INDEX CHN_HEAD CHN_TAIL SEQ_NO LATITUDE LONGITUDE RANGE GPS ENABLE r GIN OK r For Group Information GRP_INDEX Group Index GRP_TYPE Group Type C Channel Group T TGID Group NAME Name max 16char QUICK_KEY Quick Key 1 9 0 means 10 dot means none LOUT Lockout 0 Unlocked ...

Page 494: ...d Trunk Frequency Index Append Channel to the group Or append Trunk Frequency to the Site Returns 1 if the scanner failed to create because of no resource This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND ACT Append TGID Controller Radio ACT GRP_INDEX r Radio Controller ACT INDEX r GRP_INDEX TGID Group Index TGID_INDEX appended TGID Index Append TGID to the group Returns 1 if the scanner...

Page 495: ...ON ALT Alert Tone 0 OFF 1 9 Tone No ALTL Alert Tone Level 0 AUTO 1 15 REV_INDEX Reverse Channel Index of the Chan0nel Group FWD_INDEX Forward Channel Index of the Channel Group SYS_INDEX System Index of the Channel GRP_INDEX Group Index of the Channel AUDIO_TYPE Audio Type 0 All 1 Analog Only 2 Digital Only P25NAC P25 NAC Status 0 FFF 0 FFF SRCH Nac Search NUMBER_TAG Number tag 0 999 NONE ALT_COLO...

Page 496: ... Alert Light color OFF BLUE RED MAGENTA GREEN CYAN YELLOW WHITE ALT_PATTERN Alert Light Pattern 0 ON 1 SLow 2 Fast VOL_OFFSET Volume Offset 3 3 Get Set TGID Information In set command only parameters are not changed The set command is aborted if any format error is detected This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode When the system protect bit is ON except REV_INDEX FWD_INDEX SYS_INDEX GR...

Page 497: ...ming Mode COMMAND ULI Unlock TGID for Rvw L O ID Controller Radio ULI SYS_INDEX TGID r Radio Controller ULI OK r This command unlocks a L O TGID in a system The TGID is deleted from L O list This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND LOI Lockout ID TGID Controller Radio LOI SYS_INDEX TGID r Radio Controller LOI OK r This command locks out a TGID for the system The TGID is added to...

Page 498: ...D MEM Get Memory Used Controller Radio MEM r Radio Controller MEM MEMORY_USED SYS SITE CHN LOC r MEMORY_USED The percent of memory that is used 0 100 SYS The number of systems that is created 0 500 SITE The number of sites that is created 0 1000 CHN The number of channels that is created 0 25000 LOC The number of location system that is created 0 1000 This command is only acceptable in Programming...

Page 499: ...LA INDEX r LAS_TYPE Location Alert Type POI POI DROAD Dangerous Road DXING Dangerous Xing INDEX Location Alert System Index Creates a system and return created location alert system index The index is a handle to get set location alert system information Returns 1 if the scanner failed to create because of no resource This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND DLA Delete Location ...

Page 500: ...NDEX Reverse System Index of Location Alert System FWD_INDEX Forward System Index of Location Alert System SEQ_NO Location Alert System Sequence Number LATITUDE North or South Latitude LONGITUDE West or East Longitude RANGE Range 1 80 1 0 05 mile or km SPEED Speed Limit 0 200 1 means 1 mile hour or km h DIR Heading 0 358 360 2 step 360 All range ALT_COLOR Alert Light color OFF BLUE RED MAGENTA GRE...

Page 501: ... Pager REP Repeater Find 0 OFF 1 ON MAX_STORE Max Auto Store 1 256 AGC_ANALOG AGC Setting for Analog Audio 0 OFF 1 ON AGC_DIGITAL AGC Setting for Digital Audio 0 OFF 1 ON P25WAITING P25 Waiting time 0 100 200 300 900 1000 Get Set Search Close Call Settings In set command only parameters are not changed The set command is aborted if any format error is detected This command is only acceptable in Pr...

Page 502: ...nge FM FM Broadcast range CUSTOM_10 Custom 10 range Special Special range TONE_OUT Tone Out mode Military Military Air range B_SCOPE Band Scope Get Set Search Key Settings This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND GLF Get Global Lockout Freq Controller Radio GLF r Radio Controller GLF FRQ r GLF 1 r FRQ Lockout Frequency 250000 13000000 This command is used to get Global L O frequ...

Page 503: ...No ALTL Alert Tone Level 0 AUTO 1 15 ALTP Close Call Pause 3 3 sec 5 5 sec 10 10 sec 15 15 sec 30 30 sec 45 45 sec 60 60 sec INF Infinite CC_BAND Close Call Band 7digit each is 0 or 1 800MHz 0 means OFF UHF 1 means ON VHF HIGH2 VHF HIGH1 AIR BAND VHF LOW2 VHF LOW1 LOUT Lockout for CC Hits with Scan 0 Unlocked 1 Lockout HLD System Hold Time for CC Hits with Scan 0 255 QUICK_KEY Quick Key for CC Hit...

Page 504: ...n 0 255 LOUT Lockout for Search with Scan 0 Unlocked 1 Lockout QUICK_KEY Quick Key 0 99 dot START_KEY Startup Configuration Key 0 9 dot NUMBER_TAG Number tag 0 999 NONE AGC_ANALOG AGC Setting for Analog Audio 0 OFF 1 ON AGC_DIGITAL AGC Setting for Digital Audio 0 OFF 1 ON P25WAITING P25 Waiting time 0 100 200 300 900 1000 The set command is aborted if any format error is detected This command is o...

Page 505: ... Frequency n UPPER n Upper Frequency n STEP n Step n 500 5 0k 625 6 25k 1000 10 0k 1250 12 5k 1500 15 0k 1875 18 75k 2000 20 0k 2500 25 0k 3000 30 0k 3125 31 25k 3500 35 0k 3750 37 5k 4000 40 0k 4375 43 75k 4500 45 0k 5000 50 0k 5500 55 0k 5625 56 25k 6000 60 0k 6250 62 5k 6500 65 0k 6875 68 75k 7000 70 0k 7500 75 0k 8000 80 0k 8125 81 25k 8500 85 0k 8750 87 5k 9000 90 0k 9375 93 75k 9500 95 0k 10...

Page 506: ...TO AUTO 833 8 33k 2000 20k 500 5k 1000 10k 2500 25k 625 6 25k 1250 12 5k 5000 50k 750 7 5 k 1500 15k 10000 100k MOD Modulation AUTO AM FM NFM WFM FMB ATT Attenuation 0 OFF 1 ON DLY Delay Time 10 5 2 0 1 2 5 10 30 HLD System Hold Time 0 255 LOUT Lockout 0 Unlocked 1 Lockout C CH Control Channel Only 0 OFF 1 ON QUICK_KEY Quick Key 0 99 dot START_KEY Startup Configuration Key 0 9 dot NUMBER_TAG Numbe...

Page 507: ...mmand is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND SGP Get Set SAME Group Settings Controller Radio SGP SAME_INDEX r SGP SAME_INDEX NAME FIPS1 FIPS2 FIPS3 FIPS4 FIPS5 FIPS6 FIPS7 FIPS8 r Radio Controller SGP NAME FIPS1 FIPS2 FIPS3 FIPS4 FIPS5 FIPS6 FIPS7 FIPS8 r SGP OK r SAME_INDEX SAME Index 1 5 NAME SAME Group Name max 16char FIPS1 8 FIPS Code 6digit 000000 999999 or means none Get Set SAME Gr...

Page 508: ...nite ALT Alert Tone 0 OFF 1 9 Tone No ALTL Alert Tone Level 0 AUTO 1 15 TONE_A Tone A Frequency ex 10000 means 1000 0Hz 00000 means 0 0Hz RSV Reserve Parameter This is always only TONE_B Tone B Frequency ALT_COLOR Alert Light color OFF BLUE RED MAGENTA GREEN CYAN YELLOW WHITE ALT_PATTERN Alert Light Pattern 0 ON 1 SLow 2 Fast AGC_ANALOG AGC Setting for Analog Audio 0 OFF 1 ON Get Set Tone Out Sett...

Page 509: ... attenuator 0 OFF 1 ON P25_LPF P25 Low Pass Filter 0 OFF 1 ON RSV Reserve Parameter This is always only Get Set Scanner Option Settings This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND VOL Get Set Volume Level Settings Controller Radio VOL r VOL LEVEL r Radio Controller VOL LEVEL r VOL OK r LEVEL Volume Level 0 15 COMMAND SQL Get Set Squelch Level Settings Controller Radio SQL r SQL LEV...

Page 510: ... FMB This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND GDO Get Set GPS Disp Option Controller Radio GDO r GDO DISP_MODE UNIT TIME_FORMAT TIME_ZONE POS_FORMAT r Radio Controller GDO DISP_MODE UNIT TIME_FORMAT TIME_ZONE POS_FORMAT r GDO OK r DISP_MODE Display GPS Mode 0 ETA 1 Clock 2 Elevation 3 Speed 4 Location UNIT Distance Unit 0 mile 1 km TIME_FORMAT Time Format 0 12 H 1 24H TIME_ZONE ...

Page 511: ...Hold Display 0 OFF 1 ON Get Set Band Scope System Settings In set command only parameters are not changed The set command is aborted if any format error is detected This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND GIE Get Global IF exchange Frequency Controller Radio GIE r Radio Controller GIE FRQ r GIE 1 r FRQ IF Exchange Frequency 250000 13000000 This command is used to get Global IF ...

Page 512: ...quency 250000 13000000 This command register Frequency to Global IF exchange Frequency list This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND BAV Get Battery Voltage Controller Radio BAV r Radio Controller BAV r A D Value 0 1023 Battery Level V 3 2 V 2 1023 Returns current battery voltage This command is for test mode COMMAND WIN Get Window Voltage Controller Radio WIN r Radio Controller...

Page 513: ...3 DCS 043 134 DCS 047 135 DCS 051 136 DCS 053 137 DCS 054 138 DCS 065 139 DCS 071 140 DCS 072 141 DCS 073 142 DCS 074 143 DCS 114 144 DCS 115 145 DCS 116 146 DCS 122 147 DCS 125 148 DCS 131 149 DCS 132 150 DCS 134 151 DCS 143 152 DCS 145 153 DCS 152 154 DCS 155 155 DCS 156 156 DCS 162 157 DCS 165 158 DCS 172 159 DCS 174 160 DCS 205 161 DCS 212 162 DCS 223 163 DCS 225 164 DCS 226 165 DCS 243 166 DC...

Page 514: ...265 FONT DATA Character pattern of 8 x 16 dot This character pattern is Large Font In this document characters of these areas are described as normal characters ...

Page 515: ...266 ...

Page 516: ...267 ...

Page 517: ...268 ...

Page 518: ...269 ...

Page 519: ...270 ...

Page 520: ...271 Character pattern of 8 x 8 dot This character pattern is Small Font ...

Page 521: ...272 ...

Page 522: ...273 ...

Page 523: ...ted item appears in reversed out text To select the highlighted item or confirm an option setting tap E YES or press down on the SELECT VOLUME SQUELCH knob To cancel an option setting press NO To go back one level in the menu tap MENU To exit the menu press LOCKOUT The scanner goes back to the operating mode it was in before you entered the menu This page applies to the following scanner s BCD396X...

Page 524: ...ng the FUNCTION button Key functions in different operation modes Locking the Keypad Key Overview The diagram below shows the keys and what they are called throughout the guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D mp CDImage_090515 Manual KeysAndTheirFunctions html 1 of 4 5 26 2009 11 13 48 AM ...

Page 525: ...as quickly as possible within 1 second Press hold press the button and keep it pressed for at least 2 seconds before releasing it FUNCTION tap press and release FUNCTION then tap the button FUNCTION Double tap press and release FUNCTION then double tap the button FUNCTION Press hold press and release FUNCTION then press and file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D mp CDImage_090515 Manual K...

Page 526: ...ch mode key functions Hold mode key functions Close Call mode key functions Priority Scan mode information GPS mode key functions Tone Out mode key functions Band Scope mode key functions Available functions in Key Safe mode Locking the Keypad You can lock the keypad to prevent accidental interruptions of the scanner s current operation To lock the keypad press FUNCTION tap BACKLIGHT The scanner d...

Page 527: ...s UnidenMan4 TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D mp CDImage_090515 Manual KeysAndTheirFunctions html 4 of 4 5 26 2009 11 13 48 AM ...

Page 528: ...ide the box you should find OR BCD396XT or BC346XT handheld trunking scanner SMA antenna NiMH rechargeable batteries 3 AC adapter SMA to BNC adapter for external antennas Data transfer cable Belt clip Wrist strap The CD contains a static version of the manual that you can use offline The cover for the battery compartment might be packed separately also file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 2...

Page 529: ...nt 4 Replace the battery compartment cover Connect the antenna To connect the antenna just screw it onto the SMA connector at the top of the scanner If you want to use an external antenna attach the included SMA BNC adapter to the scanner s SMA connector Then connect your external antenna to the BNC connector Note Always use 50 or 75 ohm RG 58 or RG 8 coaxial cable and the supplied SMA BNC adapter...

Page 530: ...tom side up Then slide the scanner straight up until it comes free from the belt clip Rotate the scanner 180 degrees Slide the scanner up and off the belt clip This page applies to the following scanner s BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D emp CDImage_090515 Manual SettingUpTheHardware html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11 13 50 AM ...

Page 531: ...ner to any GPS receiver that meets the following criteria Outputs NMEA 0183 v3 01 compliant location data Outputs both the Global Positioning System Fix GGA and Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS RMC data sentences Provides a serial data RS 232 connection Configuring your scanner 1 Go to the Settings menu and select Set Serial Port 2 Select 4800 bps for the baud rate Connecting the receiver file C ...

Page 532: ...shows the GPS icon on the display 7 If the GPS receiver does not have a lock on the satellites the scanner displays Searching for Satellite Troubleshooting If you can t get the scanner to recognize the GPS receiver Check the cables Make sure you have exactly one null modem either a cable or an adapter somewhere in the connection a straight through connection will not work Check the receiver s baud...

Page 533: ...site or channel group go to the Set LocationInfo menu 2 Check the range latitude and longitude settings to make sure they are correct 3 Make sure the Set GPS Enable option is set to Yes This page applies to the following scanner s BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D p CDImage_090515 Manual ConnectingAGPSReceiver html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11 13 52 AM ...

Page 534: ...the scanner checks these channels simultaneously Configuring Tone Out channels To configure Tone Out channels 1 Go to the Tone Out for menu 2 Select Tone Out Setup 3 Select the Tone Out channel Tone Out 1 through Tone Out 10 you want to configure 4 Select Set Frequencies and choose the frequencies for this channel 5 Select Set Tone and program Tone A and Tone B 6 Set any of the other properties as...

Page 535: ... any other Tone Out Channels that have the same frequency If you want to search a different channel just turn the SELECT VOLUME SCROLL knob until you find the channel you want To exit Tone Out mode tap SCAN Key operation in Tone Out Mode Turn the SELECT VOLUME SCROLL knob to change the channel FUNCTION tap MENU to go to the Tone Out for menu Key Name 2nd operation Action On HOLD Close Call 1 Searc...

Page 536: ...me offset 6 Display mode Tap Enter Scan mode Enter the number on the key FUNCTION Tap Display the Quick Search screen enter Search mode Switch to the intermediate frequency IF NA NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Lockout 7 Attenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modulation Tap NA Enter the number on the key FUNCTION Tap NA Toggle the attenuator state for this channel NA Change the modulation file C Documen...

Page 537: ...and exit that screen Enter the number on the key Edit the current Tone Out channel Press hold Turn the scanner on or off NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Lock or unlock the keypad NA Change the WX Alert Priority settings Enter GPS mode FUNCTION Press hold NA NA Enter Weather mode NA This page applies to the following scanner s BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documen...

Page 538: ...not perform a Close Call check if it is already receiving an audio transmission This prevents the audio from cutting out every 2 seconds In Close Call Only mode the scanner only performs Close Call checks The Close Call menu lets you change the operation settings of the Close Call feature You can change the overall Close Call options through the Srch CloCall Opt menu Key operation in Close Call On...

Page 539: ... with this key Tap again to enable FUNCTION Tap Display the Quick Search screen enter Search mode Switch to the intermediate frequency IF NA NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Lockout 7 Attenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modulation Tap Temporarily lock out the current Close Call frequency until you turn the scanner off Disable the Close Call band associated with this key Tap again to enable NA NA Doubl...

Page 540: ...elease the key NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Backlight Power Lock No Decimal Priority 0 Weather Yes Enter GPS Tap Turn on the LCD backlight During a system message Cancel the message and exit that screen NA When monitoring a Close Call frequency store the current frequency Press hold Turn the scanner on or off NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Lock or unlock the keypad NA Change the WX Alert Priority se...

Page 541: ...idenMan4 TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ments temp CDImage_090515 Manual CloseCallMode html 4 of 4 5 26 2009 11 13 56 AM ...

Page 542: ... Hold Search mode the scanner displays the strongest signal that it found If you manually set the mode to NFM or FM the scanner will not reliably detect signals that are modulated in either FMB or WFM To turn on Band Scope mode Band Scope mode is the default setting for Search Key 3 To turn on Band Scope mode enter Search mode then tap FUNCTION 3 SR3 To change the Search Key assignment see Search ...

Page 543: ...BandScopeMode UnidenMan4 TWiki Key operation in Band Scope mode file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ments temp CDImage_090515 Manual BandScopeMode html 2 of 4 5 26 2009 11 13 58 AM ...

Page 544: ...l Only mode NA NA NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Scan Search 4 IF exchange 5 Volume offset 6 Display mode Tap Enter Scan mode NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Change the band scope search type Switch the Intermediate Frequency used on this Frequency NA NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Lockout 7 Attenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modulation file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ments temp CDImage_...

Page 545: ... on Backlight Power Lock No Decimal Priority 0 Weather Yes Enter GPS Tap Turn on the LCD backlight Press this key to select the next setting item NA NA Press hold Turn the scanner on or off NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Lock or unlock the keypad NA Change the Weather Alert Priority settings Enter GPS mode FUNCTION Press hold NA NA Enter Weather mode NA This page applies to the following scanner s BCD396XT...

Page 546: ...n explanation of two different approaches to location based scanning some information on finding antenna locations Programming locations contains details on how to program locations for systems sites and channels details on how to program Points of Interest POI Dangerous Roads and Dangerous Intersections Dangerous Xing information on reviewing and editing locations Connecting a GPS receiver contai...

Page 547: ...GPSMode UnidenMan4 TWiki Location alert display file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual GPSMode html 2 of 5 5 26 2009 11 14 01 AM ...

Page 548: ...GPSMode UnidenMan4 TWiki Location review display file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual GPSMode html 3 of 5 5 26 2009 11 14 01 AM ...

Page 549: ...en reviewing locations Enter Scan mode NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Return to previous operation When reviewing locations Enter Scan mode NA NA Cycle through the available displays Key Name 2nd operation Action on Lockout 7 Attenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modulation Tap Temporarily lockout the current Location Alert When reviewing locations Toggle the Lockout status of the current location NA NA NA Double T...

Page 550: ...at screen When reviewing locations Close the location review list NA Open the location review location list When reviewing locations Edit the selected location Press hold Turn the scanner on or off NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Lock or unlock the keypad NA NA NA FUNCTION Press hold Turn the scanner on or off NA NA When reviewing locations Replace the select location s coordinates with the coordinates of y...

Page 551: ...allocation capacity Heterodyne System CTCSS and DCS Tones General Attenuation 20dB nominal Audio Output Power 320mW nominal into 24Ω speaker 20mW nominal into 32Ω stereo headphone Scan Rate 100 channels per second max Conventional mode Search Rate 300 steps per second max 5kHz steps only External Jacks Antenna Jack SMA Type Phone Jack 3 5mm 1 8 in Stereo Type DC Power Jack EIAJ TYPE II Center Posi...

Page 552: ...e Call 10 C to 60 C 14 F to 140 F Size 2 40 in W x 1 22 in D x 5 35 in H Without Antenna Weight 0 37 lbs Without Battery and Antenna Remote Functions Direct PC control Database management Wired cloning Display 64 x 128 Full Dot Matrix LCD with orange back light Sensitivity nominal 12dB SINAD 0 4 V 25 27 995 MHz AM 0 3 V 28 53 98 MHz NFM 0 5 V 54 71 95 MHz WFM 0 2 V 72 75 995 MHz FM file C Document...

Page 553: ...4 V 806 960 MHz NFM 0 5 V 1240 1300 MHz NFM Signal Noise Ratio nominal 49dB 25 27 995 MHz AM 43dB 28 53 98 MHz NFM 55dB 54 71 95 MHz WFM 48dB 72 75 995 MHz FM 60dB 76 107 9 MHz FMB 50dB 108 136 9916 MHz AM 42dB 137 173 9875 MHz NFM 55dB 174 215 95 MHz WFM file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ments temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346XTSpecs html 3 of 8 5 26 2009 11 14 03 AM ...

Page 554: ...V Air Band 60 V VHF High1 Band 100 V UHF Band 220 V 800MHz Band Frequency Range Frequency Range MHz Modulation Step kHz Name 25 0000 26 9600 AM 5 Petroleum Products Broadcast Pickup 26 9650 27 4050 AM 5 CB Class D Channel 27 4100 27 9950 AM 5 Business Forest Products file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ments temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346XTSpecs html 4 of 8 5 26 2009 11 14 03 AM ...

Page 555: ...M 12 5 Military Land Mobile 144 0000 147 9950 NFM 5 2 Meter Amateur Band 148 0000 150 7875 NFM 12 5 Military Land Mobile 150 8000 161 9950 NFM 5 VHF High Band 162 0000 173 9875 NFM 12 5 Federal Government 174 0000 215 9500 WFM 50 VHF TV 216 0000 224 9800 NFM 20 1 25 Meter Amateur Band 400 0000 405 9875 NFM 12 5 Miscellaneous 406 0000 419 9875 NFM 12 5 Federal Government Land Mobile 420 0000 449 98...

Page 556: ...and Scope Function Frequency Span 0 2 MHz To 500 MHz Frequency Step 5 kHz To 100 kHz Two Tone Sequential 250 3500 Hz 0 1 Hz Step Programmable WX Alert 1050 Hz Tone System NWR SAME System Warning Watch Advisory Supported trunking systems Motorola Systems Type I II II I hybrid EDACS Systems FM NFM and SCAT LTR Systems Dynamic memory allocation capacity Systems 500 max Groups 20 per system file C Doc...

Page 557: ...0 0 103 5 107 2 110 9 114 8 118 8 123 0 127 3 131 8 136 5 141 3 146 2 151 4 156 7 159 8 162 2 165 5 167 9 171 3 173 8 177 3 179 9 183 5 186 2 189 9 192 8 196 6 199 5 203 5 206 5 210 7 218 1 225 7 229 1 233 6 241 8 250 3 254 1 DCS Tone Codes 104 codes total 023 025 026 031 032 036 043 047 051 053 054 065 071 072 073 074 114 115 116 122 125 131 132 134 143 145 152 155 156 162 165 172 174 205 212 223...

Page 558: ...423 431 432 445 446 452 454 455 462 464 465 466 503 506 516 523 526 532 546 565 606 612 624 627 631 632 654 662 664 703 712 723 731 732 734 743 754 This page applies to the following scanner s BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ments temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346XTSpecs html 8 of 8 5 26 2009 11 14 03 AM ...

Page 559: ...ting has been modified and extensive editing has been performed to make the text more readable However you will almost certainly find a handful of odd turns of phrases Mostly though we hope that this reference work can help you better understand and use your BC346XT This document isn t intended to be a guide for how to use your scanner you ll find that information in the Owner s Manual but rather ...

Page 560: ...on 10 Channel Alert 10 Alpha Tagging 10 Duplicate Input Alert 10 Number Tag 10 Trunk Tracking 10 Multi Site System 11 Control Channel Only 11 Priority ID Scanning 11 Preemptive Priority ID Scanning 11 Trunking Activity Indicators 11 Custom Search 11 Quick Search 11 Frequency Autostore 11 Search Speed Turbo Search 11 Search Lockout 11 Search Key 12 Service Search 12 Broadcast Screen 12 Attenuator 1...

Page 561: ...light 13 Alert Tone Level 13 Battery Low Alert 14 Battery Save 14 Key Lock 14 Key Safe Mode 14 Repeater Reverse 14 Memory Backup 14 Design 15 Controls and Keys 16 Displays 21 LCD Design 21 Icons 21 Dot Matrix 22 LCD Flashing Time 22 Tones 23 General Tones 23 Weather Alert Sirens 23 Tones in Menu Mode 24 Selecting a menu item 24 Editing a name or a frequency etc 24 Alert in Scanner Mode 24 Alert in...

Page 562: ...Program Location 63 Srch CloCall Opt 68 Search for 73 Close Call 82 Priority Scan 86 WX Operation 87 Tone Out for 90 Wired Clone 94 Settings 95 SCAN MODE 101 Display during Scan Mode 101 Startup Key Operation 101 Start Scanning 101 Scanning Order 103 Scanning Operation 104 Temporary System Hold 115 System Hold 116 Quick System Select 116 Quick Save for CTCSS DCS Data 117 Key Operation During Scan ...

Page 563: ...on 134 Service Search 135 Custom Search 136 Custom Search in Control Channel Only Mode 137 Search and Store 138 Quick Search 138 Key Operation During Search Mode 140 SEARCH HOLD MODE 142 General Operation 142 Go to Quick Search Hold Directly 142 Direct Entry 142 Quick Save 143 Key Operation During Search Hold Mode 144 CLOSE CALL MODE 146 Display during Close Call Mode 146 Close Call Search 146 Clo...

Page 564: ...d Mode 165 Key Operation During Tone Out Mode 166 GPS MODE 168 Display Mode in GPS Mode 168 Location Alert Operation 170 Registration of Location Information 173 Review Location Mode 174 Key Operation During GPS Mode 176 0BAND SCOPE MODE 178 Scope Mode 178 Search Mode 179 Max Hold Search Mode 179 Hold Mode 179 General Operation 180 Search Setting Parameters 181 Key Operation during Band Scope Mode...

Page 565: ...93 AVAILABLE SYSTEM SETTINGS 193 System Settings 193 System Option Settings 193 Site Settings 194 Site Frequency Settings 194 Channel Settings 195 TGID FORMAT FOR TRUNKED SYSTEM 196 FLEET MAP 202 PRESET FLEET MAPS 203 WEATHER CHANNELS 204 CTCSS FREQUENCY 204 DCS CODE 204 CEA2009 SAME EVENT CODE ANSI CEA 2009 A October 2005 205 REMOTE COMMAND 207 CTCSS DCS CODE LIST 254 ...

Page 566: ...Military Land Mobile 150 8000 161 9950 NFM 5 0 VHF High Band 162 0000 173 9875 NFM 12 5 Federal Government 174 0000 215 9500 WFM 50 0 TV Broadcast 7 13 216 0000 224 9800 NFM 20 0 1 25 Meter Amateur Band 400 0000 405 9875 NFM 12 5 Miscellaneous 406 0000 419 9875 NFM 12 5 Federal Government Land Mobile 420 0000 449 9875 NFM 12 5 70 cm Amateur Band 450 0000 469 9875 NFM 12 5 UHF Standard Band 470 000...

Page 567: ... Notes about limits The actual results will be limited by the first absolute limit you hit For example if you have created 1000 sites you will not be able to create a new system even though you have created fewer than 500 systems You can check the of memory used by using the menu Channel Memory Scan The scanner can scan any combination of trunked and conventional systems simultaneously Priority Sc...

Page 568: ...uration key to a system or search range so that it can be automatically locked out or unlocked during power up Channel Alert You can set a separate audible visual alert for each channel Alpha Tagging You can assign an alphanumeric name to each System Site Channel Group Channel Location Custom search range SAME group and Tone Out You can use 16 characters per tag Duplicate Input Alert The scanner w...

Page 569: ...ive Trunking Activity Indicators The scanner shows all trunked activity when you hold on the control channel Custom Search You can program up to 10 custom search ranges and either search them exclusively or include these searches when scanning Quick Search If you hold on a conventional channel you can start searching from the current frequency If you hold on a trunked channel you can quickly switc...

Page 570: ...h for the CTCSS DCS used during a transmission Volume Offset Adjust the volume level for any channel from 3 to 3 steps to balance audio level IF Exchange Switches the current frequency to use a different IF intermediate frequency for receiving radio signals to avoid interference Dropout Delay Controls whether the scanner pauses at the end of a transmission to wait for a reply You can set the Delay...

Page 571: ...data that conforms to NMEA 0183 v3 01 The scanner uses the GGA and RMC sentences as defined by that specification Note that this standard specifies an RS232 serial connection GPS units that have USB connectivity are not compatible with this scanner Wired Cloning You can clone all programmed data including Memory Architecture Menu settings and other parameters from one BC346XT to another BC346XT co...

Page 572: ...ure turns off RF power for 1 second and turns on it 300 ms to extend the battery life Scan Hold Mode at a Channel of conventional System without Priority Scan Any Search Hold Mode Key Lock This feature disables the keypad and scroll to prevent any accidental input Key Safe Mode This mode helps keep novice users from accidentally changing parameters or modes Some keys don t work in this mode Repeat...

Page 573: ...Thursday May 14 2009 15 Design The below is a design reference There might be some differences between this image and the actual final design ...

Page 574: ...FUNC again in each Function Mode returns to Normal Mode and the F icon disappears Scroll Control Selects a channel or frequency in Hold Mode Selects Menu items in Menu Mode Selects a character while editing the Name Sets the level in Volume Squelch Level Control mode Scroll Control Push Pressing this works the same operation as pressing E yes gps in Menu Mode Press this to set the volume level in ...

Page 575: ... Function Hold Key Toggles the setting of Close Call Long press to start Close Call Only Mode L O Lockout Key Press once to temporarily lock out a system channel a search frequency or a location data This lock out is canceled when the power is turned off then back on Press twice within one second to permanently lock out a system channel a search frequency or a location data This lockout remains ev...

Page 576: ...pri the scanner returns to the previous mode without unlocking Light Power Key Lock Press to illuminate the LCD back light according to Menu setting or to turn the backlight off if it is on Press and hold to turn the scanner on or off Function Key Press to lock or unlock the keypad 1 9 0 Key Press to enable or disable the System Site Search Quick Key for system or search range Scan Mode Press to t...

Page 577: ...t WX Scan except WX Scan Mode Decimal no pri Priority Key Press to cancel these displays while displaying Error or Warning message Press to input decimal for frequency Press to input or i for TGID Press to input a space in editing a data name Press twice to clear the data in editing data name Press to input or i for Direct Enter in Hold Mode Close Call Only Mode Tone Out Mode Press in Scan Mode to...

Page 578: ...enu Mode Press to go back up one menu level when in the Menu Mode Press after entering the value to indicate going to a number tagged system or channel Function Menu Key Press to go to the editing menu for the current system search range or location data ...

Page 579: ...ick Key for Systems Channel Group are displayed The number for the currently scanned SQK set flashes In SCAN HOLD mode the Quick Key number for the current System Channel Group appears Enabled User Range numbers appear in Custom Search the current range s number blinks HOLD This icon appears in Scan Hold Search Hold and Close Call Hold Mode L O This icon appears at a locked out Channel or frequenc...

Page 580: ...low This icon blinks when a bad battery is installed and an AC adapter is connected This icon appears during battery check Close Call Pri This icon appears in Close Call Priority Mode This blinks in Close Call Only Mode or when the scanner gets a Close Call hit Close Call DND This icon appears in Close Call DND Mode is CC DND Mode This is a reverse display of Close Call Pri icon Dot Matrix The dis...

Page 581: ...s gps key etc to accept the entry or setting the scanner will sound high middle beep 75 ms high beep 25 ms silent 75 ms middle beep Error Tone When you press a key that does not have a valid function in the current mode the scanner will sound a triple low beep 75 ms beep 25 ms silent repeat 2 times Weather Alert Sirens The scanner sounds the following tones until any key is pressed or for 8 second...

Page 582: ...Scroll Control knob When you move the cursor from the left to the right the scanner will sound a single middle beep 100 ms Or when you move the cursor from the right to the left the scanner will sound a double middle beep 75 ms beep 25 ms silent 75 ms beep If you store data by pressing E yes gps the scanner sounds the Exec Tone Alert in Scanner Mode You can select channel or frequency alert from A...

Page 583: ...mode is also backed up Notes on the Last Mode LAST MODE means the mode when the scanner is turned off It resumes Scan Mode Custom Service Quick Search Mode Weather Mode Close Call Only Tone Out Mode each Hold Mode GPS Mode and Band Scope Mode for LAST MODE In ID Search Hold Mode if ID has already been registered LAST MODE will be ID Search Hold Mode If ID has not been registered yet LAST MODE will...

Page 584: ...oll Control When the volume level indicator appears rotate Scroll Control to change the volume level You can set the volume level from 0 to 15 Press Scroll Control again or wait for 10 seconds to quit from the volume level control mode Squelch Adjust Mode To adjust the squelch level press Function Scroll Control When the squelch level indicator appears rotate Scroll Control to change the squelch l...

Page 585: ...to previous mode Notes Tapping the Scroll Control can be used instead of E yes gps in Menu Mode or at various prompts Next item is a lower item in this document Therefore the next item of the lowest Item is highest item Menu items are described as the bold letter in this specification Display Format in Menu Mode The Menu Item screen is four line mode The first line displays the Menu Item Name and ...

Page 586: ... name custom search range name or other system name A group name is the same as another group name in the same system A channel name is the same as another channel name in the same group A custom search range name is the same as a system name service search range name or other custom search range name A SAME name is the same as another SAME name A Tone Out name is the same as another Tone Out name...

Page 587: ... out of the range in Band Coverage the scanner displays Out of Band Press Any Key and sounds an Error Tone Press any key to return to editing mode Out of Band Press Any Key For Channel Frequencies in conventional System if the entered frequency is already stored into the same Group it displays Frequency Exists Accept Y N and sounds a Confirmation Tone Press E yes gps to ignore message and proceed ...

Page 588: ... longitude input The acceptable range of latitude and longitude is as follows Latitude 90º00 00 00 S 00º00 00 00 N 90º00 00 00 N Longitude 180º00 00 00 E 000º00 00 00 W 180º00 00 00 W The actual navigation distance may differ from the calculated one when a latitude exceeding 85 degrees either North or South is used Error Messages If the scanner tries to create a new System Location Site Group Chan...

Page 589: ...nu Items These systems are sorted by the order in which they were created New System is displayed as the last menu item Note When no systems have been programmed only New System appears The limit of Systems is 500 So if you try to select New System when there are already 500 Systems the scanner displays Over Limit and sounds an Error Tone Then it returns to Top Menu Over Limi t Press Any Key Selec...

Page 590: ... WIDE NARROW Select for an EDACS WIDE NARROW system SCAT Select for an EDACS SCAT system Once you select the system type the scanner prompts Confirm and Yes E No Confi rm Yes E No Press E yes gps to confirm and the system will be created Press no pri to reject and return to the Menu of Select System When the System is created the scanner assigns a default System name of System xxx T to the new Sys...

Page 591: ...nces The first line displays the System name For example the following figure shows it is in settings of the System named System 1 C System 1 C Edit Name Edit Sys Opti on Edit Group Turn the Scroll Control and press E yes gps or tap the Scroll Control to go to each setting Edit Name You can name the system Refer to FONT DATA for the characters that can be entered Press E yes gps to accept the name...

Page 592: ...r is Scan Mode Turn the Scroll Control to select the Quick Key for the System The Quick Key can be set from 0 to 99 and Not assigned Press a number key to jump the cursor to the head number of ten s place For example if you press 2 sr2 the cursor jumps to 20 Press E yes gps to accept and return to the previous menu Note The highest number of priority is Quick Key 1 and lowest number is Quick Key 9...

Page 593: ...anner is forced to hold and scan System Channels before moving to the next System even if there is no traffic on the Channels You can set it from 0 to 255 seconds by pressing a number key Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu If you enter over 255 for the Hold Time the scanner prompts Out of Range and Set Max Y N When E yes gps is pushed maximum value 255 will be set ...

Page 594: ...rola 800 Type I Hybrid Systems require a Fleet Map that sets specific Fleet SubFleet parameters There are 16 preset Fleet Maps listed in PRESET FLEET MAP that you can choose and these are usually a good place to start when setting up a Type I Hybrid System If you choose a preset map and still have difficulty following complete conversation then you will have to program a Custom Fleet Map Note A Hy...

Page 595: ...revious menu However Size Codes once selected by pressing E yes gps are not canceled Motorola 800 Type I and Type II Select Custom and set all blocks to Size Code 0 The scanner treats this System as Motorola Type II In other cases it treats the System as Motorola Type I Note If you change the Fleet Map setting the ID display format will also change Priority ID Scan This setting controls how the sc...

Page 596: ... the emergency flag set When you select Off the scanner returns to the previous menu When you select Alert1 9 the scanner goes to the Alert Level selection Auto The alert is set to the same volume as normal audio Level1 15 The alert is fixed to the selected audio level Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set Alert Light If Set Alert Light is selected you can select ...

Page 597: ...in ID Search or ID Scan This option displays temporarily L O IDs and permanently L O IDs without distinction The first Line displays Unlock Y N and other lines display TGIDs that are locked out Turn the Scroll Control to choose TGIDs Unlock Y N ID 12340 ID 11111 ID 34567 Press E yes gps to unlock the TGID Press no pri to advance to the next locked TGID Press Menu to return the previous menu If no ...

Page 598: ... press any key to return to previous menu Nothi ng Locked Press Any Key Edit Site See Program Site Edit Group See Program Group Copy System You can copy the System and all associated settings by select this menu item The scanner prompts you for a new System Name Press E yes gps to copy the System with the entered System name The scanner goes to the System Settings menu with the new System active N...

Page 599: ...lect this menu item The scanner prompts Confirm Delete to confirm deletion Press E yes gps to delete the current system Press no pri to cancel deletion and return to the previous menu Note If you confirm to delete the system all site all Groups and all Channel data belonging to the System are also deleted ...

Page 600: ...en there are already 256 Sites the scanner displays Over Limit and sounds an Error Tone Creating a New Site Press E yes gps to create a new site After a new site is created the scanner assigns a default site name of Site xxx yyy TTT xxx System index number yyy 1 3 digit sequential site index number TTT abbreviation for the site type as follows MOT Type MOT EDACS WIDE NARROW EDC LTR Type LTR Site S...

Page 601: ...to setting of this option by pressing and holding a number key at power on or while displaying the Opening Screen Turn Scroll Control to select the Startup Key in this menu The Startup Key can be set from 0 to 9 and Not assigned Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Edit Band Plan This menu is shown when the selected system is a MOT type system You can select one ...

Page 602: ...elect Polarity or Polarity then press E yes gps to confirm the setting When you select Set Spacing the following spacing values can be selected 5 00 kHz 6 25 kHz 10 00 kHz 12 50 kHz 15 00 kHz 18 75 kHz 20 00 kHz 25 00 kHz 30 00 kHz 31 25 kHz 35 00 kHz 37 50 kHz 40 00 kHz 43 75 kHz 45 00 kHz 50 00 kHz 55 00 kHz 56 25 kHz 60 00 kHz 62 50 kHz 65 00 kHz 68 75 kHz 70 00 kHz 75 00 kHz 80 00 kHz 81 25 kH...

Page 603: ...quency menu automatically to enter the frequency If you select a stored frequency and press E yes gps the scanner prompts for the next setting items Edit Frequency Set Number Tag Set Lockout Volume Offset SCAT systems only Delete Frequency New Frequency Turn Scroll Control and press E yes gps to go to each setting This setting is displayed only when the system type is EDCS SCAT Edit Frequency You ...

Page 604: ...ored the scanner sounds an Error Tone and displays LCN Exists LCN Exists Press Any Key Set Number Tag The channel Number Tag can be set in this menu Press a number key to input the number tag Press no pri to clear the input Press E yes gps to accept the setting and return to the previous menu Note The valid setting range is from 0 to 999 Blank means a number tag not assigned This option is only sh...

Page 605: ...ion and return to the previous menu New Frequency Press E yes gps to create a new frequency and go to Set Frequencies Set Modulation You can select the modulation from following settings Auto The scanner uses the modulation normal for the frequency s band NFM The scanner uses Narrowband FM demodulation FM The scanner uses FM demodulation Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previo...

Page 606: ...no Control Channel can be received the scanner goes to the next system immediately You change this setting from 0 to 255 seconds by pressing the number keys Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu If you enter over 255 for the Hold Time the scanner prompts Out of Range and Set Max Y N When E yes gps is pushed maximum value 255 will be set It returns to the edit state if...

Page 607: ...ormat the display is the following If DEG DDD dddddd is selected in Set Pos Format the display is the following Set Longitude Press the number keys to enter longitude data Press any number key when the cursor is in the last position to toggle between east longitude E and west longitude W Press E yes gps to accept and return to the previous menu If DMS DDD MM SS ss is selected in Set Pos Format the...

Page 608: ...r will control L O status of this site by position information received from a GPS On The L O state of this site is automatically controlled by position information Off The L O state of this site is not influenced by GPS Press E yes gps to accept and return to the previous menu Delete Site You can delete the current site and all associated settings by select this menu item The scanner prompts Conf...

Page 609: ...m is 20 So if you try to select New Group when there are already 20 Groups in that System the scanner displays Over Limit and sounds an Error Tone Then it returns to Group selection Select the Group Name or New Group and press E yes gps to go to the Group Settings Menu If the New Group is selected the scanner appends a Group to the System with a default Group name of Group xx xx 1 2 digits sequent...

Page 610: ...t LocationInfo You can set location data for the current channel group so it is automatically locked and unlocked as you change location when using an external GPS You set the following items Set Latitude Set Longitude Set Range Set GPS Enable Turn Scroll Control to select an item to set and press E yes gps to go to the settings Set Latitude Enter the latitude data using the number keys Press any ...

Page 611: ... DDD MM SS ss is selected in Set Pos Format the display is the following Set Longi tude 000 00 00 00 W If DEG DDD dddddd is selected in Set Pos Format the display is the following Set Longi tude 000 0000 W Set Range In this menu the setting unit depends on the setting in Set Unit When you select mile in Set Unit the displayed unit is mile When you select km in Set Unit the displayed unit is km The...

Page 612: ...current channel group When the channel group is locked out the scanner does not check it Unlocked The channel group is unlocked Temporary L O The channel group is temporarily locked out Lockout The channel group is locked out Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Delete Group You can delete the current channel group and all associated settings by select this menu ...

Page 613: ... New Channel and enter a TGID when there are already 500 Channels in the system the scanner displays Over Limit and sounds an Error Tone Then it returns to Channel selection The limit of Channels and System frequencies is 9000 If you select New Channel and enter the frequency or TGID when there are already 9000 Channels and System frequencies the scanner displays Over Limit and sounds an Error Ton...

Page 614: ...torola Type ID Hex Format ID Turn Scroll Control to select Hex character from 0 to F Press 4 LEFT ifx or 6 RIGHT disp to move cursor left or right Press E yes gps to set the Hex ID Note When the custom Fleet Map setting set to Size Code 0 for all Blocks the scanner treats the System as a Motorola Type I or Hybrid system In these cases Hexadecimal input will be treated as same as Decimal ID see FLE...

Page 615: ...OT System EDCS Wide and Narrow System First press the decimal key to enter i for I Call Then press the number keys to enter the ID Note For details of TGID format please see TGID FORMAT FOR TRUNKED SYSTEM Press E yes gps to set the TGID The Channel Name is set to the TGID as default name as ID xxxx Then the scanner goes to the Channel Settings Menu Press Menu to return to the previous selection an...

Page 616: ...y Edit Name You can provide a name for the channel Refer to FONT DATA for the characters that can be entered Press E yes gps to accept the name entered The scanner returns to the previous menu Edit Frequency If you select to edit the frequency the scanner displays the current frequency in edit mode See Edit Frequency Edit TGID If you select to edit the TGID the scanner displays the current ID You ...

Page 617: ...EQUENCY and DCS CODE for selectable frequencies and codes Turn Scroll Control to select Press E yes gps to set and return to the previous menu If you select Set Lockout You can select a CTCSS or DCS for lockout Turn Scroll Control to select and press E yes gps key to lock it out Then the scanner returns to the previous menu Set Number Tag The Channel Number Tag can be set in this menu Press a numb...

Page 618: ...riority channel the scanner is unable to scan over the number of priority channels that was set at menu MaxCHs Pri Scan If unlocked priority channels are over this setting only that portion of the priority channels will be scanned for priority Set Alert Channel alert options can be set using this menu Set Alert Tone Set Alert Light Press E yes gps to enter the setting Set Alert Tone You can select...

Page 619: ...Unlocked The channel is unlocked Temporary L O The channel is temporarily locked out Lockout The channel is locked out Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Volume Offset This option is used to set a volume offset for each channel The feature can let you adjust the volume level relative to other channels when the frequency is active Setting level are 3 2 1 0 1 2 3...

Page 620: ...ssociated settings by select this menu item The scanner prompts Confirm Delete to confirm deletion Press E yes gps to delete the current channel Press no pri to cancel deletion and return to the previous menu New Channel Press E yes gps to create a New Site and go to Channel Settings ...

Page 621: ... Location Mode POI Settings You can set the following items Edit Name Set Type Set Alert Set LocationInfo Set Range Set Lockout Delete Location New Location Turn Scroll Control and press E yes gps to go to each setting Dangerous Xing Road Settings You can set the following items Edit Name Set Type Set Alert Volume Set Alert Light Set LocationInfo Set Heading Set Speed Limit Set Lockout Delete Loca...

Page 622: ...ume as normal audio Level1 15 The alert is fixed to the selected audio level Set Alert Light You can select whether the scanner should have an Alert Light when you approach the set Location Alert Light Pattern selections Off The alert light will not turn on On The alert light is set to on Slow Blink The alert light blinks slowly Fast Blink The alert light blinks fast Press E yes gps to accept the ...

Page 623: ...ss E yes gps to go to the longitude setting Press the number keys to enter longitude settings Press any number key when the cursor is in the last position to toggle between east longitude E and west longitude W Press no pri to jump to the next input area For example press no pri on Degree Number for DMS to jump to the Minute Number Press this again to jump to the second number Press no pri or a nu...

Page 624: ...will be mph When you select km in Set Unit the displayed unit will be km h The valid setting range is from 0 to 200 in steps of 1 Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Note This setting menu appears in Dangerous Xing and Dangerous Road Set Lockout This option allows you to lock or unlock the current location When the location is locked out the scanner does not check i...

Page 625: ...this in the POI setting menu and press E yes gps the scanner creates a New POI and goes to POI Settings Or if you select this item in Dangerous Xing or Dangerous Road the scanner creates a New Dangerous location and goes to Dangerous Xing Road Settings ...

Page 626: ...ts O O O O O O Broadcast Screen O O O 2 O O CTCSS DCS Search O O O O O O Repeater Find O O O Max Auto Store O O Set Delay Time O O O Set Attenuator O O O O 1 While searching a search range in Search with Scan these settings are valid 2 In Search and Store this setting is valid only when the scanner stores a Custom Search frequency Freq Lockouts You can select from these items Unlock All Rvw Search...

Page 627: ...ri to advance to the next locked out frequency Press Menu to return the previous menu Note If no frequencies have been locked the scanner displays Nothing Locked If you unlock the last frequency the scanner displays Nothing Locked Broadcast Screen This option sets whether the scanner screens broadcast frequencies You can select the following items Set All Band On Set All Band Off Set Each Band Pro...

Page 628: ...enu Program Band You can set up to 10 custom band screens Select a band and press E yes gps to go to the limit setting You need to set a lower and upper limit frequency First enter the lower limit frequency and store it by pressing E yes gps Next enter the upper limit frequency and press E yes gps to store the upper limit The scanner returns to the previous menu Note If the lower frequency is larg...

Page 629: ...quencies are not related to the locked out frequency list of Freq Lockouts Max Auto Store This setting controls how many hits the scanner will automatically store in either Search and Store or Close Call Auto Store When the scanner has saved the maximum number of hits set by this setting it stops storing When there are already more auto stored Channels than the number of Max Auto Store the scanner...

Page 630: ... time setting from the following list 10 sec 5 sec 2 sec 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 5 sec 10 sec 30 sec Then press E yes gps to accept and return to the previous menu Set Attenuator You can select to attenuate RF reception on all frequencies in the search range On The frequencies are attenuated Off The frequencies are not attenuated Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu ...

Page 631: ...dio Marine Railroad Air CB Radio FRS GMRS MURS Racing FM Broadcast Special Press E yes gps to exit from Menu Mode and start searching the selected band See Service Search Edit Service Select Service Search Range and press E yes gps to go to each Search Range Setting You can set the following items for each Service Search Range Set Delay Time Set Attenuator Search with Scan Press E yes gps to enter...

Page 632: ...ch with Scan You can set the following items Set Quick Key Set Startup Key Set Number Tag Set Lockout Set Hold Time Press E yes gps to enter each setting Set Quick Key You can select a Quick Key from 0 to 99 or Not assigned by turning Scroll Control Quick Key for search is used to rapidly enable or disable the range The searching order does not change by this setting Press E yes gps to accept and ...

Page 633: ...termines the maximum time the scanner is forced to hold and search this range before moving to the next even if there is no traffic on the frequencies You can change the hold time from 0 the scanner checks all frequencies of the range regardless of time to 255 seconds by using number keys If the setting is something other than 0 the scanner goes to the next system or search when the hold time elap...

Page 634: ...Only Search with Scan Press E yes gps to enter each item Note The first line displays the name of the selected Custom Search Edit Name You can name the custom range Refer to FONT DATA for the characters that can be entered Press E yes gps to accept the name entered The scanner returns to the previous menu Edit Srch Limit You need to set 2 limits for searching First enter the lower limit frequency ...

Page 635: ... scanner uses Narrowband FM demodulation FM The scanner uses FM demodulation WFM The scanner uses Wideband FM demodulation FMB The scanner uses FM Broadcast demodulation Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set Attenuator You can select to attenuate RF reception on all frequencies in the search range On The frequencies are attenuated Off The frequencies are not atten...

Page 636: ...er treats all signals as normal transmission Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set MOT BandPlan You can select one of the following options to assign a band plan that the scanner will use if it detects a Motorola control channel Note that if the actual received channel does not use the specified band plan the scanner will not follow voice traffic on the system The...

Page 637: ... Radio FRS GMRS MURS Racing FM Broadcast Special Once a search range is selected by pressing E yes gps any time a frequency in that search range goes active the scanner checks to see if that frequency has been previously stored in that System If so it resumes searching Otherwise it stores the frequency into the Group named Found Channels the scanner automatically creates this group if it does not ...

Page 638: ...elongs is turned off Nothing to Scan The Group that stores found Channels already has the number of Max Auto Store or more Channels stored Over Limit Note The following selections are invalid The scanner displays Error Message and Press Any Key Press any key to return to System selection Error Condition Error Message EDACS SCAT System is selected Invalid System A system that does not store a site ...

Page 639: ...ode Pressing Menu exits this mode and the scanner goes to the Menu Mode If you exit from Menu Mode the scanner goes to each Search Mode selected Search for storing operation Pressing FUNC Menu also exits from this mode and goes to each Menu Note In this mode you cannot hear any transmission Set Search Key The scanner has three search keys that let you quickly start a search range Search Key 1 Sear...

Page 640: ... the scanner automatically stores new CC hits up to the limit set by the Max Auto Store setting into the Group named Found Channels of System named Close Call automatically created if it does not exist See Close Call Auto Store Page 150 Note In this mode you cannot hear any Close Call transmission Hits with Scan These are the settings for the Close Call temporary stored system The setting items ar...

Page 641: ...ks all frequencies of the range regardless of time to 255 seconds by using the number keys If you choose a setting other than 0 the scanner goes to next system or search when the hold time elapses However it does not go to the next one while receiving a signal Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu If you enter over 255 for the Hold Time the scanner prompts Out of Rang...

Page 642: ...ncy Detail of this setting Close Call Search Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set CC Alert You can edit these settings Set Alert Tone Set Alert Light Set CC Pause Press E yes gps to enter each item Set Alert Tone This item can select the type and the level alert Off Beep doesn t sound Alert1 9 The scanner sounds Alert1 9 with CC found If you select Off the scanne...

Page 643: ...c 5 sec 10 sec 15 sec 30 sec 45 sec 60 sec Infinite Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set CC Bands This setting controls the band filtering used during Close Call operation You can turn on or off the following bands VHF Low 1 On Off 25 0000 53 9800 MHz VHF Low 2 On Off 54 0000 107 9000 MHz Air Band On Off 108 0000 136 9916 MHz VHF High On Off 137 0000 224 9800 MHz...

Page 644: ...sec Press no pri to return to the editing state If you enter over 10 sec for the interval time the scanner prompts Out of Range and Set Max Y N Press E yes gps to select the maximum value 10 sec Press no pri to return to the editing state MaxCHs Pri Scan You can set the Maximum priority channel numbers that are scanned during one priority scan interrupt using this menu If there are more scannable ...

Page 645: ...nly SAME 1 SAME 2 SAME 3 SAME 4 SAME 5 All FIPS If you select Alert Only the scanner immediately sounds a Weather Alert Siren for Weather Alert Tone when it detects the 1050 Hz Weather Alert Tone then opens squelch and remains on the Weather Channel If you select one of the SAME Groups the scanner attempts to decode the SAME data packets that precede the Weather Alert Tone Then the scanner sounds ...

Page 646: ... has 043221 043227 and selectable items are as follows No 1 043221 No 2 043227 No 3 No 8 Select the item and press E yes gps to enter the editing state In the editing state the editing cursor is displayed Press the number keys to enter the FIPS code The cursor moves to the right by entering number Turn Scroll Control to choose the cursor position from the left end to next to right end character or...

Page 647: ...ll be attenuated Off The frequency will not be attenuated Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu WX Alt Priority This setting determines how the scanner treats the Weather Channels in Scan Hold Mode Search Hold Mode and Close Call Mode On The scanner checks the Weather Channels every 5 seconds to check for the presence of a 1050 Hz Weather Alert Tone Off The scanne...

Page 648: ...hannels The Names of the Tone Out channels are displayed as Menu Items Default names as follows Tone Out 1 Tone Out 2 Tone Out 3 Tone Out 10 Select the Name and press E yes gps to go to Tone Out Settings Tone Out Settings You can edit these settings Edit Name Set Frequency Set Tone Set Delay Time Set Alert Press E yes gps to go to each setting Note The first line displays the name of selected Tone...

Page 649: ...frequency s band NFM The scanner uses Narrowband FM demodulation FM The scanner uses FM demodulation Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Set Attenuator You can attenuate RF reception on the frequency On The frequency will be attenuated Off The frequency will not be attenuated Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Set Tone You can se...

Page 650: ...t Alert Light Press E yes gps to enter the setting Set Alert Tone You can set whether the scanner should sound an Alert Tone when a tone out channel becomes active Off No alert sounds Alert 1 9 The scanner sounds Alert1 9 with the Channel becomes active If you select Off the scanner returns to the previous menu If you select Alert1 9 the scanner goes to Alert Level selection Auto The alert is set ...

Page 651: ...es active Alert Light Pattern selections Off The alert light will not turn on On The alert light is set to on Slow Blink The alert light blinks slowly Fast Blink The alert light blinks fast Press E yes gps to accept the entry and return to the previous menu Active means that the scanner detects Tones and Mute state is set to Off ...

Page 652: ...Connect two BC346XTs and select this menu to copy and override all data from one to another Master Slave The scanner you set to Master s data will be copied to the scanner you set to Slave Then go to Wired Clone Mode See WIRED CLONE MODE ...

Page 653: ...ation mode You can select from the following options 10 sec 30 sec Squelch Keypress Infinite Press E yes gps to accept the data and return to the previous menu Set Dimmer This option can be used to set the brightness level of the display You can select from the following options High Middle Low Press E yes gps to accept the data and return to the previous menu Adjust Key Beep Adjusts the beep tone...

Page 654: ... E yes gps to accept the data and return to the previous menu Adjust Contrast This function sets the contrast of the display from Contrast 1 to Contrast 15 Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Set C CH Output The scanner can output the data stream on control channel by using this function Off data stream is not outputted On data stream is outputted Extend data st...

Page 655: ...option sets the time format 12H The scanner uses 12 hour format 24H The scanner uses 24 hour format Press E yes gps to accept the data and return to the previous menu Set Time Zone This option sets the time zone and daylight savings time You can set an offset value from GMT from 14 0 H to 14 0 H in 0 5H increments Press E yes gps to accept the selection and return to the previous menu Set Unit Thi...

Page 656: ... 4 AM 5 0 28 0 NFM 20 0 29 7 NFM 10 0 50 0 NFM 20 0 54 0 WFM 50 0 72 0 FM 5 0 76 0 WFM 50 0 88 0 FMB 100 0 108 0 AM 8 3 137 0 NFM 12 5 144 0 NFM 5 0 148 0 NFM 12 5 150 8 NFM 5 0 162 0 NFM 12 5 174 0 WFM 50 0 216 0 NFM 20 0 400 0 NFM 12 5 406 0 NFM 12 5 420 0 NFM 12 5 450 0 NFM 12 5 470 0 NFM 12 5 806 0 NFM 12 5 849 0 NFM 12 5 894 0 NFM 12 5 1240 0 NFM 25 0 Turn Scroll Control to focus the cursor o...

Page 657: ...20 0 kHz 25 0 kHz 50 0 kHz 100 0 kHz Turn Scroll Control to select the value press E yes gps to set the selection and return to the Band Defaults setting menu See Scanner Info This menu lets you see some information about the scanner including the memory usage Select from the following items Memory Used Firmware Version Press E yes gps to go to each setting Memory Used When you select this option ...

Page 658: ...en you select this option the scanner displays the firmware version as Version And the serial number of the unit is displayed as SN on the bottom of the screen Note The serial number includes 14 digits Press any key to return to the previous menu ...

Page 659: ...not match are locked out Systems and Sites whose startup key are assigned are not affected if they were locked or unlocked before their lockout status does not change Quick keys for the matching systems and sites are also enabled Start Scanning When you press Scan srch to go to the Scan Mode the scanner scans all sites and systems that are not locked out and whose System Site quick key is enabled ...

Page 660: ... out 3 The Quick Key for groups to which that group belongs is disabled 4 The system site containing the channel is locked out 5 The Quick Key for systems sites to which that system belongs is disabled Scan Mode Nothi ng to Scan S0 GRP If the Channels are unlocked by cancellation of any of the above mentioned states the scanner will start scanning immediately Scan for conventional system ID Scan f...

Page 661: ...ts system the scanner scans from top system again You can change the scanning direction by turning Scroll Control The scanning order of the systems sites belonging to the same Quick Key is the order registered to that Quick Key The scanning order of the systems sites belonging to no Quick Key is the order set to none When a system site is created the scanner automatically sets the Quick Key to non...

Page 662: ...ystems belonging to disable SQKs are not scanned You cannot enable or disable an SQK if no system or site is assigned to it The displayed GQKs channel Group Quick Keys show the status of GQKs for the system currently being scanned For example the scanner displays as follows if the SQKs 3 4 6 and 9 are disabled The details of scanning depend on whether the System is a conventional System or a trunk...

Page 663: ...nnel the received signal must match for the scanner to hold on the transmission Not for AM WFM or FMB modulation The scanner continuously scans each system for the duration of the system s system hold time setting However the scanner scans all unlocked channels at least 1 time even if this takes longer than the set time The scanner will advance to the next system once the scanner scans all unlocke...

Page 664: ...nother TGID it monitors the found TGID But if there is only the TGID that was being monitored just before it monitors that TGID again Press L O to lock out the TGID and store it to the list of ID Lockouts of the system See Clr All L O IDs This lock out information is common to every site in the system Then the scanner returns to the C Ch If the transmission ends it returns to the C Ch and exclusiv...

Page 665: ...he ID Example MOT Type I I Call ID i12345 MOT Type II ID i12345 Decimal Format ID i1234h Hexadecimal Format EDACS I Call ID i12345 I Call wild card i0 The scanner will display the received I Call for wild card Example I Call wild card ID i0 while scanning ID i123456 when it receives a ID MOT Individual Call The scanner displays both IDs under communication as ID xxxxxx yyyyyy In order to show that...

Page 666: ... that matches the PARTIAL ID it displays the full received ID Example PARTIAL ID ID 01 01 while scanning ID 01 015 when it receives a ID Quick Save for ID Search Press E yes gps to quickly store a TGID when the scanner stops on the TGID in ID Search The scanner prompts Quick TGID Save Quick TGI D Save 4128 Press E yes gps to store the TGID The scanner creates a channel group named Qck Save Grp in ...

Page 667: ...receives a trunked system channel grant the V Ch blinks and the C Ch lights The scanner has 30 Channel Activity Indicators to visualize trunked system activity This shows which site frequencies are in use The following figure shows that the scanner is staying on LCN1 and LCN3 and LCN4 are active While the scanner is staying on a V Ch the voice channel blinks and its C Ch turns on The following fig...

Page 668: ...e name on second line GPS Location Unlock Site 1 1 MOT S0 GRP When the scanner goes outside the set range the group or site is automatically temporarily locked out The scanner displays Location L O on first line and the group name or the site name on second line GPS Location L O Site 1 1 MOT S0 GRP This operation does not affect systems sites whose SQK is disabled If a GPS is detected as soon as t...

Page 669: ... CC data Data Stream Output Extend When data stream output function is set to extend the scanner will output the data stream in the following format Msg Type CC data decoded description Msg Type ASCII character 3 chars MOT Motorola EDW EDACS Wide EDN EDACS Narrow LTR CC data OSW Data on Control Channel It is deferent each Trunk System Type MOT System MOT cmd prv id cmd command or LCN Hex 3 digits ...

Page 670: ... Goto Repeater Number Hex 2 digits 5 bits HH Home Repeater Number Hex 2 digits 5 bits III ID Number Hex 2 digits 8 bits FF Free Repeater Number Hex 2 digits 5 bits For example LTR 0 01 01 FA 02 MOT Subaudio MOT id id ID Hex 4 digit 16 bits For example MOT D110 decoded description ...

Page 671: ...k Group ID Hex 4 digits 16 bits dddd Talk Group ID for Receiver Hex 4 digits 16 bits ccc LCN Hex 3 digits 10 bits ffffffff Frequency BCD 8 digits CPT TG tttt CH ccc VC ffffffff Call for Patch Multiselect tttt Talk Group ID Hex 4 digits 16 bits ccc LCN Hex 3 digits 10 bits ffffffff Frequency BCD 8 digits EVM Event Command for Multiple OSW SID ssss System ID ssss System ID Hex 4 digits PAT pppp MEM ...

Page 672: ...LCN Hex 2 digits 5 bits ffffffff frequency BCD 8 digits PAT ppp MEM mmm Patch List Update ppp Patch ID Hex 3 digits 11 bits mmm Member ID Hex 3 digits 11 bits SIT ss Site ID ss Site ID Hex 2 digits 6 bits For LTR system Decoded Description Remark CAL TG a hh dd Free ee CH gg VC ffffffff Call for Talk Group a Area Hex 1 digits 1 bit hh Home Ch Hex 2 digits 5 bits dd ID Hex 2 digits 8 bits ee Free C...

Page 673: ...eturn to the previous mode without unlocking In a trunked system press Scan srch key in Function Mode to change ID Search and ID Scan for the system When you select a system while the scanner is Temporary System Hold without a timeout the scanner scans only the selected system If the selected system is locked out it is automatically unlocks and scans the system Other lockout states are not unlocke...

Page 674: ...gps or the Scroll Control to select a system and return to the previous mode Press L O in Function Mode to toggle lockout state for the selected system Press 1 9 0 in Function Mode to enable or disable GQKs for the selected System Quick System Select Resume Pressing FUNC or E yes gps or pressing the Scroll Control resumes scanning immediately from the selected system even if the system is locked o...

Page 675: ...a conventional channel and the scanner is detecting a CTCSS DCS tone data you can store the tone data into the current channel by pressing E yes gps The scanner prompts Set Found CTCSS DCS and Yes E No Set Found CTCSS DCS Yes E No Press E yes gps to store the tone data and go to the editing menu for the current channel Press no pri to go to the editing menu for the current channel without storing ...

Page 676: ... channel or TGID is unlocked Press this key twice within one second to lockout the monitored channel or TGID in ID Search Mode When the scanner is turned off these lockouts remain Long press this key to unlock all channels and TGIDs in the current system when the scanner is receiving a signal 1 9 0 key Press these keys to enable or disable SQKs no pri key Press this key to go to the mode that sele...

Page 677: ... a system site or a search range When the scanner is turned off these lockouts remain Long press this key to display the prompt Unlock All Systems to unlock all systems sites search ranges and Close Call Hits system and enable all Quick Keys for all systems sites Press E yes gps to unlock all data Press no pri to return to the previous mode without unlocking F 1 9 0 key Press this key to enable or...

Page 678: ...K GRP This icon appears with icons of the GQK 1 9 0 General Operation Turn Scroll Control to select the channel trunk frequency TGID or search frequency Hold on a Channel in Conventional System The scanner alternately displays the system and channel group name on the first line and it displays the channel on the second line The SQK and GQK for the channel is displayed The scanner continuously moni...

Page 679: ...tional For example the scanner displays as follows when the channel name for 162 4000MHz is Channel A In Display Mode 2 even if the Close Call setting is CC Pri or CC DND the Close Call icon is not displayed when CTCSS DCS setting is set or tone data has been detected in CTCSS DCS Search mode F HOLD T001 001 Group 1 Channel A AM IFX V 3 S0 1 GRP 4 Channel number tag System number tag IFX IF Exchan...

Page 680: ...ction Mode to change the Display Mode In Display Mode 1 the scanner displays the TGID name on the second line and the V Ch frequency under the second line In Display mode 2 the scanner displays the TGID name on the second line and TGID under the second line In Display mode 3 the scanner displays the TGID name on the second line and trunking activity indicators under the second line For example the...

Page 681: ...scanner receives a TGID it displays the received TGID on the second line If the TGID is already stored into the system and it is named the channel name is displayed instead of the TGID The holding trunked frequency is displayed under the TGID display HOLD SID 01 ID 01 012 851 0125 S0 1 GRP In Motorola System System ID is displayed as SID xxxxh yyzz xxxxh means System ID yy means Sub System ID This...

Page 682: ...t system If you turn Scroll Control counterclockwise when the scanner is on the first channel in the system it goes to the previous system Hold on Trunked System Turn Scroll Control to select the site frequency and channel TGID Turn Scroll Control clockwise to select the next system frequency or channel and turn Scroll Control counterclockwise to select previous one If you turn Scroll Control cloc...

Page 683: ...l number tags assigned Store Frequency You cannot use this function to store a frequency for a trunked System To quickly store a frequency into a channel for a conventional system enter the frequency including the decimal point using the keypad then press E yes gps The scanner prompts Quick Freq Save If you press Hold without pressing E yes gps key the scanner goes to Quick Search Hold Mode at the...

Page 684: ...s you to select a system to store this TGID Select the system and the channel group then the TGID is stored In system selection the scanner displays only the systems whose TGID format matches the TGID you entered The ID format and system type relation are the following Input TGID n number System Type nnn nn nnnn n n nnn nnnn nnn n nnnnn innnnn Motorola Systems Type I Type II nn nnn nn nn nn innnnn...

Page 685: ...e at the entered number tag For example if you want to select Channel E from the below example press 7 5 Menu System A Number tag 1 Channel A Number tag 1 Channel B Number tag 5 Channel C Number tag 100 System B Number tag 7 Channel D Number tag 10 Channel E Number tag 5 Channel F Number tag 3 System number tag Channel number tag You do not have to enter the system number tag to select a channel i...

Page 686: ...ess this key to unlock all channels in the current system for conventional systems Long press this key to unlock all frequencies of the site and all TGIDs of the current system for trunked system sites 1 9 0 key Press this key to enter numbers and go to Direct Entry no pri key Press this key to input decimal point hyphen or i for Direct Entry E yes gps key Press this key to edit the data for the c...

Page 687: ...to start ID Search Press no pri to go to Search for Press L O to cancel this prompt Press Hold to go to Scan Hold Mode Hold key Press this key to toggle Close Call functions Long press this key to start Close Call Only Mode L O key Press this key once to temporarily lock out a system or a search range When the scanner is turned off this is unlocked Press this key twice in a second to lockout a sys...

Page 688: ...ress this key to show the reverse frequency for the current frequency And release this key to return to the current frequency 9 mod key Press this key to toggle the modulation state for global setting 0 wx key Press this key to change WX Alert Priority Mode Long press this key to start WX Scan no pri key Press this key to toggle Priority Mode for conventional priority E yes gps key Press this key ...

Page 689: ... the scanner is unable to scan over 100 channels at once If there are more than 100 unlocked priority channels the first 100 channels will be scanned for priority scanning but others won t The priority for P Channels is determined by System and Group Quick Key settings The highest priority is for P Channels to which the SQK and GQK are 1 And the lowest priority is for P Channels to which the SQK i...

Page 690: ...all Priority Channels are locked out the scanner displays Priority Scan No Channel and sounds an Error Tone Then Priority Plus Scan stops Press any key to cancel it Priority Scan is turned off automatically and it starts normal scanning Key Operation During Priority Scan Key operations are the same as in Scan Mode and Scan Hold Mode See Key Operation During Scan and Key Operation During Scan Hold ...

Page 691: ...delay period Motorola system can receive priority IDs while the scanner is on the voice channel However for this to work the channel must also be assigned as a priority channel by the radio system otherwise the TGID will never be sent on the voice channel s low speed data HOLD Site 1 1 MOT ID 16524 P 851 0125 S0 1 2 5 7 8 0 GRP 1 2 6 0 The scanner can only look for priority channels on the trunked...

Page 692: ...ayed on right end HAM Radio 29 6000MHz NFM While searching locked out frequencies are skipped The lockout information is common to all Searches and Close Call You can confirm or unlock these locked out frequencies at Freq Lockouts Press Hold to go to Search Hold Mode for the current frequency If CTCSS DCS Search is On See Tone Code Search the scanner searches for any active CTCSS DCS on the freque...

Page 693: ... Public Safety 30 9000MHz NFM If the search range is one that includes channel numbers like CB or Marine the scanner displays the frequency and the channel number The frequency unit is not displayed For example if it stops on 27 4050 MHz of CB Radio the scanner displays as follows CB Radi o 27 4050 CH40 AM While monitoring the transmission press SCAN srch in Function Mode or turn Scroll Control to...

Page 694: ...s Locked Out then resumes searching from the next frequency If you turn off the current search range number the scanner searches from the next range The scanner stays on a frequency until the delay time expires after a transmission ends When you start a Custom Search by selecting Custom Search from the Menu the frequency is initialized and the scanner starts searching When searching in ascending o...

Page 695: ...earching resumes immediately Receive Motorola Control Channel The scanner starts trunking Acquired TGIDs are displayed The first line displays the system name and system ID name ID in turn The second line displays the TGID The C Ch frequency is displayed in the line under the TGID display If you have set the correct band plan for the received control channel at Set MOT BandPlan the scanner will au...

Page 696: ...n make the scanner perform this function by menu selection See Search and Store for details In this operation the setting of Set C Ch Only is invalid Quick Search Quick Search searches all bands You can start Quick Search by pressing SCAN srch key in Function Mode during Scan Mode Scan Hold Mode Close Call Mode Weather Scan Mode and Tone Out Mode The scanner prompts Quick Search Quick Search Yes E...

Page 697: ...on the frequency and the second line displays the frequency While monitoring the frequency press SCAN srch in Function Mode or turn Scroll Control to resume searching Press L O once to lock out the frequency temporarily The scanner displays Temporary L O Press L O twice in a second to lock out the frequency permanently The scanner displays Locked Out then resumes searching from the next frequency ...

Page 698: ...frequencies that are locked out in Search Mode and Close Call Mode 1 9 0 key Press this key to turn on or off each custom search range However this key operates only in Custom Search and does not operate in other searches E yes gps key Press this key to quickly store the current frequency MENU key Press this key to go to the Menu Mode at Top Menu Function Mode Scroll Control knob Turn this knob to...

Page 699: ...oggle the attenuator state for the search range Long press this key to toggle global attenuator 8 rev key Long press this key to show the reverse frequency for the current frequency And release this key to return to the current frequency 9 mod Key Press this key to change the modulation 0 WX key Press this key to change WX Alert Priority Mode Long press this key to start WX Scan E yes gps key Pres...

Page 700: ...locked Press SCAN srch in Function Mode or Hold key to restart searching Custom Search Range Select Turn Scroll Control knob in Function Mode to select the Custom Search Range Once the Range is changed the monitoring frequency is set to upper limit frequency or lower limit frequency depends on searching direction If the direction is ascending order the frequency is set to lower limit frequency of ...

Page 701: ...f you store the detected frequency while receiving location data from a GPS unit the channel name of the stored frequency becomes the current Latitude Longitude data The channel name format depends on the format set in Set Pos Format DMS DDD MM SS ss is set If the latitude data is 32 57 33 60 N and the longitude data is 97 05 34 18 W the channel name becomes 3257 33 09705 34 DEG DD dddddd is set I...

Page 702: ...frequencies that are locked out in Search Mode and Close Call Mode 1 9 0 key Press this key to enter numbers and go to Direct Entry no pri key Press this key to input decimal point hyphen or i for Direct Entry E yes gps key Press this key to quickly store the current frequency MENU key Press this key to go to the Menu Mode at Top Menu Function Mode Scroll Control knob Turn this knob to select a cu...

Page 703: ...this key to toggle the attenuator state for the search range Long press this key to toggle global attenuator 8 rev key Long press this key to show the reverse frequency for the current frequency And release this key to return to the current frequency 9 mod Key Press this key to change the modulation 0 WX key Press this key to change WX Alert Priority Mode Long press this key to start WX Scan E yes...

Page 704: ...requency or a reverse frequency it does not prompt for any new Close Call hits The scanner checks Close Call transmissions while scanning or searching every 2 seconds If a Close Call hit is found the scanner alerts the user according to the setting of Set CC Alert and the Close Call icon blinks CC DND is set The scanner does not make Close Call checks when it is already receiving a voice transmiss...

Page 705: ...n Set CC Pause to ignore the Close Call hit and return to the previous state In this state pressing Scroll Control L O or Menu operates the same as pressing no pri and other keys are invalid If you ignored the hit during the CC Pause time the scanner will not check for any Close Call transmission for 10 seconds Press Hold to go to Close Call Hold Mode with the frequency When the scanner gets a Clo...

Page 706: ... Otherwise it returns to the previous mode Press L O once to temporarily lock out the frequency The scanner displays Temporary L O Press L O twice in a second to permanently lock out the frequency The scanner displays Locked Out then resumes searching from the next frequency The scanner stays on the frequency until the Delay time expires even if the transmission ends Then the scanner checks the re...

Page 707: ...lose Call hit frequency Or if it has not yet received a Close Call hit the keypress is ignored and the scanner sounds an Error Tone Press the number keys from 1 sr1 to 7 att to switch each band on or off You can also use the menu to turn bands on or off See Set CC Bands If the scanner gets a Close Call hit the scanner displays CC Found and Press Any Key And the band number that the found close cal...

Page 708: ...played For example if the scanner finds a transmission on 174 0000 MHz it displays as follows In this condition the scanner does not check for other Close Call hits While holding on a frequency turning Scroll Control goes to Quick Search Hold with the held frequency And Close Call Mode will be set to off Press Hold to return to the previous state If the Close Call transmission is found again the s...

Page 709: ...Mode If you exit from Menu Mode it goes to Close Call Only Mode Pressing Menu in Function Mode exits this mode and goes to the Close Call Menu Pressing Scan srch in Function Mode prompts Quick Search and exits this mode Then press E yes gps to go to Quick Search Mode press no pri to go to Search Menu press L O to cancel the prompt and go to Close Call Only Mode or press Hold to go to Quick Search ...

Page 710: ... lock out the current frequency When the scanner is turned off the frequency is unlocked Press this key twice in a second to permanently lock out the current frequency When the scanner is turned off the frequency stays locked out Long press this key to unlock all frequencies that are locked out in Search Mode and Close Call Mode 1 7 key Press these keys to turn on off each Close Call Band This ope...

Page 711: ...s key to toggle the global attenuator status 8 rev key Long press this key to show the reverse frequency for the current frequency And release this key to return to the current frequency 9 mod Key Press this key to change the modulation 0 WX key Press this key to change WX Alert Priority Mode Long press this key to start WX Scan E yes gps key Press this key to change to the GPS Mode Menu key Press...

Page 712: ...e Scan srch key Press this key to display the prompt for starting Quick Search The scanner displays the prompt Press E yes gps to start Quick Search press no pri to go to Menu Mode at Search for press L O to cancel the prompt or press Hold to go to Quick Search Hold Mode Hold key Press this key to set the Close Call Mode to off and go to Scan Mode L O key Press this key to go to Rvw Search L O 1 3...

Page 713: ...Press this key to change the modulation mode 0 WX key Press this key to change WX Alert Priority Mode Long press this key to start WX Scan E yes gps key Press this key to change to the GPS Mode Menu key Press this key to go to Close Call ...

Page 714: ...X Scan 162 5500MHz CH1 FM If the signal is lost the scanner resumes scanning for Weather Channels Weather Alert Scan The scanner starts this when you either select the Weather Alert function in Menu Mode at Weather Alert or press Function key and 0 WX key in Normal Weather Scan Mode to start this mode The scanner scans 10 Weather Channels and alerts when it detects a 1050 Hz Weather Alert Tone or ...

Page 715: ...EOM For example the scanner displays as follows when it decodes the SAME data that has an Event Code of EAN Warning WX EMG Notify If the scanner is set to All FIPS the scanner sounds a Weather Alert Siren for Warning Watch or Advisory when it decodes the SAME data packets that precede the Alert Tone It displays the warning level and Event Code then opens squelch and remains on the Weather Channel ...

Page 716: ...ch and remains on the Weather Channel If you presses any key again the scanner goes to Weather Scan Hold Mode WX Alt Priority function does not work while the scanner is in Weather Scan Mode Search and Store Mode Tone Out Mode or CC Auto Store Direct Entry Quick Save When the scanner is holding on a Weather Channel enter a frequency or TGID by pressing the number and decimal keys then press E yes ...

Page 717: ...ess this key to toggle global attenuator 0 WX key Press this key to change to WX Scan or WX Alert Scan If you press this key in WX Scan Mode you can selects how the WX Scan works and the scanner starts WX Alert Scan Or the scanner immediately starts WX Scan when this key is pressed in any WX Alert Scan Mode E yes gps key Press this key to change to the GPS Mode MENU key Press this key to go to WX ...

Page 718: ...arch range set at Set Search Key 4 LEFT ifx Key Press this key to exchange IF intermediate frequency for the current frequency 7 att key Press this key to toggle the attenuator state for the search range Long press this key to toggle global attenuator 0 WX key Press this key to switch between WX Scan or WX Alert Scan If you press this key in WX Scan Mode you can select how the WX Scan works and th...

Page 719: ... Out Search FM These icons show the modulation type ATT This icon shows the attenuator status of the current channel When Global attenuator is on this icon blinks IFX This icon shows when the current channel is an IF exchange frequency Tone Out Search Tone Out 1 FM ATT IFX CH1 A 0 0Hz B 0 0Hz This shows Tone Out Search Status This shows Tone Out channel name This shows Tone Out channel number Tone...

Page 720: ...Tone A If the first tone matches Tone A the scanner confirms that the tone is present for more than 250ms Then the second tone is confirmed whether it detects second tone less than 500ms If the second tone matches Tone B and the tone is present for more than 100ms the scanner opens squelch and activates the alert tone and alert light that you set for this tone set Then the scanner goes to Tone Out...

Page 721: ...0000 NFM On 1800 0 2800 0 CH 5 137 0000 FM Off 2000 0 3000 0 CH 6 138 0000 Auto NFM Off 1000 0 2000 0 Modulation setting Auto follows the initialization of Band Coverage However when modulation of the frequency in Band Coverage is not FM or NFM it is forced to FM And Auto is compared as NFM or FM with other channel s setting The scanner detects the Tone on the channel that its number is the smalle...

Page 722: ... For single tone pages the Tone must be present between 1 25 3 75 seconds For group tones Tone must be present for more than 3 75 seconds If one kind of these tones is detected the scanner begins to check whether it has been registered in another tone out channel with the same setting for frequency Modulation and Attenuator If it has been registered the scanner goes to Tone Out Hold Mode with the ...

Page 723: ...tone out sequence that has not been register yet The found tone out sequence will flash You can return to the Tone Out Search Mode by pressing Hold If you press E yes gps you will be prompted to save the new detected tone out sequence Set Found Tone A and B Yes E No Press E yes gps to save the new tone out sequence and move to the tone out setting menu Tone Out Settings Press no pri to cancel the ...

Page 724: ... Mode press this key to go to Tone Out Hold Mode and release the mute In Tone Out Hold Mode press this key to go to Tone Out Standby Mode or Tone Out Search Mode and the scanner is muted 1 9 0 key Press this key to enter a frequency or a TGID for Direct Entry no pri key Press this key to input i for Direct Entry E yes gps key Press this key to go to the channel menu at Tone Out Settings Menu Key P...

Page 725: ...ey to go to Close Call Only Mode 1 3 sr 1 3 key Press this key to start searching the search range set at Set Search Key 4 LEFT ifx key Press this key to exchange IF intermediate frequency for the current frequency 7 att key Press this key to toggle the attenuator setting Long press this key to toggle the global attenuator setting 9 mod key Press this key to change the modulation 0 WX key Press th...

Page 726: ...MC Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS Data based on NMEA 0183 ver 3 01 Display Mode in GPS Mode There are 6 kinds of Display Mode in GPS Mode GPS DATA ETA Clock Elevation Speed and Location And there are two displays for a GPS Data receipt error If you do not select any POI the Display Mode can be selected from GPS DATA and Location Press 6 RIGHT disp in Function Mode to change the Display Mode to ...

Page 727: ...direction to the selected POI The left side of the 1st line displays the current direction of travel The 2nd line displays the distance to the selected POI The right side of the 1st line displays individual information ETA Display Mode shows the ETA Estimated Time for Arrival to the selected POI Clock Display Mode shows the present time Elevation Display Mode shows the elevation of the current loc...

Page 728: ...splayed as DDDD dd mi DDDD dd distance According to the setting of Set Unit mi mile or km is displayed for a unit The ETA to the POI This is displayed as hhh mmm hh hour mm minute The latitude This is displayed as N or S and DDºMM SS ss for DMS format or DD dddddd for DEG format The longitude This is displayed as W or E and DDDºMM SS ss for DMS format or DDD dddddd for DEG format Error Display Whe...

Page 729: ...plays POI as Location Alert System Type and the distance to the destination Dangerous Xing Road The scanner may ring an Alert three times at different timings The screen displays ALERT for on the first line And the second line displays the Location Alert System Type and the distance to the Alert Location An arrow which shows the direction of Alert Location is displayed too Alert Light is turned on...

Page 730: ... If Car 1 is running at speed lower than the limit set for the point the scanner does not ring an alert the display changes to Location Alert Mode If Car 1 accelerates to a speed higher than the limit set for the point after it enters range the scanner will ring an Alert and the Alert Light is turned on On the other hand no Alert Alert display Alert Light and Alert Beep will sound for Car 2 regard...

Page 731: ...ing value by long pressing E yes gps key in Function Mode The moment you press E yes gps key in Function Mode the scanner holds the current location data Then the scanner displays the dialog for selecting a location type By pressing E yes gps for type selection registration is completed and the name and location of stored location are displayed The stored data is named as T YYMMDD hhmmss that show...

Page 732: ...isplayed under the second line For POI Range is displayed as RANGE 0 10 MILE or RANGE 0 10 KM For Dangerous Xing or Dangerous Road Heading and Limit Speed are displayed as HEAD xxx and LS 75M or LS 75K The xxx is one of ALL N NE E SE S SW W and NW Latitude and Longitude are displayed at the bottom of the screen Displays of each Type are as follows POI Dangerous Xing Dangerous Road Key Operation Ke...

Page 733: ...oad Settings However pressing MENU in this edit menu returns to Review Location Mode and pressing L O in this menu goes to GPS Mode If you select New Location in the editing menu the scanner returns to Review Location Mode with new Location activation If you select Delete Location in the editing menu the scanner returns to Review Location Mode and the next Location is selected If you ve deleted al...

Page 734: ...r operation is Scan Mode or Search Mode the scanner goes to Hold Mode by pressing this key Or it is Scan Hold or Search Hold the scanner resumes scanning or searching L O key Press this key once to temporarily lockout the current Location Alert during a Location Alert When the scanner is turned off the frequency is unlocked Or the scanner automatically unlocks the locked out location when it moves...

Page 735: ...f the frequency is unlocked Or the scanner automatically unlocks the locked out location when it moves 4 miles or more from the Alert Point Press this key twice in a second to permanently lockout the current Location Alert during a Location Alert When the scanner is turned off these locations remain locked out 6 RIGHT disp key Press this key to change the GPS Display E yes gps key Long press this ...

Page 736: ...hile in Search Mode MAX This icon appears while in MAX Hold Search Mode This shows in the same place as SRCH HOLD This icon appears while in Hold Mode This shows in the same place as SRCH MF 850 8125 This icon and number show the marker frequency This icon shows the signal level This icon shows the marker point This icon shows the center frequency point START 850 00 This icon and number shows the ...

Page 737: ...t and the latest signal are displayed Note If a signal is outside of band coverage the scanner doesn t search it Press FUNC Scan srch in Max Hold Search Mode to go to this mode Max Hold Search Mode The scanner searches the signals of the frequency range The scanner displays the frequency for the strongest signal The scanner displays MAX The other functions are the same as Search Mode Press FUNC Sc...

Page 738: ... setting item The icon of the selected item blinks You can change the selected item s parameter except CF by turning the Scroll Control When the CF is selected go to the edit frequency menu to change the center frequency by pressing E yes gps See Edit Frequency If you change a parameter the scanner clears the search result and searches again The scanner returns to a normal screen 10 seconds after ...

Page 739: ...n select from 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 MHz Search Step You can change the search step to find a transmission The search time changes depending on the search step size You can select from 5 6 25 7 5 8 33 10 12 5 15 20 25 50 100 kHz Modulation Modulation can be selected from AUTO AM NFM FM WFM FMB This parameter is used in HOLD Mode Whe...

Page 740: ... to register the marker frequency as the center frequency Menu Key Press this key to enter the Menu Mode Normal Mode during Setting Screen Scroll Control Knob Sets the level in Volume Squelch Level Control mode Turn this knob to change the selected item parameter except CF item Scan srch Key Press this key to go to Scan Mode Hold Key In Search or Max Hold Search Mode press this key to go to Hold M...

Page 741: ...l Only Mode L O Key Press this key to restart searching 1 3 sr1 3 Key Press this key to start Service Search Custom Search Tone Out Mode or Band Scope Mode in Set Search Key 4 LEFT ifx Key In Hold Mode press this key to exchange IF intermediate frequency 7 att key Press this key to toggle the attenuator state for the search range Long press this key to toggle global attenuator 9 mod Key Press this...

Page 742: ... an acceptable response in 10 second it fails with an error Press L O to return to Menu Mode at Wired Clone In the Slave Unit when Scan srch key is pressed and the display is Clone Slave Waiting Data the only control that will work is for turning off the scanner and turning on the backlight Transferring State During the data transfer the scanners display a progress message shows progressing transf...

Page 743: ...have an Error State Even if the Slave Unit receives invalid data it continues waiting for valid data Key Operation During Clone Mode Confirm State Scan srch key The scanner start data transfer Menu key The scanner goes to Menu at Wired Clone FUNC Menu key The scanner goes to Menu at Wired Clone L O key The scanner goes to Menu at Wired Clone key Turn off the power supply or illuminate the LCD back...

Page 744: ...d On or Off While the keypad is locked any key operation other than Hold Func and turning Scroll Control key are invalid Of course Func key is also valid to cancel the keypad lock status Pressing any other key causes the scanner displays Keypad Lock and On and does not sound any beep Keypad Lock On Keypad Lock Off ...

Page 745: ...ifx 5 lvl 6 RIGHT disp 7 att 8 rev 9 mod 0 wx no pri E yes gps O O O O O O O O Menu O O O O O O O O O Function Mode Scan srch O O O O O Hold O 4 O 4 O 4 O 4 O 4 O 4 O 4 O 4 L O O O O O 1 3 sr1 3 O 5 O O O O O O O 4 LEFT ifx O 5 O 3 O 3 O 3 O 3 O 3 O O 5 lvl O 5 6 RIGHT disp 7 att O 5 O O O O O O O 8 rev 9 mod O 5 O O O O O O 0 wx O 4 5 O 4 O 4 O 4 O O 4 O 4 O 4 no pri E yes gps O O O O O O O O O M...

Page 746: ...C key and the number key the scanner does not set Key Safe Operation LAST MODE means the mode when the scanner is turned off It resumes Scan Mode Custom Service Quick Search Mode Weather Mode Close Call Only Tone Out Mode each Hold Mode GPS Mode and Band Scope Mode for LAST MODE In ID Search Hold Mode if ID has already been registered LAST MODE will be ID Search Hold Mode If ID has not been regist...

Page 747: ...ff the scanner during initialization the scanner starts initializing again at next power on After clearing data the scanner displays Restore Preprogram List Yes E No then you can select whether to restore the Preprogram List Restore Preprogram Li st Yes E No Press E yes gps to restore the Preprogram List Or pressing no pri to use without restoring the Preprogram List Then other keys are invalid an...

Page 748: ...To charge the batteries connect the AC adapter to the scanner s power jack after installing the Ni MH batteries with correct setting of the battery type switch The scanner charges the installed Ni MH batteries You can change the charging time See Set Charge Time Never use non rechargeable batteries in the scanner with the switch set to Ni MH Charging the Battery If an AC adapter is connected to th...

Page 749: ...s not installed it displays No Battery No Battery If the scanner detects that the battery cannot be charged it displays Battery Error Battery Error If there is a battery and Battery Type of the scanner is set to ALKALINE it displays Charge Off Charge Off If the scanner detects an illegal voltage voltage outside the allowable range it displays Illegal Voltage and you cannot turn on power Illegal Vo...

Page 750: ...ner cannot judge the battery to be a good one at once the scanner checks the battery and the battery icon is displayed If the scanner judges the battery good the scanner starts charging and the battery icon disappears If it cannot regard the battery as good within 60 seconds the scanner stops checking and the battery icon blinks ...

Page 751: ...t Site O O O O Edit Group O O O O Copy System O O O O O Delete System O O O O O System Option Settings System Option Settings CNV MOT EDACS LTR WIDE NARROW SCAT Set Quick Key O Set Startup Key O Set Number tag O O O O O Set Lockout O Set Hold Time O ID Scan Search O O O Set Delay Time O O O O O Edit Fleet Map O Priority ID Scan O O O Set Status Bit O Set End Code O Emergency Alert O O Set ID Forma...

Page 752: ...encies O O O O Set Modulation O O O O Set Attenuator O O O O Set Lockout O O O O Set Hold Time O O O O Set LocationInfo O O O O Delete Site O O O New Site O O O Site Frequency Settings Site Frequency MOT EDACS LTR WIDE NARROW SCAT Edit Frequency O O O O Input LCN O O Set Number tag O Set Lockout O O O O Volume Offset O Delete Frequency O O O O New Frequency O O O O ...

Page 753: ...AT Edit Name O O O O Edit Frequency O Edit TGID O O O Set CTCSS DCS O Set Number tag O O O O Set Modulation O Set Attenuator O Set Priority O O O O Set Alert O O O O Set Lockout O O O O Volume Offset O O O O Copy Channel O O O O Delete Channel O O O O New Channel O O O O ...

Page 754: ... is 1 digit FFF is 3 digits 6 NNNNN Normal ID when SIZE CODE is 0 N is 1 5 digit s 7 iNNNNN I CALL ID N is 5 digits 0 filling Input Format 1 BFF SS Normal ID B is 1 digit FF should be 2 digits 0 filling SS is 1 2 digit s 2 BFFF S Normal ID when FLEET is 100 127 B is 1 digit FFF is 3 digits S is 1 digit 3 B Partial ID free FLEET and SUB FLEET B is 1 digit 4 BFF Partial ID fleet SUB FLEET B is 1 dig...

Page 755: ...T 0 3 SIZE CODE 2 FLEET 00 15 SUB FLEET 0 7 SIZE CODE 3 FLEET 00 07 SUB FLEET 0 7 SIZE CODE 4 FLEET 00 SUB FLEET 0 15 SIZE CODE 5 FLEET 00 63 SUB FLEET 0 3 SIZE CODE 6 FLEET 00 31 SUB FLEET 0 7 SIZE CODE 7 FLEET 00 31 SUB FLEET 0 3 SIZE CODE 8 FLEET 00 15 SUB FLEET 0 3 SIZE CODE 9 FLEET 00 07 SUB FLEET 0 3 SIZE CODE 10 FLEET 00 03 SUB FLEET 0 7 SIZE CODE 11 FLEET 00 01 SUB FLEET 0 15 SIZE CODE 12 ...

Page 756: ...rmal ID 1 65535 I CALL ID i00000 i65535 Note TYPE2 format cannot support PARTIAL ID Hexadecimal Format Display Format 1 NNNh Normal ID NNN is 1 3 digit s 2 iNNNNh I CALL ID NNNN is 4 digits 0 filling Input Format 1 NNN Normal ID NNN is 1 3 digit s 2 iNNNN I CALL ID NNNN is 1 4 digits Range Normal ID 001 FFF I CALL ID i0000 iFFFF Note TYPE2 format cannot support PARTIAL ID Normal ID Hexadecimal For...

Page 757: ...ree FLEET and SUB FLEET AA should be 2 digits 0 filling 3 AA FF Partial ID free SUB FLEET AA should be 2 digits 0 filling FF should be 2 digits 0 filling Range AA AGENCY 2digits 00 15 FF FLEET 2digits 00 15 S SUB FLEET 1digit 0 7 ALL0 00 00 0 is invalid Note Both AFS and Decimal Format are valid to input regardless of AFS setting Display Format depends on AFS Decimal setting except for I CALL ID U...

Page 758: ...NN is 1 4 digit s 2 iNNNNN I CALL ID NNNNN is 1 5 digit s Range Normal ID 1 2047 I CALL ID i00000 i16383 Note Both AFS and Decimal Format are valid to input regardless of AFS setting Display Format depends on AFS Decimal Setting except for I CALL ID I CALL format is always showed as Decimal Format regardless of AFS setting Decimal format cannot support Partial ID ...

Page 759: ...mat 1 A RR NNN Normal ID A is 1 digit RR is 2 digits NNN is 3 digits 2 ARRNNN Normal ID Easy Way A is 1 digit RR should be 2 digits 01 20 NNN should be 3 digits 000 254 3 A RR Partial ID free ID A is 1 digit RR should be 2 digits 01 20 Range A AREA CODE 1digit 0 or 1 RR HOME REPEATER 2digit 01 20 NNN ID 3digit 000 254 Note LTR System has no I CALL ID ...

Page 760: ...pped because Block 2 is set to Size Code 12 Block 2 and Block 3 are treated as Size Code 12 Then the scanner advances to Block 4 to select its Size Code Size Code 13 occupies 4 Blocks and this can be set only for Block 0 or Block 4 If you try to set this to Block number 1 3 it is set to Block 0 And if you try to set this to Block number 5 7 it is set to Block 4 When you set a block to Size Code 13...

Page 761: ... there are 4 Fleets and the range is from 0 to 3 PRESET FLEET MAPS The numbers in the table shows the number of SIZE CODE BLOCK No 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Preset 1 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 Preset 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Preset 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 12 12 Preset 4 12 12 4 4 4 4 4 4 Preset 5 4 4 12 12 4 4 4 4 Preset 6 3 10 4 4 12 12 12 12 Preset 7 10 10 11 4 4 4 4 4 Preset 8 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Preset 9 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 Preset...

Page 762: ... 186 2Hz 218 1Hz 77 0Hz 100 0Hz 131 8Hz 165 5Hz 189 9Hz 225 7Hz 79 7Hz 103 5Hz 136 5Hz 167 9Hz 192 8Hz 229 1Hz 82 5Hz 107 2Hz 141 3Hz 171 3Hz 196 6Hz 233 6Hz 85 4Hz 110 9Hz 146 2Hz 173 8Hz 199 5Hz 241 8Hz DCS CODE The scanner can detect the following 104 hexadecimal DCS codes 023 051 114 143 174 245 266 332 411 452 506 612 703 025 053 115 145 205 246 271 343 412 454 516 624 712 026 054 116 152 212...

Page 763: ...ak Warning O Dam Break DEW Contagious Disease Warning O Contagious DMO Practice Demo O System Demo DSW Dust Storm Warning O Dust Storm EAN Emergency Action Notification O EMG Notify EAT Emergency Action Termination O EMG Terminate EQW Earthquake Warning O Earthquake EVA Evacuation Watch O Evacuate Note EVI Immediate Evacuation O Evacuate Note FCW Food Contamination Warning O Food FFA Flash Flood W...

Page 764: ... Shelter In Place Warning O Shelter SVA Severe Thunderstorm Watch O Thunderstorm SVR Severe Thunderstorm Warning O Thunderstorm SVS Severe Weather Statement O Severe WX TOA Tornado Watch O Tornado TOE 911 Telephone Outage Emergency O 911 Phone Outage TOR Tornado Warning O Tornado TRA Tropical Strom Watch O Tropical Storm TRW Tropical Storm Warning O Tropical Storm TSA Tsunami Watch O Tsunami TSW T...

Page 765: ...commands or responses with long format are described like multi line because of the page width but their formats are only single line actually In set command only parameters are not changed 6 The set command is aborted if any format error is detected 7 INDEX or xxx_INDEX is the index of internal memory chain Dynamic Memory Allocation Structure always uses it as a handle to access data and to trace...

Page 766: ...k search hold mode QSC Set current frequency and get reception status CSC Go to Custom search and get reception status PWR Get RSSI Level STS Get Current Status GLG Get Reception Status JPM Jump Mode JNT Jump to Number Tag MNU Menu Mode System Information MDL Get Model Info VER Get Firmware Version Program Control Mode PRG Enter Program Mode EPG Exit Program Mode System Settings BLT Get Set Backli...

Page 767: ...t System Index Head O LIT Get Location Alert System Index Tail O CLA Create Location Alert System O DLA Delete Location Alert System O LIN Get Set Location Alert System Info O Search Close Call Settings SCO Get Set Search Close Call Settings O BBS Get Set Broadcast Screen Band Settings O SHK Get Set Search Key Settings O GLF Get Global Lockout Freq O ULF Unlock Global L O O LOF Lock Out Frequency ...

Page 768: ...ault Band Coverage Settings O GPS Settings GDO Get Set GPS Format O Band Scope Settings BSP Get Set Band Scope Settings O IF exchange list Settings GIE Get Global IF exchange Frequency O CIE Clear IF exchange Frequency O RIE Register IF exchange Frequency O TEST BAV Get Battery Voltage WIN Get Window Voltage ...

Page 769: ...Narrow Wide system site EDS EDACS SCAT system site LTR LTR system site TGID TGID ID_SRCH_MODE ID SCAN ID SEARCH Mode 0 ID SCAN Mode 1 ID SEARCH Mode NAME1 SYSTEM SITE NAME Alpha Tag NAME2 GROUP NAME Alpha Tag NAME3 TGID NAME Alpha Tag FUNCTION This command return TGID currently displayed on LCD If you get the TGID once the scanner returns r until next reception NOTE This command return r when TGID...

Page 770: ...R LIGHT LOCK KEY_MODE P Press L Long Press H Hold Press and Hold until Release receive R Release Cancel Hold state Ex 1 Press MENU KEY KEY M P r OK r Ex 2 Press F SCAN KEY KEY F P r Hold F KEY OK r KEY S P r Press SCAN KEY F SCAN KEY operation OK r KEY F P r Release F KEY OK r Ex 3 Press and Hold L O KEY KEY L L r OK r The status of KEY HOLD does time out in 10 seconds after having received the co...

Page 771: ...ON DLY Delay Time 10 5 2 0 1 2 5 10 30 CODE_SRCH CTCSS DCS Search 0 OFF 1 CTCSS DCS BSC Broadcast Screen 16digit each is 0 or 1 Band10 0 means OFF 1 means ON Band 2 Band 1 Reserve NOAA WX VHF TV UHF TV FM Pager REP Repeater Find 0 OFF 1 ON RSV Reserve Parameter This is always only This command is invalid when the scanner is in Menu Mode during Direct Entry operation during Quick Save operation FUN...

Page 772: ...ch 0 OFF 1 CTCSS DCS Search BSC Broadcast Screen 16digit each is 0 or 1 Band10 0 means OFF 1 means ON Band 2 Band 1 Reserve NOAA WX VHF TV UHF TV FM Pager REP Repeater Find 0 OFF 1 ON RSSI RSSI A D Value 0 1023 SQL Squelch Status 0 CLOSE 1 OPEN RSV Reserve Parameter This is always only This command is invalid when the scanner is in Menu Mode during Direct Entry operation during Quick Save operatio...

Page 773: ... OPEN This command outputs custom search status of each frequency sequentially Use CSC OFF command to stop the output This command is invalid when the scanner is in Menu Mode during Direct Entry operation during Quick Save operation COMMAND PWR Get RSSI Level Controller Radio PWR r Radio Controller PWR RSSI FRQ r RSSI RSSI A D Value 0 1023 FRQ Current Frequency Returns current RSSI level and its f...

Page 774: ...lay Mode 16char L8_CHAR Line8 Characters 16char fixed length L8_MODE Line8 Display Mode 16char SQL Squelch Status 0 CLOSE 1 OPEN MUT Mute Status 0 OFF 1 ON RSV Reserve Parameter This is always only 0 BAT Battery Low Status 0 No Alert 1 Alert WAT Weather Alert Status 0 No Alert 1 Alert Alert SAME CODE SIG_LVL Signal Level 0 5 RSV Reserve parameter always BK_DIMMER Backlight Dimmer 0 OFF 1 Low 2 Mid...

Page 775: ...HOLD L O System 1 Squelch Status CLOSE 851 0125MHz Mute Status ON P NFM ATT Battery Low Status No Alert S1 5 Weather Alert Status Alert GRP 2 WX STS r 011000 HOLD L O L1_CHAR L1_MODE SYSTEM 1 L2_CHAR L2_MODE 851 0125MHz L3_CHAR L3_MODE P NFM ATT L4_CHAR L4_MODE S1 5 L5_CHAR L5_MODE GRP 2 WX L6_CHAR L6_MODE 0 1 0 0 1 r Returns current scanner status ...

Page 776: ...h Status 0 CLOSE 1 OPEN MUT Mute Status 0 OFF 1 ON SYS_TAG Current system number tag 0 999 NONE CHAN_TAG Current channel number tag 0 999 NONE RSV Reserve parameter always Get reception status The Scanner returns GLG r until it detects a frequency or a TGID COMMAND JPM Jump Mode Controller Radio JPM JUMP_MODE INDEX r Radio Controller JPM OK r JUMP_MODE SCN_MODE Scan mode SVC_MODE Service Search mo...

Page 777: ...IST_MENU Search Global Lockout List Review Menu SETTING_MENU Setting Menu Note Scanner returns NG in the state that the mode switch cannot be done COMMAND JNT Jump to Number Tag Controller Radio JNT SYS_TAG CHAN_TAG r Radio Controller JNT OK r SYS_TAG System Number Tag 0 999 NONE CHAN_TAG Channel Number Tag 0 999 NONE When both SYS_TAG and CHAN_TAG are set as blank scanner returns error When SYS_T...

Page 778: ...Mode Controller Radio PRG r Radio Controller PRG OK r PRG NG r This command is invalid when the scanner is in Menu Mode during Direct Entry operation during Quick Save operation The scanner goes to Program Mode The scanner displays Remote Mode on first line and Keypad Lock on second line in Program Mode COMMAND EPG Exit Program Mode Controller Radio EPG r Radio Controller EPG OK r The scanner exit...

Page 779: ...ESS SQ SQUELCH RSV Reserve parameter always DIMMER Backlight Dimmer 1 Low 2 Middle 3 High Get Set Backlight Setting This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND BSV Get Set Battery Info Controller Radio BSV r BSV BAT_SAVE CHARGE_TIME r Radio Controller BSV BAT_SAVE CHARGE_TIME r BSV OK r BAT_SAVE Battery Save 0 OFF 1 ON CHARGE_TIME Battery Charge Time 1 16 ...

Page 780: ...ommand should not be send in 2 second Only PC Control Baud Rate does not become an initial setting value COMMAND CLR Clear All Memory Controller Radio CLR r Radio Controller CLR OK r All the memories are set for initial setting This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode Note It takes dozens of seconds Only PC Control Baud Rate does not become an initial setting value Memory index pointers...

Page 781: ...S OK r L1_CHAR Line1 Characters max 16char L2_CHAR Line2 Characters max 16char L3_CHAR Line3 Characters max 16char L4_CHAR Line4 Characters max 16char If only space code is set in character area the message returns default message This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND PRI Get Set Priority Mode Controller Radio PRI r Get Priority Mode Setting PRI PRI_MODE MAX_CHAN INTERVAL r R...

Page 782: ...oller SIT SYS_INDEX r Returns the last index of stored system list This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND QSL Get Set System Site Quick Lockout Controller Radio QSL r QSL PAGE0 PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 PAGE4 PAGE5 PAGE6 PAGE7 PAGE8 PAGE9 r Radio Controller QSL PAGE0 PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 PAGE4 PAGE5 PAGE6 PAGE7 PAGE8 PAGE9 r QSL OK r PAGE0 PAGE9 each is 0 2 0 Not assigned Displayed as on...

Page 783: ...r on the scanner 2 Off Displayed as on the scanner The Order of Quick Key is as same as LCD Icon 1 9 0 This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode It cannot turn on off the Quick Key that has no Group COMMAND CSY Create System Controller Radio CSY SYS_TYPE PROTECT r Radio Controller CSY SYS_INDEX r SYS_TYPE System Type CNV CONVENTIONAL MOT MOTOROLA TYPE EDC EDACS Narrow Wide EDS EDACS SCAT...

Page 784: ...S_TYPE System Type CNV CONVENTIONAL MOT MOTOROLA TYPE EDC EDACS Narrow Wide EDS EDACS SCAT LTR LTR NAME Name max 16char QUICK_KEY Quick Key 0 99 dot means none HLD System Hold Time 0 255 LOUT Lockout 0 Unlocked 1 Lockout DLY Delay Time 10 5 2 0 1 2 5 10 30 REV_INDEX Reverse System Index of the Scan Setting FWD_INDEX Forward System Index of the Scan Setting CHN_GRP_HEAD Channel Group Index Head of ...

Page 785: ...RP_HEAD ID_LOUT_GRP_TAIL MOT_ID RSV EMG_PATTERN RSV PRI_ID_SCAN r TRN OK r INDEX System Index ID_SEARCH ID Search Scan 0 ID Scan mode 1 Search Mode S_BIT Motorola Status Bit 0 Ignore 1 Yes END_CODE Motorola End Code 0 Ignore 1 Yes AFS EDACS ID Format 0 Decimal 1 AFS EMG Emergency Alert 0 Ignore 1 9 Alert EMGL Emergency Alert Level 0 OFF 1 15 FMAP Fleet Map 0 16 0 15 Preset 16 Custom CTM_FMAP Custo...

Page 786: ...Index Append Site to the system Returns 1 if the scanner failed to create because of no resource This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND SIF Get Set Site Info Controller Radio SIF INDEX r SIF INDEX NAME QUICK_KEY HLD LOUT MOD ATT RSV RSV RSV START_KEY LATITUDE LONGITUDE RANGE GPS_ENABLE RSV MOT_TYPE EDACS_TYPE RSV RSV r Radio Controller SIF RSV NAME QUICK_KEY HLD LOUT MOD ATT C...

Page 787: ... the system protect bit is ON except REV_INDEX FWD_INDEX SYS_INDEX CHN_HEAD CHN_TAIL other parameters will be send as a reserve parameter in the Radio Controller command This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND MCP Get Set Motorola Custom Band Plan Controller Radio MCP INDEX r MCP INDEX LOWER1 UPPER1 STEP1 OFFSET1 LOWER2 UPPER2 STEP2 OFFSET2 LOWER3 UPPER3 STEP3 OFFSET3 LOWER4 UP...

Page 788: ...SV NUMBER_TAG VOL_OFFSET RSV r Radio Controller TFQ FRQ LCN LOUT REV_INDEX FWD_INDEX SYS_INDEX GRP_INDEX RSV NU MBER_TAG VOL_OFFSET RSV r TFQ OK r CHN_INDEX Trunk Frequency Index FRQ Trunk Frequency LCN LCN EDACS WIDE NARROW system 0 to 20 LTR system 0 to 30 LOUT Lockout 0 Unlocked 1 Lockout REV_INDEX Reverse Frequency Index of the Site FWD_INDEX Forward Frequency Index of the Site SYS_INDEX Syste...

Page 789: ...COMMAND AGT Append TGID Group Controller Radio AGT SYS_INDEX r Radio Controller AGT GRP_INDEX r SYS_INDEX System Index GRP_INDEX appended TGID Group Index Append TGID Group to the system Returns 1 if the scanner failed to create because of no resource This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND DGR Delete Group Site Controller Radio DGR INDEX r Radio Controller DGR OK r INDEX Group...

Page 790: ...f the System FWD_INDEX Forward Group Index of the System SYS_INDEX System Index CHN_HEAD Channel Index Head of the Group List CHN_TAIL Channel Index Tail of the Group List SEQ_NO Group Sequence Number of the System LATITUDE North or South Latitude LONGITUDE West or East Longitude RANGE Range 1 250 1 0 5 mile or km GPS ENABLE GPS Location detection 0 OFF 1 ON Get Set Group Information In set comman...

Page 791: ...able in Programming Mode COMMAND ACT Append TGID Controller Radio ACT GRP_INDEX r Radio Controller ACT INDEX r GRP_INDEX TGID Group Index TGID_INDEX appended TGID Index Append TGID to the group Returns 1 if the scanner failed to create because of no resource This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND DCH Delete Channel Controller Radio DCH INDEX r Radio Controller DCH OK r INDEX C...

Page 792: ...Lockout 0 OFF 1 ON LOUT Lockout 0 Unlocked 1 Lockout PRI Priority 0 OFF 1 ON ALT Alert Tone 0 OFF 1 9 Tone No ALTL Alert Tone Level 0 AUTO 1 15 REV_INDEX Reverse Channel Index of the Chan0nel Group FWD_INDEX Forward Channel Index of the Channel Group SYS_INDEX System Index of the Channel GRP_INDEX Group Index of the Channel NUMBER_TAG Number tag 0 999 NONE ALT_PATTERN Alert Light Pattern 0 ON 1 SL...

Page 793: ...ert Light Pattern 0 ON 1 SLow 2 Fast VOL_OFFSET Volume Offset 3 3 Get Set TGID Information In set command only parameters are not changed The set command is aborted if any format error is detected This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode When the system protect bit is ON except REV_INDEX FWD_INDEX SYS_INDEX GRP_INDEX other parameters will be send as a reserve parameter in the Radio Cont...

Page 794: ... command again and again to get all L O TGID until the scanner returns 1 1 means that no more L O TGID exists This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND ULI Unlock TGID for Rvw L O ID Controller Radio ULI SYS_INDEX TGID r Radio Controller ULI OK r This command unlocks a L O TGID in a system The TGID is deleted from L O list This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMA...

Page 795: ...ng Mode COMMAND FWD Get Fwd Index Controller Radio FWD INDEX r Radio Controller FWD INDEX r INDEX Index of system site group channel TGID or Location Alert System Returns forward index of the index in the memory chain Returns 1 if no more index exists This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND RMB Get Remains of Memory Block Controller Radio RMB r Radio Controller RMB r Returns th...

Page 796: ...g Mode COMMAND LIH Get Location Alert System Index Head Controller Radio LIH LAS_TYPE r Radio Controller LIH INDEX r LAS_TYPE Location Alert Type POI POI DROAD Dangerous Road DXING Dangerous Xing Returns the first index of stored location alert system list This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND LIT Get Location Alert System Index Tail Controller Radio LIT LAS_TYPE r Radio Cont...

Page 797: ... created location alert system index The index is a handle to get set location alert system information Returns 1 if the scanner failed to create because of no resource This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND DLA Delete Location Alert System Controller Radio DLA INDEX r Radio Controller DLA OK r INDEX Location Alert System Index This command deletes a location alert system This...

Page 798: ...t Tone Level 0 AUTO 1 15 REV_INDEX Reverse System Index of Location Alert System FWD_INDEX Forward System Index of Location Alert System SEQ_NO Location Alert System Sequence Number LATITUDE North or South Latitude LONGITUDE West or East Longitude RANGE Range 1 80 1 0 05 mile or km SPEED Speed Limit 0 200 1 means 1 mile hour or km h DIR Heading 0 358 360 2 step 360 All range ALT_PATTERN Alert Ligh...

Page 799: ...s ON Band 2 Band 1 Reserve NOAA WX VHF TV UHF TV FM Pager REP Repeater Find 0 OFF 1 ON MAX_STORE Max Auto Store 1 256 Get Set Search Close Call Settings In set command only parameters are not changed The set command is aborted if any format error is detected This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND BBS Get Set Broadcast Screen Band Settings Controller Radio BBS INDEX r BBS INDEX...

Page 800: ...6 range CB CB Radio range CUSTOM_7 Custom 7 range FRS GMRS MURS FRS GMRS MURS range CUSTOM_8 Custom 8 range Racing Racing range CUSTOM_9 Custom 9 range FM FM Broadcast range CUSTOM_10 Custom 10 range Special Special range TONE_OUT Tone Out mode Get Set Search Key Settings This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND GLF Get Global Lockout Freq Controller Radio GLF r Radio Controller...

Page 801: ...ks a L O frequency The frequency is deleted from L O list This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND LOF Lock Out Frequency Controller Radio LOF FRQ r Radio Controller LOF OK r FRQ Frequency 250000 13000000 This command locks out a frequency The frequency is added to L O list This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode ...

Page 802: ...5 15 sec 30 30 sec 45 45 sec 60 60 sec INF Infinite CC_BAND Close Call Band 7digit each is 0 or 1 800MHz 0 means OFF UHF 1 means ON Reserve VHF HIGH AIR BAND VHF LOW2 VHF LOW1 LOUT Lockout for CC Hits with Scan 0 Unlocked 1 Lockout HLD System Hold Time for CC Hits with Scan 0 255 QUICK_KEY Quick Key for CC Hits with Scan 0 99 dot dot means that nothing is assigned NUMBER_TAG Number tag 0 999 NONE ...

Page 803: ...FF 1 ON HLD System Hold Time for Search with Scan 0 255 LOUT Lockout for Search with Scan 0 Unlocked 1 Lockout QUICK_KEY Quick Key 0 99 dot START_KEY Startup Configuration Key 0 9 dot NUMBER_TAG Number tag 0 999 NONE The set command is aborted if any format error is detected This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND CSG Get Set Custom Search Group Controller Radio CSG r CSG r Sta...

Page 804: ... Frequency n UPPER n Upper Frequency n STEP n Step n 500 5 0k 625 6 25k 1000 10 0k 1250 12 5k 1500 15 0k 1875 18 75k 2000 20 0k 2500 25 0k 3000 30 0k 3125 31 25k 3500 35 0k 3750 37 5k 4000 40 0k 4375 43 75k 4500 45 0k 5000 50 0k 5500 55 0k 5625 56 25k 6000 60 0k 6250 62 5k 6500 65 0k 6875 68 75k 7000 70 0k 7500 75 0k 8000 80 0k 8125 81 25k 8500 85 0k 8750 87 5k 9000 90 0k 9375 93 75k 9500 95 0k 10...

Page 805: ...pper Limit Frequency 250000 13000000 STP Search Step AUTO AUTO 833 8 33k 2000 20k 500 5k 1000 10k 2500 25k 625 6 25k 1250 12 5k 5000 50k 750 7 5 k 1500 15k 10000 100k MOD Modulation AUTO AM FM NFM WFM FMB ATT Attenuation 0 OFF 1 ON DLY Delay Time 10 5 2 0 1 2 5 10 30 HLD System Hold Time 0 255 LOUT Lockout 0 Unlocked 1 Lockout C CH Control Channel Only 0 OFF 1 ON QUICK_KEY Quick Key 0 99 dot START...

Page 806: ...ramming Mode COMMAND SGP Get Set SAME Group Settings Controller Radio SGP SAME_INDEX r SGP SAME_INDEX NAME FIPS1 FIPS2 FIPS3 FIPS4 FIPS5 FIPS6 FIPS7 FIPS8 r Radio Controller SGP NAME FIPS1 FIPS2 FIPS3 FIPS4 FIPS5 FIPS6 FIPS7 FIPS8 r SGP OK r SAME_INDEX SAME Index 1 5 NAME SAME Group Name max 16char FIPS1 8 FIPS Code 6digit 000000 999999 or means none Get Set SAME Group Settings In set command only...

Page 807: ... 0 OFF 1 ON DLY Delay Time 0 1 2 5 10 30 INF Infinite ALT Alert Tone 0 OFF 1 9 Tone No ALTL Alert Tone Level 0 AUTO 1 15 TONE_A Tone A Frequency ex 10000 means 1000 0Hz 00000 means 0 0Hz RSV Reserve Parameter This is always only TONE_B Tone B Frequency ALT_PATTERN Alert Light Pattern 0 ON 1 SLow 2 Fast Get Set Tone Out Settings This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND CNT Get Se...

Page 808: ...DE1 2 MODE2 3 MODE3 CH_LOG Control Channel Logging 0 OFF 1 ON 2 Extend G_ATT Global attenuator 0 OFF 1 ON RSV Reserve Parameter This is always only Get Set Scanner Option Settings This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND VOL Get Set Volume Level Settings Controller Radio VOL r VOL LEVEL r Radio Controller VOL LEVEL r VOL OK r LEVEL Volume Level 0 15 COMMAND SQL Get Set Squelch L...

Page 809: ... FMB This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND GDO Get Set GPS Disp Option Controller Radio GDO r GDO DISP_MODE UNIT TIME_FORMAT TIME_ZONE POS_FORMAT r Radio Controller GDO DISP_MODE UNIT TIME_FORMAT TIME_ZONE POS_FORMAT r GDO OK r DISP_MODE Display GPS Mode 0 ETA 1 Clock 2 Elevation 3 Speed 4 Location UNIT Distance Unit 0 mile 1 km TIME_FORMAT Time Format 0 12 H 1 24H TIME_ZONE ...

Page 810: ...Hold Display 0 OFF 1 ON Get Set Band Scope System Settings In set command only parameters are not changed The set command is aborted if any format error is detected This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND GIE Get Global IF exchange Frequency Controller Radio GIE r Radio Controller GIE FRQ r GIE 1 r FRQ IF Exchange Frequency 250000 13000000 This command is used to get Global IF ...

Page 811: ...quency 250000 13000000 This command register Frequency to Global IF exchange Frequency list This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode COMMAND BAV Get Battery Voltage Controller Radio BAV r Radio Controller BAV r A D Value 0 1023 Battery Level V 3 2 V 2 1023 Returns current battery voltage This command is for test mode COMMAND WIN Get Window Voltage Controller Radio WIN r Radio Controller...

Page 812: ...3 DCS 043 134 DCS 047 135 DCS 051 136 DCS 053 137 DCS 054 138 DCS 065 139 DCS 071 140 DCS 072 141 DCS 073 142 DCS 074 143 DCS 114 144 DCS 115 145 DCS 116 146 DCS 122 147 DCS 125 148 DCS 131 149 DCS 132 150 DCS 134 151 DCS 143 152 DCS 145 153 DCS 152 154 DCS 155 155 DCS 156 156 DCS 162 157 DCS 165 158 DCS 172 159 DCS 174 160 DCS 205 161 DCS 212 162 DCS 223 163 DCS 225 164 DCS 226 165 DCS 243 166 DC...

Page 813: ...255 FONT DATA Character pattern of 8 x 16 dot This character pattern is Large Font In this document characters of these areas are described as normal characters ...

Page 814: ...256 ...

Page 815: ...257 ...

Page 816: ...258 ...

Page 817: ...259 ...

Page 818: ...260 ...

Page 819: ...261 Character pattern of 8 x 8 dot This character pattern is Small Font ...

Page 820: ...262 ...

Page 821: ...263 ...

Page 822: ...ighted item appears in reversed out text To select the highlighted item or confirm an option setting tap E YES or press down on the SELECT VOLUME SQUELCH knob To cancel an option setting press NO To go back one level in the menu tap MENU To exit the menu press LOCKOUT The scanner goes back to the operating mode it was in before you entered the menu This page applies to the following scanner s BC34...

Page 823: ...iven time The diagram shows common icon locations and table below lists the most common icons and their meanings Attenuator icon Steady The attenuator is turned on for the current channel Blinking The attenuator is turned on globally for all channels Battery level icon x xx The remaining battery voltage is displayed in place of the Xs file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D nts temp CDImag...

Page 824: ...lose call signal Reversed filled icon Steady Close call DND mode is on Function icon Steady You tapped the FUNCTION key the scanner will remember the FUNCTION key combination for the next 3 seconds Blinking You pressed held the FUNCTION key the scanner will remember the FUNCTION key combination until you tap FUNCTION again Group number line GRP In Scan mode The group Quick Key numbers GQK of any u...

Page 825: ...ned on Blinking Priority Plus scan is turned on REP icon The Repeater Find feature is turned on Signal level icon This icon displays the strength of the current signal the icon ranges from zero bars no signal to five bars strong signal System number line Sx In Scan mode The system site Quick Key numbers SQK of any unlocked systems or sites are displayed on this line The SQK number of the system or...

Page 826: ...displays In some operation modes the display can be very different from the main display These modes also have 2 or 3 different displays you can cycle through Band Scope mode display Hold mode displays GPS mode display This page applies to the following scanner s BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346XTDisplays html 4 of 4 5 26 2009...

Page 827: ...tings POpitz My 20Documents temp C e_090515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 ConventionalSystems RRConvList png file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docum nual rsrc UnidenMan4 ConventionalSystems RRConvList png5 26 2009 11 14 39 AM ...

Page 828: ...ings POpitz My 20Documents temp C e_090515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 ConventionalSystems Layoutconv png file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docume anual rsrc UnidenMan4 ConventionalSystems Layoutconv png5 26 2009 11 14 40 AM ...

Page 829: ...ings POpitz My 20Documents temp C 090515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 ConventionalSystems LayoutLegend png file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docume ual rsrc UnidenMan4 ConventionalSystems LayoutLegend png5 26 2009 11 14 41 AM ...

Page 830: ...stem Worksheet System Name System Number Tag System Quick Key Group Name Group Quick Key System Startup Key Location Info Channel information Frequency Name Alpha Tag Number Tag CTCSS DCS NAC Priority Modulation Alert ...

Page 831: ......

Page 832: ...he system is created if you need to change the system type delete the system and create it all over again as a new system The System Type options are P25 Use for any P25 system When you select this system type the scanner prompts you to choose Standard Trunk or One Freq MOT Use for any Motorola system EDCS Use for any EDACs system When you select this system type the scanner prompts you to choose ...

Page 833: ...the order they were created select the site you want to edit or select New Site to create a new one Edit Group This menu lets you create groups and edit existing groups All existing groups are listed in Group Quick Key order select the group you want to edit or select New Group to create a new one You can have up to 20 groups in each system Copy System Make a copy of this system and all its settin...

Page 834: ...idenMan4 TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCD396XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ments temp CDImage_090515 Manual ProgramSystem html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11 14 42 AM ...

Page 835: ...ntional system options Set Quick Key Set Startup Key Set Lockout Set Hold Time P25 Waiting Time BCD396XT and BCD996XT Only Trunked system options ID Scan Search Priority ID Scan Emergency Alert Set ID Format DEC HEX or AFS DEC Rvw ID Srch L O Clr All L O IDs Motorola system options Edit Fleet Map Set Status Bit Set End Code P25 System options BCD396XT and BCD996XT Only P25 NAC Option Global system...

Page 836: ...he scanner leave after 5 seconds or 2 seconds respectively Set Audio AGC Turn on Automatic Gain Control AGC for this system When you activate this feature the scanner automatically adjusts the volume for each channel based on the signal strength You can turn on the gain control for Analog and Digital signals separately To change the settings for the audio AGC see Adjust Audio AGC Set Record BCD996...

Page 837: ...k or unlock it during power up Enter a number from 0 to 9 tap NO the decimal point if you don t want to assign this system or site to a Startup Key For more information see Startup Keys Set Lockout Decide whether you want to lock out the system so the scanner will ignore it during Scan and Search modes If you lock out a system all channels within that system are locked out Choose one of the follow...

Page 838: ...sion up to the wait time you set here Select the number of milliseconds after the start of a transmission the scanner should wait while checking for P25 data Choose a number from 0 through 1000 ms in 100 ms increments The scanner only applies the wait time setting to Conventional or Motorola non P25 systems and only when the channel s Audio Mode setting is All Trunked system options The following ...

Page 839: ...mal base 16 format for the Talk Group IDs available for P25 and Motorola systems only AFS The system uses the Agency Fleet Subfleet format for the Talk Group IDs available for EDACS wide or narrow systems only Rvw ID Srch L O This feature displays a list of all locked out Talk Group IDs If you want to unlock a Talk Group ID just select it from the list and press YES Clr All L O IDs Choose yes to u...

Page 840: ... BC346XT and BCT15X Yes The scanner recognizes end transmission codes Ignore The scanner waits for the carrier to drop before leaving a channel P25 System options BCD396XT and BCD996XT Only The following options are available when only when you re editing a P25 system P25 NAC Option P25 single frequency systems only Choose whether the scanner limits reception to transmissions that include a specif...

Page 841: ...TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual EditSysOption html 7 of 7 5 26 2009 11 14 43 AM ...

Page 842: ...ter a name or edit the existing one Names can be 16 characters long and they can contain upper and lower case letters punctuation and spaces Turn the SELECT VOLUME SQUELCH knob on the handheld scanners or the SCROLL FUNCTION knob on mobile scanners to choose the character you want then press 6 right cursor to move the cursor to the next character Set Quick Key Assign this group to a Quick Key so y...

Page 843: ...you lock out the channel group all channels in the group are also ignored during Scan and Search Choose one of the following options Unlocked The channel group is not locked out Temporary L O The channel group is locked out until you turn the scanner off and back on Lockout The channel group is permanently locked out Delete Group Delete this group and all its settings including any channels and fr...

Page 844: ...y represented like 44 58 12 79 N Your scanner uses this format Decimal degrees simply use the degrees expressed as a decimal number 44 59 12 equates to 44 97381 Degrees Mathematically you can change DMS to Deg using the formula DDD MM 60 SS ss 3600 You would perform the reverse calculation to convert Deg to DMS To more easily convert Decimal Degrees to the DDD MM SS sss format or vice versa see th...

Page 845: ...is site or channel group when you leave the range and enable the site or channel group when you are within the range This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual SetLocationInfo html 2 of 2 5 26 2009 11 14 44 AM ...

Page 846: ... scanner prompts you to enter the frequency in a conventional system or the Talk Group ID in a trunked system for the channel you can edit these at any time through this menu Edit Frequency conventional systems Edit Talk Group ID trunked systems Options available for all channels Edit Name Set Audio Type Set Number Tag Set Modulation Set Attenuator Set Priority Set Alert Set Record BCD996XT and BC...

Page 847: ... knob on mobile scanners to choose the character you want then press 6 right cursor to move the cursor to the next character Set Audio Type Select the type of audio signal contained on this channel Choose Digital Only or Analog Only according to the signal type select All if this channel might contain both digital and analog signals Set Number Tag Assign a number to this system or channel that you...

Page 848: ...ks it during priority scans and searches Set Alert This menu lets you configure whether the scanner triggers an alert tone and light whenever this channel or frequency becomes active Compare this to the system setting Emergency Alert which triggers a tone and light when a Talk Group contains an emergency flag The available options for Set Alert Tone and Set Alert Light are common to both types of ...

Page 849: ...el and all its settings into the buffer When a channel is stored in the buffer the scanner adds Paste Channel to the bottom of the Program Channel menu whenever you are editing a compatible system that is a system that is the same type as the one you copied the channel from Delete Channel Delete this frequency or channel and all associated settings New Channel Create a new channel Analog channel o...

Page 850: ...you to enter a CTCSS or DCS code that you want to lockout for this channel The scanner will not open squelch if the received signal contains a matching CTCSS or DCS tone Digital channel options The following options are available only when the Audio Type is set to Digital P25 NAC Option Choose whether the scanner limits reception to transmissions that include a specific Network Access Code NAC for...

Page 851: ...adjust the volume when it tunes to this channel or frequency Enter one of the following options Softer No Change Louder 3 2 1 0 default 1 2 3 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docum ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual TemplateVolumeOffset html5 26 2009 11 14 46 AM ...

Page 852: ...d 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents te 090515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 EDACSSCATSystems RREDACSSCAT png file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ual rsrc UnidenMan4 EDACSSCATSystems RREDACSSCAT png5 26 2009 11 14 46 AM ...

Page 853: ...20Settings POpitz My 20Documents tem e_090515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 EDACSSCATSystems LayoutSCAT png file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Doc anual rsrc UnidenMan4 EDACSSCATSystems LayoutSCAT png5 26 2009 11 14 47 AM ...

Page 854: ...Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp _090515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 EDACSSCATSystems LayoutLegend png file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docu nual rsrc UnidenMan4 EDACSSCATSystems LayoutLegend png5 26 2009 11 14 47 AM ...

Page 855: ...es EDC any EDACS system LTR any LTR system MOT any Motorola system P25 a standard P25 system 1FQ a single frequency P25 system Options available for all sites Edit Name Set Quick Key Set Startup Key Set Frequencies Set Modulation Set Attenuator Set Lockout Set Hold Time Set LocationInfo Set State BCT15X Only Delete Site New Site Options available for Motorola systems Edit Band Plan P25 Waiting Tim...

Page 856: ...easily enable or disable it during scanning Enter a number from 0 to 99 tap NO the decimal point if you don t want to assign this system or site to a Quick Key For more information see Quick Keys Set Startup Key Assign this system or site to a Startup Key so you can lock or unlock it during power up Enter a number from 0 to 9 tap NO the decimal point if you don t want to assign this system or site...

Page 857: ... locked out Temporary L O The site is locked out until you turn the scanner off and back on Lockout The site is permanently locked out Set Hold Time Set the minimum number of seconds the scanner should spend checking this system or site even if there is no traffic on any channel The scanner always checks each channel in a system or site once even if the hold time is set to 0 seconds Select the num...

Page 858: ...band plan information in the control channel data However if a system does not include this information you can program it manually The scanner will prompt you for the following information Band plan number Select one of the 16 available band plan slots Input Base Freq Enter the lower limit of the band frequency Valid frequencies are between 25 00000 MHz and 1300 00000 MHz at each 5 0 Hz step 25 0...

Page 859: ...base frequency of 534 02585 MHz and 127 750 kHz between each channel Options available for EDACS systems Set Site Type Select Wide standard or Narrow according to the EDACS site type Volume Offset EDACS SCAT Only The scanner can automatically adjust the volume when it tunes to this channel or frequency Enter one of the following options Softer No Change Louder 3 2 1 0 default 1 2 3 This page appli...

Page 860: ...er site depending on the number of TGID in the entire system Set Frequencies Edit Frequency Set Lockout Delete Frequency New Frequency LTR and EDACS system options LCN Logical Channel Number EDACS SCAT system options Set Number Tag Volume Offset Set Record BCD996XT and BCT15X Only Edit Frequency Enter a valid frequency for this band If the frequency is invalid or if it already exists the scanner s...

Page 861: ...r edit an exisitng frequency the scanner prompts you enter a logical channel number LCN Enter a number from 1 through 20 for an LTR system or a number from 1 through 30 for an EDACS wide or narrow system EDACS SCAT system options When you re editing site frequencies within an EDACS SCAT system you have the following additional options Set Number Tag Assign a number to this system or channel that y...

Page 862: ...d BCD996XT and BCT15X Only Turn on this option to have the scanner output transmissions from the RECORD OUT jack This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual SetFrequencies html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11 14 49 AM ...

Page 863: ...0Settings POpitz My 20Documents tem 0515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 EDACSTrunkedSystems RREDACSWide gif file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docu al rsrc UnidenMan4 EDACSTrunkedSystems RREDACSWide gif5 26 2009 11 14 49 AM ...

Page 864: ...Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp 90515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 EDACSTrunkedSystems LayoutEDACS png file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docu al rsrc UnidenMan4 EDACSTrunkedSystems LayoutEDACS png5 26 2009 11 14 50 AM ...

Page 865: ...EDACS LTR System Worksheet A System Name System Number Tag Group Name Group Quick Key Location Info Channel information Talk Group ID TGID Name Alpha Tag Number Tag Priority Alert ...

Page 866: ...System Worksheet B System Name System Number Tag Site Name Site Type Site Quick Key Site Number Tag Location Info Site Startup Key Channel information Frequency Name Alpha Tag Number Tag Priority Modulation Alert ...

Page 867: ...For Scan mode you program each individual frequency or Talk Group ID you want the scanner to check for Search mode you designate a range of frequencies and the scanner will check each individual frequency that falls within that range With trunked systems Scan mode and Search mode are very similar so the scanner can combine the two in a single operation switching from one to the other depending on ...

Page 868: ... with the system or site assigned to SQK 1 In the system the scanner first checks any unlocked groups assigned to group Quick Keys GQKs in ascending order starting with the system or site assigned to SQK 1 through GQK 0 The scanner then checks any remaining unlocked groups in that system in the order in which you created them If none of the groups in the system have been assigned to GQKs the scann...

Page 869: ... field is set to Locked Out or Temporary L O A channel or frequency is considered locked if the group containing it is locked its Set Lockout field is set to Locked Out or Temporary L O Key operation in Scan mode Special keys Turn the SELECT VOLUME SCROLL knob to change the direction of the scan While monitoring a channel turn the SELECT VOLUME SCROLL knob to resume scanning FUNCTION turn the SELE...

Page 870: ...al scan NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Toggle Close Call Modes Disable the channel groups assigned to this Group Quick Key GQK Tap again to enable FUNCTION Press hold Enter Close Call Only mode NA NA NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Scan Search 4 IF exchange 5 Volume offset 6 Display mode Tap Resume scanning Disable the systems or sites assigned to this System Site Quick Key SQK Tap again to enable file...

Page 871: ...ttenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modulation Tap Temporarily lock out the current channel frequency or location until you turn off the scanner Disable the systems or sites assigned to this System Site Quick Key SQK Tap again to enable Double Tap Permanently lock out the current channel frequency or location NA NA NA Press hold Unlock all channels groups and frequencies in the current system NA NA NA fil...

Page 872: ...nter GPS Tap Turn on the LCD backlight Start a 2 digit SQK entry The next two digits will be treated as the SQK During a system message Cancel the message and exit that screen Disable the systems or sites assigned to System Site Quick Key 0 Tap again to enable Edit the current channel Press hold Turn the scanner on or off NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Lock or unlock the keypad Toggle Priority mode NA Ente...

Page 873: ...ENU to go to the Search for menu During a Quick Search FUNCTION tap MENU to go to the Srch CloCall Opt menu Keypad controls Key Name 2nd operation Action On HOLD Close Call 1 Search 1 2 Search 2 3 Search 3 Tap Enter Hold mode Disable the custom search range assigned to this key Tap again to enable FUNCTION Tap Toggle Close Call modes Start the search range assigned to this Search Key FUNCTION Pres...

Page 874: ...the display mode Key Name 2nd operation Action on Lockout 7 Attenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modulation Tap Temporarily lock out the current frequency until you turn off the scanner Disable the custom search range assigned to this key Tap again to enable Double Tap Permanently lock out the current frequency NA NA NA Press hold Unlock all frequencies from search and Close Call modes NA NA NA file C Doc...

Page 875: ...imal Priority 0 Weather Yes Enter GPS Tap Turn on the LCD backlight During a system message Cancel the message and exit that screen Disable the search range assigned to this key Tap again to enable Store the current frequency Press hold Turn the scanner on or off NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Lock or unlock the keypad NA Change the WX Alert Priority settings Enter GPS mode FUNCTION Press hold NA NA Enter ...

Page 876: ...ScanMode UnidenMan4 TWiki file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual ScanMode html 10 of 10 5 26 2009 11 14 57 AM ...

Page 877: ...ll channel Motorola P25 BCD396XT and BCD996XT Only or EDACS LTR systems Motorola Type I Systems Enter the Talk Group ID in the following format BFFF SS B Block 1 digit F Fleet 2 3 digits S Sub Fleet 1 2 digits Press the decimal key to enter the hyphen If you try to enter a hexadecimal TGID for a Type I system the scanner treats the entry as a decimal number Motorola Type II Systems Decimal format ...

Page 878: ...cter Press yes when you re finished EDACS Wide or Narrow Systems AFS format Enter the Talk Group ID in the following format AA FFS A Agency 00 15 F Fleet 00 15 S Sub fleet 0 7 Press the decimal key to enter the hyphen Leave the Fleet or Sub Fleet empty to treat it as a wildcard any Sub Fleet within that Fleet For example 15 will match all TGIDs for Agency 15 15 04 will match all TGIDs for Agency 1...

Page 879: ... A Area Code 0 or 1 H Home repeater 01 20 U User ID 000 254 Press the decimal key to enter the hyphen Leave the User ID empty to treat it as a wildcard For example 1 15 will match all User IDs for Area Code 1 Home repeater 15 This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual Edi...

Page 880: ...ettings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 LTRTrunkedSystems RRLTR gif file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docu 515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 LTRTrunkedSystems RRLTR gif5 26 2009 11 14 58 AM ...

Page 881: ...Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp ge_090515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 LTRTrunkedSystems LayoutLTR PNG file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docu Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 LTRTrunkedSystems LayoutLTR PNG5 26 2009 11 14 59 AM ...

Page 882: ...ttings POpitz My 20Documents temp 90515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 MotorolaTrunkedSystems RRMOT800a gif file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docum al rsrc UnidenMan4 MotorolaTrunkedSystems RRMOT800a gif5 26 2009 11 15 00 AM ...

Page 883: ...ttings POpitz My 20Documents temp 90515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 MotorolaTrunkedSystems RRMOT800b gif file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docum al rsrc UnidenMan4 MotorolaTrunkedSystems RRMOT800b gif5 26 2009 11 15 01 AM ...

Page 884: ...Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp 90515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 MotorolaTrunkedSystems RRMOTUHF gif file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docu al rsrc UnidenMan4 MotorolaTrunkedSystems RRMOTUHF gif5 26 2009 11 15 01 AM ...

Page 885: ...Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp 90515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 MotorolaTrunkedSystems RRMOTVHF gif file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docu al rsrc UnidenMan4 MotorolaTrunkedSystems RRMOTVHF gif5 26 2009 11 15 01 AM ...

Page 886: ...tings POpitz My 20Documents temp C 5 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 MotorolaTrunkedSystems LayoutMotorola png file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docum rc UnidenMan4 MotorolaTrunkedSystems LayoutMotorola png5 26 2009 11 15 02 AM ...

Page 887: ...ksheet A scan System Name System Number Tag System Type Group Name Group Quick Key available types Type I Type II 800 MHz Standard 800 MHz Splinter UHF VHF Channel information TGID Number Tag Name Alpha Tag Priority Alert ...

Page 888: ...mber Tag System Type Site Name Site Quick Key available types Type I Type II 800 MHz Standard 800 MHz Splinter UHF VHF Location Info Frequency information Band Plan Infomation Frequency Name Alpha Tag Number Tag Band Plan Lower Limit Upper Limit Spacing step Offset ...

Page 889: ... Block 4 Block 4 Block 4 Block 5 Block 5 Block 5 Block 5 Block 6 Block 6 Block 6 Block 6 Block 7 Block 7 Block 7 Block 7 Fleet Map Fleet Map Fleet Map Fleet Map Block Information Block Information Block Information Block Information Block Size Code Block Size Code Block Size Code Block Size Code Block 0 Block 0 Block 0 Block 0 Block 1 Block 1 Block 1 Block 1 Block 2 Block 2 Block 2 Block 2 Block 3...

Page 890: ...o create a custom band plan for a Motorola VHF UHF and 800 MHz Rebanded system When you select Custom the scanner prompts you for the following information Band plan number Select one of the 6 available band plan numbers from Band Plan 1 through Band Plan 6 Set Base Freq 1 Input the lower limit of the band frequency 2 Input the upper limit of the band frequency See Calculating upper base frequenci...

Page 891: ... selecting 800MHz Custom as the Motorola system type Once you create the system you can set the custom band plan as follows 1 Edit System Option Edit Band Plan 2 Select the band plan entry to edit 3 Set each of the following entries for the band plan a Set Base Freq Lower and Upper b Set Offset c Set Spacing For standard rebanded systems you need to set Band Plan 1 and Band Plan 2 as Band Plan Bas...

Page 892: ...TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual EditBandPlan html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11 15 05 AM ...

Page 893: ...tings POpitz My 20Documents temp C _090515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 StandardP25TrunkedSystems RRP25 gif file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docum ual rsrc UnidenMan4 StandardP25TrunkedSystems RRP25 gif5 26 2009 11 15 18 AM ...

Page 894: ...d 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp C 515 Manual rsrc UnidenMan4 StandardP25TrunkedSystems Layout 20 AM file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docum rsrc UnidenMan4 StandardP25TrunkedSystems LayoutP25 png5 26 2009 11 15 ...

Page 895: ...ttings POpitz My 20Documents temp rc UnidenMan4 SingleFrequencyP25TrunkedSystems LayoutP251freq PNG file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docum an4 SingleFrequencyP25TrunkedSystems LayoutP251freq PNG5 26 2009 11 15 21 AM ...

Page 896: ...ld Mode Key Name 2nd operation Action On PRIORITY 1 Search 1 2 Search 2 3 Search 3 Tap Toggle priority mode Enter the digit in Direct Entry FUNCTION Tap Toggle priority mode Start the search range assigned to this Search Key Key Name 2nd operation Action on Weather 4 IF exchange 5 Level offset 6 Display mode Tap Toggle Weather Priority Mode Enter the digit in Direct Entry FUNCTION Tap Toggle Weath...

Page 897: ...ency show the repeater reverse frequency for the current frequency the scanner returns to the original frequency when you release the key NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Menu No Decimal 0 Yes Enter Tap Enter the Menu Mode If you ve entered a system number tag channel number tag in Direct Entry go to the specified system and channel Enter a decimal point hyphen or i for Direct Entry Enter 0 in ...

Page 898: ...all mode Change backlight level Resume scanning Resume scanning Press Hold Go to Close Call Only mode NA NA Hold on the current system and resume scanning FUNCTION Tap Go to Tone Out Mode Go to P25 status mode Go to the Quick Search prompt NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on LOCKOUT SCROLL FUNCTION Rotate NA Scroll through channels Function Rotate NA Scroll through systems file C Documents 20and 2...

Page 899: ...ls in the current system Latch the FUNCTION mode Scanner stays on the current system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION mode until you tap the control again Function Press Hold Prompt to Unlock All Systems Y N If you press E Yes the scanner unlocks and enables all systems sites and searches NA Reading the displays in Hold mode The display information in Hold mode varies depending on the type of s...

Page 900: ...he display at the bottom of the diagram tap FUNCTION For an explanation of System and Channel Number Tags see Number Tags For an explanation of the volume offset level see Volume Offset Trunked system display file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 s temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTHoldMode html 5 of 7 5 26 2009 11 15 35 AM ...

Page 901: ...BCD996XTHoldMode UnidenMan4 TWiki Service search with scan hold display file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 s temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTHoldMode html 6 of 7 5 26 2009 11 15 35 AM ...

Page 902: ...Mode UnidenMan4 TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 s temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTHoldMode html 7 of 7 5 26 2009 11 15 35 AM ...

Page 903: ...ey Safe Mode Off then returns to the operation it was performing when you turned it off While Key Safe mode is on MENU is disabled along with the key combinations described in the table below When you try to use a disabled key combination the scanner display shows Key Safe Mode Press FUNC while Power On for Full Operation The table below shows which key combinations are disabled and which ones ope...

Page 904: ... Action on GPS 7 Attenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modulation Tap Disabled Normal Operation Press hold Disabled NA FUNCTION Tap while holding Disabled Disabled Normal Operation Disabled FUNCTION Tap while scanning Disabled Normal Operation FUNCTION Press hold NA Disabled Normal Operation NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Menu No Decimal 0 Yes Enter Tap Disabled Normal Operation Normal Operation Disab...

Page 905: ...s key is disabled In Search mode this operates as the Resume function Normal Operation Press Hold Disabled NA NA Normal Operation FUNCTION Tap Disabled Normal Operation Disabled Normal Operation Key Name 2nd operation Action on LOCKOUT SCROLL FUNCTION Rotate NA Normal Operation Tap Normal Operation temporary lockout only Normal Operation file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 2 mp CDImage_090...

Page 906: ...eration temporary lockout only NA Press Hold Disabled Normal Operation This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 2 mp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTKeySafeMode html 4 of 4 5 26 2009 11 15 38 AM ...

Page 907: ...bine the two in a single operation switching from one to the other depending on the settings of each individual system Scanning trunked systems The scanner scans a system if the ID Scan Search option is set to ID Scan The scanner only checks for activity on unlocked Talk Group IDs that are programmed for this system If any programmed Talk Group ID becomes active the scanner switches to the voice c...

Page 908: ...hecks all unlocked trunked systems not assigned to an SQK in alphabetical order based on the system s Name The scanner checks groups within each system as described in step 1 4 Searches through the designated general service frequencies Public safety Military Air etc 5 Searches through any unlocked frequencies saved in the Custom Search list 6 Checks any frequencies saved in the Close Call Hits li...

Page 909: ... Level offset 6 Display mode Tap Toggle Weather Alert priority mode Disable the systems or sites assigned to this System Site Quick Key SQK Tap again to enable Press Hold Weather Scan NA FUNCTION Tap Toggle Weather Alert priority Mode Disable the channel groups in the current system assigned to this Group Quick Key GQK Tap again to enable FUNCTION Press Hold Weather Scan NA Key Name 2nd operation ...

Page 910: ...ng menu for the current system Start a 2 digit SQK entry The next two digits will be treated as the SQK During a system message Cancel the message and exit that screen Disable or enable the channel groups in the current system assigned to Group Quick Key 0 GQK 0 Tap again to enable If stopped on a channel edit the current channel Key Name 2nd operation Action on SQUELCH VOLUME SCAN SEARCH HOLD RES...

Page 911: ...g a conventional system go to Quick Search mode Hold on the current channel Key Name 2nd operation Action on LOCKOUT SCROLL FUNCTION Rotate NA Change scan direction If stopped on a channel resume scanning Tap If stopped on a channel temporarily lockout the channel Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress Double Tap If stopped on a channel permanently lockout the channel NA file C Documents...

Page 912: ...h mode FUNCTION turn the SCROLL knob to select a custom search range The scanner starts at the custom search range you select here FUNCTION tap MENU to go to the Search for menu During a Quick Search FUNCTION tap MENU to go to the Srch CloCall Opt menu Keypad controls Key Name 2nd operation Action On PRIORITY 1 Search 1 2 Search 2 3 Search 3 Tap NA Disable the custom search range assigned to this ...

Page 913: ...e modulation FUNCTION Press hold NA Toggle the attenuator state for all signals If stopped on a frequency that has a valid reverse input frequency show the repeater reverse frequency for the current frequency the scanner returns to the original frequency when you release the key NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Menu No Decimal 0 Yes Enter Tap Enter the Menu Mode NA Disable the search range assi...

Page 914: ...UNCTION Tap Go to Fire Tone Out Mode Go to P25 status mode Resume Searching Hold on the current frequency Key Name 2nd operation Action on LOCKOUT SCROLL FUNCTION Rotate NA Change search direction If stopped on a frequency resume searching Tap If stopped on a frequency temporarily lockout the frequency Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress Double Tap If stopped on a frequency permanentl...

Page 915: ...earch frequencies Latch the FUNCTION mode Scanner stays on the current system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION mode until you tap the control again This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 s temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTScanMode html 9 of 9 5 26 2009 11 15 46 AM ...

Page 916: ...t Audio AGC Set Upside down Adjust Contrast Set C CH Output Set GPS Format Set Pos Format Set Time Format Set Time Zone Set Unit Set Serial Port Band Defaults Set Modulation Set Step P25 LP Filter See Scanner Info Memory Used Firmware Version Set Backlight This menu lets you configure the display and key backlight file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996...

Page 917: ... of the backlight Your options are blue red magenta green cyan yellow and white Adjust Key Beep Select the volume level Level 1 through Level 15 you want the keybeep to use or select Auto to have the scanner sound the keybeep without changing the volume If you don t want the scanner to beep when you press the keys select Off Adjust Audio AGC Configure how the scanner handles the Automatic Gain Con...

Page 918: ...lows a wider variation in volume _0_ to 15 default 6 NA Set Upside down Lets you invert the display Useful if you are mounting the scanner in an overhead space Adjust Contrast Select one of the 15 available contrast levels for the display As you scroll through the options the display adjusts to the highlighted contrast level press YES when you see the display contrast you want to use Set C CH Outp...

Page 919: ...r time format Set Time Zone Set the number of hours your local time zone differs from universal time GMT UTC Select from 14 hours to 14 hours in half hour 0 5 h increments Set Unit Select the unit used for distance mile or kilometer km Set Serial Port Select the port you are adjusting Set Front Port or Set Rear Port Then set the baud rate for the selected serial port Choose from 4800 9600 19200 38...

Page 920: ...p 5 0 6 25 7 5 8 33 10 0 12 5 15 0 20 0 25 0 50 0 or 100 0 kHz P25 LP Filter This setting lets you set the scanner to apply a software filter that removes the 4kHz tone you can hear on some P25 systems Note that turning on this setting increases the CPU load and could slightly degrade P25 decode performance on some systems See Scanner Info This menu lets you see detailed information about the memo...

Page 921: ...lectronic serial number ESN checksum SUM and major firmware version number M Ver of the scanner This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCD996XTSettings html 6 of 6 5 26 2009 11 15 47 AM ...

Page 922: ...a single band plan Base 759 Offset Step Where Base the lower base frequency listed in RRDB Offset the offset for this entry Step the step for this entry For sites with multiple band plans Upper Basen Basen Offsetn 1 1 Offsetn Stepn Where Basen is the lower base frequency for the entry Offsetn 1 is the Offset for the next band plan for the last table use 760 Offsetn is the offset for this band plan...

Page 923: ... get For entry A Upper BaseA BaseA OffsetB 1 OffsetA StepA Upper BaseA 155 415 MHz 436 1 380 15kHz Upper BaseA 155 415 MHz 55 0 015 MHz Upper BaseA 155 415 MHz 0 825 MHz Upper BaseA 156 240 MHz For entry B Upper BaseB BaseB OffsetC 1 OffsetB StepB file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do e_090515 Manual CalculatingUpperBaseFrequencies html 2 of 3 5 26 2009 11 15 48 AM ...

Page 924: ...etC StepC Upper BaseC 157 470 MHz 760 1 454 15 kHz Upper BaseC 157 470 MHz 305 0 015 MHz Upper BaseC 157 470 MHz 4 575 MHz Upper BaseC 162 045 MHz Click here to download a spreadsheet that will do all the math for you This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do e_090515 Manual CalculatingUpperBaseFrequen...

Page 925: ...Hits with Scan Set Quick Key Set Number Tag Set Lockout Set Hold Time Set CC Mode Set CC Override Set CC Alert Set Alert Tone Set Alert Light Set CC Pause Set CC Bands Close Call Only Search the selected bands for close call hits the scanner stops all other scanning for a close call only search CC Auto Store Start a close call search When a close call hit is detected the scanner stores that freque...

Page 926: ...site to a Quick Key For more information see Quick Keys Set Number Tag Assign a number to this system you can use to tune directly to the system Choose a number from 0 to 999 For more information see Number Tags Note that you can only set a system number tag for the Close Call system Set Lockout Decide whether you want to lock out the system so the scanner will ignore it during Scan and Search mod...

Page 927: ...The scanner runs the close call check even while you are monitoring a transmission Set CC Override Choose On if you want the scanner to stop its current operation and automatically jump to the frequency when it detects a close call hit Choose Off if you want the scanner to alert you to the close call hit and prompt you to change frequency if you choose not to change frequency the scanner times out...

Page 928: ...o turn that band On The scanner only searches for close call hits on bands that are turned on Band BCD396XT and BCD996XT frequencies BC346XT frequencies BCT15X frequencies VHF Low 1 25 0000 53 9800 MHz 25 0000 53 9800 MHz 25 0000 53 9800 MHz VHF Low 2 54 0000 107 9000 MHz 54 0000 107 9000 MHz 54 0000 107 9000 MHz Air Band 108 0000 136 9916 MHz 108 0000 136 9916 MHz 108 0000 136 9916 MHz VHF High 1...

Page 929: ...9875 MHz 894 0125 960 0000 MHz 1240 0000 1300 0000 MHz 758 0000 823 9875 MHz 849 0125 868 9875 MHz 894 0125 960 0000 MHz 1240 0000 1300 0000 MHz This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual CloseCall html 5 of 5 5 26 2009 11 15 49 AM ...

Page 930: ...s 6 digit Federal Information Processing System FIPS codes to issue hazard alerts in specific areas You can choose which areas you want to hear alerts for by programming the appropriate FIPS codes into your receiver the receiver only sounds the alert tone if an incoming FIPS code matches one of the areas you entered Each county or parish etc is designated by a 5 digit FIPS code parts of a county a...

Page 931: ...that section and entire county alerts For example if you program the section code as 5 Central you will receive alerts transmitted with section code 0 and section code 5 You will not receive alerts that are transmitted with section codes 1 through 4 or 6 through 9 For a complete index of the FIPS codes used in SAME broadcasts see the United States and Territories Table at the National Weather Radi...

Page 932: ...y to go to the Wired Clone menu and select Slave then select the port Front Port or Rear Port that the cable is connected to on that scanner The master scanner checks to make sure the slave is properly connected and ready to receive then begins the data transfer Do not disconnect the data cable or turn off either scanner during the transfer When the transfer is finished both scanners display a Com...

Page 933: ... the preset fleet maps Block number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Preset 1 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 Preset 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Preset 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 12 Preset 4 12 4 4 4 4 4 4 Preset 5 4 4 12 4 4 4 4 Preset 6 3 10 4 4 12 12 Preset 7 10 10 11 4 4 4 4 4 Preset 8 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Preset 9 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 Preset 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 Preset 11 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ts temp CDImage...

Page 934: ...t Map option Then select the appropriate size code for each block Remember not all size codes are available for all blocks Block Valid Size Codes Block 0 0 14 Block 1 0 13 14 not valid Block 2 0 13 14 not valid Block 3 0 13 14 not valid Block 4 0 13 14 not valid Block 5 0 12 13 14 not valid Block 6 0 12 13 14 not valid file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual ...

Page 935: ... the system divides the TGID range into 8 equal blocks Block Starting ID Ending ID Block 0 0 8191 Block 1 8192 16383 Block 2 16384 24575 Block 3 24576 32767 Block 4 32768 40959 Block 5 40960 49151 Block 6 49152 57343 Block 7 57344 65535 Size Codes file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual MotorolaFleetMaps html 3 of 4 5 26 2009 11 15 52 AM ...

Page 936: ... Needed 0 as Type II ID 1 1 128 4 16 1 2 16 8 64 1 3 8 8 128 1 4 1 16 512 1 5 64 4 32 1 6 32 8 32 1 7 32 4 64 1 8 16 4 128 1 9 8 4 256 1 10 4 8 256 1 11 2 16 256 1 12 1 16 1024 2 13 1 16 2048 4 14 1 16 4096 8 This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual MotorolaFleetMaps html...

Page 937: ...lete the scanner resumes the previous operation In Priority Plus Scan mode the scanner stops the current operation and only checks the priority channels Priority Scan menu Set Priority Set Interval MaxCHs Pri Scan Priority Scan menu Use the Priority Scan menu to control how Priority mode operates Set Priority Choose one of the following priority scan methods On Enter Priority Scan mode also the sc...

Page 938: ...100 If the number of priority channels is greater than the number you enter here the scanner divides them into groups For example if you set the maximum channels to 20 and there are 100 priority channels the scanner checks those 100 channels in groups of 20 and takes a total of 5 intervals to complete the priority scan This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT U...

Page 939: ...Set Lockout Delete Location New Location Dangerous Xing and Dangerous Road menus Edit Name Set Type Set Alert Volume Set Alert Light Set Location Info Set Heading Set Speed Limit Set Lockout Delete Location New Location POI Edit Name Enter a name or edit the existing one Names can be 16 characters long and they can contain upper and lower case letters punctuation and spaces Turn the SELECT file C ...

Page 940: ...lable options based on the new location type Set Alert This menu lets you configure whether the scanner triggers an alert tone and light when you approach this location Set Alert Light This setting is exactly the same as its counterpart on the system site and channel menus Click on the setting for a complete explanation Set Alert Tone Choose one of the available alert tones for this POI Alert 1 10...

Page 941: ...nge Enter how far out from this location you want the scanner to alert you You can configure the scanner to sound an alert tone and flash a light when you reach the radius entered here The scanner treats the number you enter here as miles or kilometers depending on the value you selected in the Set Unit field in the Set GPS Format menu under the main Settings menu Enter a range from 0 05 through 4...

Page 942: ...cation is created as the type you are currently viewing POI Dangerous Xing or Dangerous Road If you want to change the location type you can select the new location type here When you change the location type the scanner goes back to the Program Location menu Select the new location type to edit this location the scanner resets the available options based on the new location type Set Alert Volume ...

Page 943: ...h it or only when you are traveling in a particular direction To make the alert direction dependent select the direction from the list select All Range to be alerted regardless or your direction Set Speed Limit Decide whether the scanner alerts you of this Dangerous Xing or Road each time you approach it or only when you are traveling above a certain speed To make the alert speed dependent enter t...

Page 944: ... off and back on or Lockout the location is locked out until you change this setting Delete Location Delete this location and its settings including any alert settings New Location Create a new location This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual ProgramLocation html 6 of ...

Page 945: ...ns you have depend on the type of system you select If the system you selected is a conventional system the scanner prompts you to select a custom search or a preset service search range If the system you selected is a trunked system the scanner prompts you to select a site within that system The scanner searches the site for active Talk Groups and stores the Talk Group ID to the Found Channels gr...

Page 946: ...d BCD396XT Only Set Record BCD996XT and BCT15X Only P25 Waiting Time BCD996XT and BCD396XT Only Search with Scan Custom Search Edit Custom Edit Name Edit Srch Limit Set Delay Time Set Modulation Set Attenuator Set Step Set C Ch Only Set MOT Band Plan Set Audio AGC BCD996XT and BCD396XT Only Set Record BCD996XT and BCT15X Only P25 Waiting Time BCD996XT and BCD396XT Only Search with Scan Search and ...

Page 947: ...e the channel after 10 seconds even if the transmission is still going on choose 5 seconds or 2 seconds to have the scanner leave after 5 seconds or 2 seconds respectively Set Attenuator Turn on attenuation to reduce the signal strength by 20 dB All frequencies in the search range are attenuated during search Set Audio AGC BCD996XT and BCD396XT Only Turn on Automatic Gain Control AGC for this syst...

Page 948: ... milliseconds after the start of a transmission the scanner should wait while checking for P25 data Choose a number from 0 through 1000 ms in 100 ms increments The scanner only applies the wait time when Tone Code Search in Srch CloCall Opt is set to Off Search with Scan Custom Search Start a search of the 10 custom search ranges Edit Custom This menu lets you program the ten custom search ranges ...

Page 949: ... seconds to have the scanner leave after 5 seconds or 2 seconds respectively Set Modulation Select what type of modulation the scanner should use for this frequency or channel Only the modulation types available for this frequency or channel are displayed Auto The scanner uses the default modulation type for this frequency s band AM The scanner treats the frequency as an AM band NFM The scanner tr...

Page 950: ...n for more information Set Audio AGC BCD996XT and BCD396XT Only Turn on Automatic Gain Control AGC for this system When you activate this feature the scanner automatically adjusts the volume for each channel based on the signal strength You can turn on the gain control for Analog and Digital signals separately To change the settings for the audio AGC see Adjust Audio AGC Set Record BCD996XT and BC...

Page 951: ... set to Off Search with Scan Search and Store Search a stored system and save the frequency information of any active channels Set Search Key The scanner has three one touch search keys number keys 1 2 and 3 that you can assign to any saved search range 1 Select the search key you want to program Search Key 1 through Search Key 3 2 Select the search range you want to assign to this key The search ...

Page 952: ...uring power up Enter a number from 0 to 9 tap NO the decimal point if you don t want to assign this search range to a Startup Key For more information see Startup Keys Set Number Tag Assign a number to this search range that you can use to quickly access the first frequency of the the search range Choose a number from 0 to 999 For more information see Number Tags Set Lockout Decide whether you wan...

Page 953: ...er spends checking this search range before moving to the next search range or system 2 seconds is the default This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual SearchWithScan html 2 of 2 5 26 2009 11 16 01 AM ...

Page 954: ... 50 ms 1200 Hz for 70 ms Alert 7 2000 Hz for 200 ms Silence for 10 ms 800 Hz for 150 ms repeat 3 times Alert 8 500 Hz for 40 ms Silence for 10 ms 500 Hz for 40 ms Silence for 10 ms 500 Hz for 40 ms Alert 9 2400 Hz for 70 ms Silence for 20 ms 3000 Hz for 70 ms Silence for 70 ms repeat twice Off No alert tone sounded If you select an alert tone the scanner prompts you to select the volume level Leve...

Page 955: ... Set Attenuator Set Audio AGC BCD996XT and BCD396XT only Set Record BCD996XT and BCT15X only P25 Waiting Time BCD396XT and BCD996XT only Freq Lockouts Rvw Search L O This option displays a list of all locked out frequencies To unlock any frequency on the list just select it and press YES Unlock All This option removes the locks on all frequencies at once Broadcast Screen Choose whether you want th...

Page 956: ... Turn screening on or off for each band individually The scanner displays the bands listed above Select the band you want to change then press YES to toggle the setting Program Band Create up to 10 custom bands that you want the scanner to screen out hits on 1 Select a custom band slot Band 1 through Band 10 2 When the scanner prompts you input the lower frequency limit 3 When the scanner prompts ...

Page 957: ...e mode When the number of stored hits reaches the number you enter here the scanner stops storing hits Enter a number from 1 to 256 Set Delay Time This setting is used to set the delay time for Quick Search Close Call and the CC Hits system Set the number of seconds the scanner should wait after a transmission stops before moving on to the next channel Select 0 1 2 default 5 10 or 30 seconds To ha...

Page 958: ...s that result in digital noise at the beginning of transmissions To prevent this a user configurable P25 wait time from 0 to 1000 ms has been added During the wait time the scanner evaluates the received signal if it detects P25 data the scanner opens squelch immediately If it does not detect any P25 data the scanner opens squelch as soon as the wait time expires Note Any analog transmissions will...

Page 959: ... activated the scanner unlocks that system and enables all of its Quick Keys Assigning Startup Keys Multiple systems sites and search ranges can share the same Startup Key Startup Keys range from 0 to 9 If you do not want a system site or search range to be affected by any Startup Keys enter the decimal point for the Startup Key this is the default setting To a conventional system 1 Open the Progr...

Page 960: ...e for this custom search range Using Startup Keys To activate a Startup Key 1 Turn the scanner off 2 Press hold the number key that corresponds to the Startup Key while you power the scanner on e g To activate Startup Key configuration 2 press hold 2 on the number pad while turning the scanner on 3 Continue holding the number key until the scanner display shows the number of the Startup Key config...

Page 961: ...ocked Locked Here is the result if you power on the scanner while you press and hold 5 Assigned Startup Key Previous state Resulting state 3 Locked Locked None Unlocked Unlocked no change None Locked Locked no change 9 Unlocked Locked This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515...

Page 962: ... is at least 250 ms long 3 Within 500 ms the scanner detects a second tone that matches the value set for Tone B 4 The second tone is at least 100 ms long Tone A setting Positive number Tone B Setting 0 0 Hz Operation Monitor the channel for single tone pages only The scanner opens squelch and displays the tone information when the following occur 1 The scanner detects a tone that matches the valu...

Page 963: ...ed to the three criteria listed above 2 If the tone meets any one of the criteria the scanner checks to see if this tone frequency is already saved to a tone out channel with the same frequency modulation and attenuator settings 3 If the detected tone matches a saved tone the scanner opens squelch 4 If the detected tone does not match any saved tones the scanner opens squelch flashes the tone info...

Page 964: ...tings Tone Out Setup This menu lets you configure the 10 tone out channels Select the channel you want to edit from the list then set the frequency tone and other options for that channel Edit Name Enter a name or edit the existing one Names can be 16 characters long and they can contain upper and lower case letters punctuation and spaces Turn the SELECT VOLUME SQUELCH knob on the handheld scanner...

Page 965: ... to the next channel select Infinite Set Alert Decide whether the scanner triggers an alert tone and light when it detects a tone on this channel Compare this to the system setting Emergency Alert which triggers a tone and light when a Talk Group contains an emergency flag The available options for Set Alert Tone and Set Alert Light are common to both types of alerts Set Alert Tone Set Alert Light...

Page 966: ... the scanner to search for and identify the tones used in tone outs To do so you set both the A and B tones to a value of 0 See Tone A and Tone B Settings for more information This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XTUsers Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual ToneOutFor html 3 of 3 5 26 2009 11 16 05 AM ...

Page 967: ...Set Audio AGC Set Record BCD996XT Only WX Alt Priority Weather Scan Start a normal weather scan In normal weather scan mode the scanner does not react to alert tones on weather channels Weather Alert Choose how you want the scanner to filter any alerts it detects on the weather channels Alert Only The scanner responds to all alert tones detected on the weather channels regardless of region or haza...

Page 968: ...nformation hazard level type etc on the screen and opens squelch on the weather channel Program SAME You can pre program up to 5 regions for filtering hazard alerts then select one of these regions on the Weather Alert menu The scanner will only respond to alerts in the selected region Edit Name SAME Enter the name you want to use for each region The default names are SAME 1 through SAME 5 Edit Co...

Page 969: ... delay Set Attenuator Turn on attenuation to reduce the signal strength by 20 dB You can turn on attentuation for individual frequencies and channels or for entire sites If you turn on attenuation for a site all frequencies within that site will be attenuated Set Audio AGC Turn on Automatic Gain Control AGC for this system When you activate this feature the scanner automatically adjusts the volume...

Page 970: ...r Alert Priority check in Search and Store Close Call Auto Store Tone Out or Band Scope modes This page applies to the following scanner s BCD996XT BCD396XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual WXOperation html 4 of 4 5 26 2009 11 16 06 AM ...

Page 971: ...rt scan the scanner checks the weather channels for alert tones and only opens squelch when it detects one You can program the scanner to filter alerts by region through the Weather Alert menu With a Weather alert priority scan the scanner checks the weather channels every 5 seconds when you are in scan or search mode or close call mode Weather alert priority scan does not function in the search a...

Page 972: ...roup ID in a trunked system for the channel you can edit these at any time through this menu Edit Frequency conventional systems Edit Talk Group ID trunked systems Global channel options Edit Name Set Number Tag Set Priority Set Alert Set Record BCT15X Only Set Lockout Volume Offset Copy Channel Delete Channel New Channel Conventional system channel options Set CTCSS DCS Set Modulation Set Attenua...

Page 973: ...r more information see Number Tags Set Priority Choose whether this channel should be flagged as a priority channel so the scanner checks it during priority scans and searches Set Alert This menu lets you configure whether the scanner triggers an alert tone and light whenever this channel or frequency becomes active Compare this to the system setting Emergency Alert which triggers a tone and light...

Page 974: ... is permanently locked out Volume Offset The scanner can automatically adjust the volume when it tunes to this channel or frequency Enter one of the following options Softer No Change Louder 3 2 1 0 default 1 2 3 Copy Channel Copy this channel and all its settings into the buffer When a channel is stored in the buffer the scanner adds Paste Channel to the bottom of the Program Channel menu wheneve...

Page 975: ...lch if the received signal contains a DCS tone that matches the one you enter here Set Lockout The scanner prompts you to enter a CTCSS or DCS code that you want to lockout for this channel The scanner will not open squelch if the received signal contains a matching CTCSS or DCS tone Set Modulation Select what type of modulation the scanner should use for this frequency or channel Only the modulat...

Page 976: ...an turn on attentuation for individual frequencies and channels or for entire sites If you turn on attenuation for a site all frequencies within that site will be attenuated This page applies to the following scanner s BCT15X BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual AnalogEditChannel html 5 of 5 5 26 2009 11 16 07 AM ...

Page 977: ...ord BCT15 Only WX Alt Priority Weather Scan Start a normal weather scan In normal weather scan mode the scanner does not react to alert tones on weather channels Weather Alert Choose how you want the scanner to filter any alerts it detects on the weather channels Alert Only The scanner responds to all alert tones detected on the weather channels regardless of region or hazard level When an alert i...

Page 978: ... type etc on the screen and opens squelch on the weather channel Program SAME You can pre program up to 5 regions for filtering hazard alerts then select one of these regions on the Weather Alert menu The scanner will only respond to alerts in the selected region Edit Name SAME Enter the name you want to use for each region The default names are SAME 1 through SAME 5 Edit County Enter the designat...

Page 979: ...ce the signal strength by 20 dB You can turn on attentuation for individual frequencies and channels or for entire sites If you turn on attenuation for a site all frequencies within that site will be attenuated Set Record BCT15 Only Turn on this option if you want the weather mode audio to be included on the rear RECORD OUT jack WX Alt Priority Select On if you want the scanner to check the weathe...

Page 980: ...ch mode Enter the digit in Direct Entry FUNCTION Tap Toggle priority mode Start the search range assigned to this Search Key Key Name 2nd operation Action on BearTracker Highway Patrol Alert 4 IF exchange 5 Level offset 6 Display mode Tap Toggle the BearTracker Warning System and Highway Patrol State by State search mode Enter the digit in Direct Entry FUNCTION Tap Start scanning in Alert Plus mod...

Page 981: ...annel or if set to a trunked system frequency go go the edit mode for the system FUNCTION Tap Enter the Menu for the current system or search range NA NA NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on SQUELCH VOLUME SCAN SEARCH HOLD RESUME Rotate Adjust Squelch Adjust volume Turn fully counterclockwise past click to turn off scanner NA NA Tap Stop an alert tone and temporarily mute alerts Tap again to unmute...

Page 982: ...nently lockout the current system NA Press Hold Unlock all channels in the current system Latch the FUNCTION mode Scanner stays on the current system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION mode until you tap the control again FUNCTION Press Hold Prompt to Unlock All Systems Y N If you press E Yes the scanner unlocks and enables all systems sites and searches NA Reading the displays in Hold mode The d...

Page 983: ...essing FUNCTION 6 DISP To see the display at the bottom of the diagram tap FUNCTION For an explanation of System and Channel Number Tags see Number Tags For an explanation of the volume offset level see Volume Offset Trunked system display file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XHoldMode html 4 of 6 5 26 2009 11 16 17 AM ...

Page 984: ...n a trunked system control channel If you press HOLD while the scanner is scanning an idle trunked system the scanner will hold on the active control channel file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XHoldMode html 5 of 6 5 26 2009 11 16 17 AM ...

Page 985: ...e ID As channels become active their TGID or Channel Alsph Tag will appear Service search with scan hold display This page applies to the following scanner s BCT15X Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XHoldMode html 6 of 6 5 26 2009 11 16 17 AM ...

Page 986: ...it was performing when you turned it off While Key Safe mode is on MENU is disabled along with the key combinations described in the table below When you try to use a disabled key combination the scanner display shows Key Safe Mode Press FUNC while Power On for Full Operation The table below shows which key combinations are disabled and which ones operate normally depending on the operating mode t...

Page 987: ...on Key Name 2nd operation Action on GPS Weather 7 Attenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modulation Tap Disabled Normal Operation Press hold Disabled NA FUNCTION Tap while holding Normal Operation Disabled Normal Operation Disabled FUNCTION Tap while scanning Normal Operation Normal Operation FUNCTION Press hold Disabled Disabled Normal Operation NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Menu No Decimal 0 Yes Ent...

Page 988: ... modes this key is disabled In Search mode this operates as the Resume function Normal Operation Press Hold NA NA NA Normal Operation FUNCTION Tap Normal Operation Disabled Disabled Normal Operation FUNCTION Press Hold Disabled NA NA NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on LOCKOUT SCROLL FUNCTION Rotate NA Normal Operation file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15...

Page 989: ...eration Function Tap Normal Operation temporary lockout only NA Press Hold Disabled Normal Operation This page applies to the following scanner s BCT15X Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XKeySafeMode html 4 of 4 5 26 2009 11 16 19 AM ...

Page 990: ...e are very similar so the scanner can combine the two in a single operation switching from one to the other depending on the settings of each individual system Scanning trunked systems The scanner scans a system if the ID Scan Search option is set to ID Scan The scanner only checks for activity on unlocked Talk Group IDs that are programmed for this system If any programmed Talk Group ID becomes a...

Page 991: ...r then checks any remaining unlocked groups in that system in the order in which you created them If none of the groups in the system have been assigned to GQKs the scanner checks all unlocked groups in the order in which you created them The scanner does not check systems if the SQK is disabled off The scanner does not check groups if the GQK is turned off 2 Scans any remaining unlocked conventio...

Page 992: ...ice State by State search mode Disable the systems or sites assigned to this System Site Quick Key SQK Tap again to enable FUNCTION Tap Toggle priority modes Disable the channel groups in the current system assigned to this Group Quick Key GQK Tap again to enable Key Name 2nd operation Action on Highway Patrol Alert 4 IF exchange 5 Level offset 6 Display mode Tap Toggle Highway Patrol Beartrack Wa...

Page 993: ... as the SQK During a system message Cancel the message and exit that screen Disable the systems or sites assigned to System Site Quick Key 0 Tap again to enable If stopped on a channel edit the current channel FUNCTION Tap Go to the editing menu for the current system Start a 2 digit SQK entry The next two digits will be treated as the SQK During a system message Cancel the message and exit that s...

Page 994: ...e current system If already holding on a system resume normal scanning FUNCTION Tap Toggle close call modes Select the state to use for state by state searches When scanning a trunked system toggle between ID Scan and ID Search mode When scanning a conventional system go to Quick Search mode Hold on the current channel FUNCTION Press hold Start Close Call Only mode NA Key Name 2nd operation Action...

Page 995: ...s regardless of type NA Key operation in Search mode Special keys Turn the SCROLL knob to change the direction of the search While monitoring a channel rotate the SCROLL knob to resume searching In Custom Search mode FUNCTION turn the SCROLL knob to select a custom search range The scanner starts at the custom search range you select here FUNCTION tap MENU to go to the Search for menu During a Qui...

Page 996: ...again to enable FUNCTION Tap Toggle Weather Prioirty mode Toggle the attenuator state NA Change the modulation FUNCTION Press hold Go to Weather Scan mode Toggle the attenuator state for all signals If stopped on a frequency that has a valid reverse input frequency show the repeater reverse frequency for the current frequency the scanner returns to the original frequency when you release the key N...

Page 997: ... alerts Tap again to restore Change backlight level Go to Scan mode Hold on the current frequency Press Hold Permanently mute alerts Tap again to restore NA NA NA FUNCTION Tap Toggle Close Call modes Change the state for state by state searches Resume Searching Hold on the current frequency FUNDTION Press hold Go to Close Call Only mode NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on LOCKOUT SCROLL FUNCTION f...

Page 998: ...lockout the frequency NA FUNCTION Tap Review the list of locked out frequencies NA Press Hold If stopped on a frequency unlock all search frequencies Latch the FUNCTION mode Scanner stays on the current system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION mode until you tap the control again This page applies to the following scanner s BCT15X Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 nts te...

Page 999: ...t Upside down Adjust Contrast Set C CH Output Set GPS Format Set Pos Format Set Time Format Set Time Zone Set Unit Set Serial Port Band Defaults Set Modulation Set Step See Scanner Info Memory Used Firmware Version Set Backlight This menu lets you configure the display and key backlight Set Dimmer file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XSettings html 1...

Page 1000: ... the scanner to beep when you press the keys select Off Set Upside down Lets you invert the display Useful if you are mounting the scanner in an overhead space Adjust Contrast Select one of the 15 available contrast levels for the display As you scroll through the options the display adjusts to the highlighted contrast level press YES when you see the display contrast you want to use Set C CH Outp...

Page 1001: ...number of hours your local time zone differs from universal time GMT UTC Select from 14 hours to 14 hours in half hour 0 5 h increments Set Unit Select the unit used for distance mile or kilometer km Set Serial Port Select the port you are adjusting Set Front Port or Set Rear Port Then set the baud rate for the selected serial port Choose from 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 bps select Off t...

Page 1002: ...lect the number of kHz between each frequency or channel step 5 0 6 25 7 5 8 33 10 0 12 5 15 0 20 0 25 0 50 0 or 100 0 kHz See Scanner Info This menu lets you see detailed information about the memory and firmware including the ESN and ESN Checksum Memory Used See the percent of overall memory used Memory Used along with the number of programmed Systems Sites and channels CHN and the percent of av...

Page 1003: ...ngs UnidenMan4 TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCT15X Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual BCT15XSettings html 5 of 5 5 26 2009 11 16 23 AM ...

Page 1004: ...y FUNCTION Tap Volume then rotate the scroll control to select your state These frequencies are frequencies typically used by Highway Patrol State Police State Patrol and Air Patrol that are typically receivable from short ranges 2 miles If the scanner detects a transmission in Bear Tracker mode it sounds an alert to let you know of nearby law enforcement activities Set Hold Time Set Delay Time Se...

Page 1005: ...evel will match the volume control setting Press E to make your selection The scanner returns to the Set Alert Tone menu Set Alert Light First select the alert flash speed As you scroll through options the scanner flashes at the selected speed Press E to make your selection The scanner returns to the Set Alert Tone menu Set Record Sets the scanner to send the BearTracker alerts audio out the RECOR...

Page 1006: ... in Hold mode Conventional system display Trunked system display Service search with scan hold display Key operation in Hold mode Key Name 2nd operation Action on Hold Close call 1 Search 1 2 Search 2 3 Search 3 Tap Resume scan or search Enter the number on the key FUNCTION Tap Enter Close Call mode Start the Quick Search assigned to this key FUNCTION Press hold Enter Close Call Only mode NA file ...

Page 1007: ...e offset for the current signal Rotate through the three available display modes Key Name 2nd operation Action on Lockout 7 Attenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modulation Tap Unlock the current channel or frequency if locked If unlocked single tap to temporarily lock or double tap to permanently lock the current channel or frequency Enter the number on the key file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My ...

Page 1008: ... for all signals Switch to the reverse repeater frequency of the current signal NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Backlight Power Lock No Decimal Priority 0 Weather Yes Enter GPS Tap Turn on the LCD backlight Enter a decimal point or i for direct entry Enter 0 In Search Hold save the current frequency into memory In Scan Hold go to menu mode for the current channel or if held on a Trunked System...

Page 1009: ... the scanner on or off NA Enter Weather mode NA Reading the displays in Hold mode The display information in Hold mode varies depending on the type of system the scanner is Holding on Conventional system display When the scanner is holding on a conventional system it displays the following screens file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual HoldMode html 4 of...

Page 1010: ...isplay at the bottom of the diagram tap FUNCTION For an explanation of System and Channel Number Tags see Number Tags For an explanation of the volume offset level see Volume Offset Trunked system display file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual HoldMode html 5 of 7 5 26 2009 11 16 31 AM ...

Page 1011: ...HoldMode UnidenMan4 TWiki Service search with scan hold display file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual HoldMode html 6 of 7 5 26 2009 11 16 31 AM ...

Page 1012: ...denMan4 TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual HoldMode html 7 of 7 5 26 2009 11 16 31 AM ...

Page 1013: ...ows Key Safe Mode On or Key Safe Mode Off then returns to the operation it was performing when you turned it off While Key Safe mode is on MENU is disabled along with the key combinations described in the table below When you try to use a disabled key combination the scanner display shows Key Safe Mode Press FUNC while Power On for Full Operation The table below shows which key combinations are di...

Page 1014: ... Tap In Close Call Tone Out WX GPS and Band Scope modes this key is disabled In Search mode this operates as the Resume function Normal operation FUNCTION Tap Disabled While Scanning Normal operation While Holding Disabled Key Name 2nd operation Action on Lockout 7 Attenuation 8 Reverse freq 9 Modulation file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual KeySafeMode...

Page 1015: ...operation While Holding Disabled FUNCTION Press hold Disabled While scanning Normal operation While Holding Disabled Normal operation While scanning Normal operation While Holding Disabled Key Name 2nd operation Action on Backlight Power Lock No Decimal Priority 0 Weather Yes Enter GPS Tap Normal operation Disabled Press hold Normal operation Disabled FUNCTION Tap Normal operation While Scanning N...

Page 1016: ...Press hold Normal operation Disabled This page applies to the following scanner s BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual KeySafeMode html 4 of 4 5 26 2009 11 16 33 AM ...

Page 1017: ...Option Set Battery Save Set Charge Time Adjust Audio AGC Adjust Contrast Set C CH Output Set GPS Format Set Pos Format Set Time Format Set Time Zone Set Unit Set Serial Port Band Defaults Set Modulation Set Step P25 LP Filter See Scanner Info Memory Used Firmware Version Set Backlight file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual Settings html 1 of 6 5 26 2009 ...

Page 1018: ...the time Set Dimmer Select the brightness of the backlight Your options are high brightest middle and low dimmest Set Color Select the color of the backlight Your options are blue red magenta green cyan yellow and white Adjust Key Beep Select the volume level Level 1 through Level 15 you want the keybeep to use or select Auto to have the scanner sound the keybeep without changing the volume If you...

Page 1019: ...could result in pumping Increase this value to make AGC respond more slowly 4 to 6 default 0 8 to 8 default 0 Reference Gain The reference level that AGC attempts to adjust the volume to If digital and analog volumes don t match adjust this parameter 5 to 5 default 0 5 to 5 default 0 Gain Range The total dynamic range of the AGC adjustments A larger value allows a wider variation in volume 0 to 15...

Page 1020: ...dinates time and units during GPS operation Set Pos Format Select how the scanner displays longitude and latitude DMS DDD MM SS ss Display coordinates in degrees DDD minutes MM and seconds SS ss DEG DDD dddddd Display coordinates as decimal degrees Set Time Format Select 12H for 12 hour am pm time format or 24H for 24 hour time format Set Time Zone Set the number of hours your local time zone diff...

Page 1021: ...ou want the scanner to use as the default for this band AM Narrowband FM NFM FM Wideband FM WFM or FM broadcast FMB Set Step Select the number of kHz between each frequency or channel step 5 0 6 25 7 5 8 33 10 0 12 5 15 0 20 0 25 0 50 0 or 100 0 khz P25 LP Filter This setting lets you set the scanner to apply a software filter that removes the 4kHz tone you can hear on some P25 systems Note that t...

Page 1022: ...N and the percent of available memory positions used for each Firmware Version See the firmware version Version and the serial number SN of the scanner This page applies to the following scanner s BCD396XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual Settings html 6 of 6 5 26 2009 11 16 37 AM ...

Page 1023: ... Wired Clone menu and select Slave The master scanner checks to make sure the slave is properly connected and ready to receive then begins the data transfer Do not disconnect the data cable or turn off either scanner during the transfer When the transfer is finished both scanners display a Complete message Reboot the slave scanner to load the new settings All settings and data saved on the Slave s...

Page 1024: ...em The System Type options are MOT Use for any Motorola system EDCS Use for any EDACs system When you select this system type the scanner prompts you to choose WIDE NARROW or SCAT LT Use for any LTR system Conventional Use for any non trunked system REMEMBER Once you select a system type you can t change it Edit Name Edit Sys Option Edit Site Edit Group Copy System Delete System New System Edit Na...

Page 1025: ...quick key order select the group you want to edit or select New Group to create a new one You can have up to 20 groups in each system Copy System Make a copy of this system and all its settings including all sites groups channels and frequencies The scanner prompts you to enter a new system name Delete System Delete this system and all its settings this includes sites groups channels and frequenci...

Page 1026: ...tem display Trunked system display Service search with scan hold display Key operation in Hold mode Key Name 2nd operation Action on Hold Close call 1 Search 1 2 Search 2 3 Search 3 Tap Resume previous mode Enter the number on the key FUNCTION Tap Toggle Close Call mode Start the Quick Search assigned to this key FUNCTION Press hold Enter Close Call Only mode NA Key Name 2nd operation Action on Sc...

Page 1027: ...Lockout double tap for permanent lockout the current channel or frequency Enter the number on the key FUNCTION Tap Unlock if locked or Temporary Lockout double tap for permanent lockout the current system site or search Toggle the attenuator state for the current signal NA Change the modulation type FUNCTION Press hold Unlock all systems sites and searches Toggle the attenuator state for all signa...

Page 1028: ...ck or unlock the keypad Turn Priority scan on or off Change the weather alert priority setting Enter GPS mode FUNCTION Press hold NA NA Enter Weather mode NA Reading the displays in Hold mode The display information in Hold mode varies depending on the type of system the scanner is Holding on Conventional system display When the scanner is holding on a conventional system it displays the following...

Page 1029: ...e display at the bottom of the diagram tap FUNCTION For an explanation of System and Channel Number Tags see Number Tags For an explanation of the volume offset level see Volume Offset Trunked system display file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346XTHoldMode html 4 of 6 5 26 2009 11 16 46 AM ...

Page 1030: ...BC346XTHoldMode UnidenMan4 TWiki Service search with scan hold display file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346XTHoldMode html 5 of 6 5 26 2009 11 16 46 AM ...

Page 1031: ...Mode UnidenMan4 TWiki This page applies to the following scanner s BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20 ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346XTHoldMode html 6 of 6 5 26 2009 11 16 46 AM ...

Page 1032: ... Attenuator Search with Scan Custom Search Edit Custom Edit Name Edit Srch Limit Set Delay Time Set Modulation Set Attenuator Set Step Set C Ch Only Set MOT BandPlan Search with Scan Search and Store Set Search Key Service Search Start a search of one of the 11 preset service bands Choose from Public Safety News HAM Radio Marine Railroad Air CB Radio FRS GMRS MURS Racing FM Broadcast or Special Ed...

Page 1033: ...5 seconds or 2 seconds respectively Set Attenuator Turn on attenuation to reduce the signal strength by 20 dB You can turn on attentuation for individual frequencies and channels or for entire sites If you turn on attenuation for a site all frequencies within that site will be attenuated Search with Scan Custom Search Start a search of the 10 custom search ranges Edit Custom This menu lets you pro...

Page 1034: ...s to have the scanner leave after 5 seconds or 2 seconds respectively Set Modulation Select what type of modulation the scanner should use for this frequency or channel Only the modulation types available for this frequency or channel are displayed Auto The scanner uses the default modulation type for this frequency s band AM The scanner treats the frequency as an AM band NFM The scanner treats th...

Page 1035: ... Motorola system you need to select a band plan just like you do when you program a Motorola system for scanning See Edit Band Plan for more information Search with Scan Search and Store Search a stored system and save the frequency information of any active channels Set Search Key The scanner has three one touch search keys number keys 1 2 and 3 that you can assign to any saved search range 1 Sel...

Page 1036: ...i holding the appropriate key Main menu This page applies to the following scanner s BC346XT Users Guide file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D ts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346XTSearchFor html 5 of 5 5 26 2009 11 16 46 AM ...

Page 1037: ...t Unit Set Serial Port Band Defaults Set Modulation Set Step See Scanner Info Memory Used Firmware Version Set Backlight This menu lets you configure the display and key backlight Set Mode Choose how you want the backlight to operate 10 sec The scanner keeps the backlight on for 10 seconds after the last operation file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346...

Page 1038: ...the scanner sound the keybeep without changing the volume If you don t want the scanner to beep when you press the keys select Off Battery Option This menu lets you configure the advanced battery control features Set Battery Save Turn the battery save feature on or off Set Charge Time Enter the amount of time you want the battery to draw power while charging Adjust Contrast Select one of the 15 av...

Page 1039: ...nates in degrees DDD minutes MM and seconds SS ss DEG DDD dddddd Display coordinates as decimal degrees Set Time Format Select 12H for 12 hour am pm time format or 24H for 24 hour time format Set Time Zone Set the number of hours your local time zone differs from universal time GMT UTC Select from 14 hours to 14 hours in half hour 0 5 h increments Set Unit Select the unit used for distance mile or...

Page 1040: ... FMB Set Step Select the number of kHz between each frequency or channel step 5 0 6 25 7 5 8 33 10 0 12 5 15 0 20 0 25 0 50 0 or 100 0 kHz See Scanner Info This menu lets you see detailed information about the memory and firmware Memory Used See the percent of overall memory used Memory Used along with the number of programmed Systems Sites and channels CHN and the percent of available memory posi...

Page 1041: ...BC346XTSettings UnidenMan4 TWiki file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20D nts temp CDImage_090515 Manual BC346XTSettings html 5 of 5 5 26 2009 11 16 47 AM ...

Page 1042: ...t Delay Time Set Attenuator Freq Lockouts Rvw Search L O This option displays a list of all locked out frequencies To unlock any frequency on the list just select it and press YES Unlock All This option removes the locks on all frequencies at once Broadcast Screen Choose whether you want the scanner to screen out common broadcast bands and ignore hits on these bands You can screen out signals on 5...

Page 1043: ...canner displays the bands listed above Select the band you want to change then press YES to toggle the setting Program Band Create up to 10 custom bands that you want the scanner to screen out hits on 1 Select a custom band slot Band 1 through Band 10 2 When the scanner prompts you input the lower frequency limit 3 When the scanner prompts you input the upper frequency limit 4 Once you create the ...

Page 1044: ... stops before moving on to the next channel Select 0 1 2 default 5 10 or 30 seconds To have scanner leave the channel after a designated number of seconds whether the transmission stops or not select one of the negative values Choose 10 seconds to have the scanner leave the channel after 10 seconds even if the transmission is still going on choose 5 seconds or 2 seconds to have the scanner leave a...

Page 1045: ...e r6 23 Apr 2009 22 56 BC246TUpdate260ReleaseNotes PaulOpitz r2 24 Mar 2009 15 16 BC296DFirmwareUpdate PaulOpitz r5 12 Feb 2009 22 21 BC296DRebandUpdateBetaComments PaulOpitz r18 24 Mar 2009 15 17 BC346XTFirmwareUpdate PaulOpitz r2 18 Feb 2009 16 14 BC346XTFirmwareUpdateBetaComments DavidMcCormick r14 14 Mar 2009 17 56 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ents temp CDImage_090515 Manua...

Page 1046: ...ar 2009 16 28 BCD396T301Update PaulOpitz r2 24 Mar 2009 16 28 BCD396TFirmwareUpdate PaulOpitz r11 16 Feb 2009 02 51 BCD396TICallBetaComments PaulOpitz r11 24 Mar 2009 16 29 BCD996T301Update PaulOpitz r4 24 Mar 2009 16 36 BCD996TFirmwareUpdate PaulOpitz r10 14 Feb 2009 21 48 BCD996TICallBetaComments PaulOpitz file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryP...

Page 1047: ...PaulOpitz r2 24 Mar 2009 16 36 BCT15XFeatures PaulOpitz r3 12 May 2009 18 48 BCT8FirmwareUpdate PaulOpitz r8 09 Feb 2009 12 17 BCT8RebandingUpdate PaulOpitz r2 24 Mar 2009 16 36 BR330T106UpdateBetaComments PaulOpitz r36 24 Mar 2009 16 37 BR330TFirmwareUpdate DavidMcCormick r7 24 Mar 2009 19 15 DeleteMe file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryPending...

Page 1048: ...Request PaulOpitz r39 14 May 2009 17 12 PublishWeb PaulOpitz r15 12 May 2009 22 10 QuickReferenceInput PaulOpitz r11 12 May 2009 21 30 RebandVolunteers PaulOpitz r47 24 Mar 2009 20 49 ScannerFinder PaulOpitz r2 24 Mar 2009 20 50 ScannerManuals PaulOpitz r23 05 May 2009 17 47 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryPending html 4 of 5 5 26 2009 11 16...

Page 1049: ...hedPages PaulOpitz r2 24 Mar 2009 15 40 UsingPreloadedSystems PaulOpitz r3 13 May 2009 14 55 WhatsNew PaulOpitz r13 05 May 2009 18 18 Number of topics 42 file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Do ents temp CDImage_090515 Manual CategoryPending html 5 of 5 5 26 2009 11 16 49 AM ...

Page 1050: ...stem or channel that you can use to tune directly to a specific channel Choose a number from 0 to 999 For more information see Number Tags file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docu s temp CDImage_090515 Manual TemplateSetNumberTag html5 26 2009 11 16 51 AM ...

Page 1051: ... disable it during scanning Enter a number from 0 to 99 tap NO the decimal point if you don t want to assign this system or site to a Quick Key For more information see Quick Keys file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual TemplateSetQuickKey html5 26 2009 11 16 52 AM ...

Page 1052: ...e or disable it during scanning Enter a number from 0 to 9 tap NO the decimal point if you don t want to assign this group to a Quick Key For more information see Quick Keys file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docu mp CDImage_090515 Manual TemplateSetGroupQuickKey html5 26 2009 11 16 52 AM ...

Page 1053: ...s active Compare this to the system setting Emergency Alert which triggers a tone and light when a Talk Group contains an emergency flag The available options for Set Alert Tone and Set Alert Light are common to both types of alerts file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual TemplateSetAlert html5 26 2009 11 17 01 AM ...

Page 1054: ...ight Multicolor backlights The following scanners have 7 different backlight colors blue red magenta green cyan yellow or white BCD396XT BCD996XT For these scanners choose one of backlight colors for the scanner to use for the alert light Leave this option at Off if you don t want the scanner to flash an alert light If you select a light color the scanner prompts you to select the flash pattern st...

Page 1055: ...s not detect any P25 data the scanner opens squelch as soon as the wait time expires Note Any analog transmissions on this channel will lose the first part of the transmission up to the wait time you set here Select the number of milliseconds after the start of a transmission the scanner should wait while checking for P25 data Choose a number from 0 through 1000 ms in 100 ms increments The scanner...

Page 1056: ...at system or site will be locked out Choose one of the following options Unlocked The system site or channel is not locked out Temporary L O The system site or channel is locked out until you turn the scanner off and back on Lockout The system site or channel is permanently locked out file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Documents temp CDImage_090515 Manual TemplateSetLockout html5 26 200...

Page 1057: ... Warning Warning Contagious DMO Practice demo Advisory System Demo DSW Dust Storm Warning Warning Dust Storm EAN Emergency Action Notification Warning EMG Notify EAT Emergency Action Termination Advisory EMG End EQW Earthquake Warning Warning Earthquake EVA Evacuation Watch Watch Evacuate Note EVI Immediate Evacuation Warning Evacuate Note FCW Food Contamination Warning Warning Food FFA Flash Floo...

Page 1058: ...rning Shelter SVA Severe Thunderstorm Watch Watch Thunderstorm SVR Severe Thunderstorm Warning Warning Thunderstorm SVS Severe Weather Statement Advisory Severe WX TOA Tornado Watch Watch Tornado TOE 911 Telephone Outage Emergency Advisory 911 Phone Outage TOR Tornado Warning Warning Tornado TRA Tropical Storm Watch Watch Tropic Storm TRW Tropical Storm Warning Warning Tropic Storm TSA Tsunami Wat...

Page 1059: ...ock it during power up Enter a number from 0 to 9 tap NO the decimal point if you don t want to assign this system or site to a Startup Key For more information see Startup Keys file C Documents 20and 20Settings POpitz My 20Docum s temp CDImage_090515 Manual TemplateSetStartupKey html5 26 2009 11 17 05 AM ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for BC346XT

Cane Creek EC Installation Manuals preview
EC
Brand: Cane Creek Pages: 2
Kargo Master 80070 Assembly Lnstructions preview
80070
Brand: Kargo Master Pages: 13
Kargo Master 4A96L Installation Manual preview
4A96L
Brand: Kargo Master Pages: 21
Kargo Master 40201 Installation Manual preview
40201
Brand: Kargo Master Pages: 4
Karel MS48IP Technical Reference And Installation Manual preview
MS48IP
Brand: Karel Pages: 56
Ednet 86280 Quick Installation Manual preview
86280
Brand: Ednet Pages: 7
iDataLink BLADE-AL(TB)-TL2 Install Manual preview
BLADE-AL(TB)-TL2
Brand: iDataLink Pages: 9
Leclerc Wheeled Board Instructions Manual preview
Wheeled Board
Brand: Leclerc Pages: 8
MAXXMEE 03088 Operating Instructions Manual preview
03088
Brand: MAXXMEE Pages: 40
Perma STAR VARIO Installation Manual preview
STAR VARIO
Brand: Perma Pages: 12
Trane BAYECON103AA Installer'S Manual preview
BAYECON103AA
Brand: Trane Pages: 17
Magneti Marelli BCF184 Installation Instructions preview
BCF184
Brand: Magneti Marelli Pages: 2
Kodak AE-31 Technical Data preview
AE-31
Brand: Kodak Pages: 2
Brecknell SBI-240 Service Manual preview
SBI-240
Brand: Brecknell Pages: 78
Knightsbridge OS001 Series Installation & Maintenance Manual preview
OS001 Series
Brand: Knightsbridge Pages: 8
Cuisinart FP-SP Instruction And Recipe Booklet preview
FP-SP
Brand: Cuisinart Pages: 20
Olivetti FS-519 Service Manual preview
FS-519
Brand: Olivetti Pages: 111
TREND DG/JIG Instruction Manual preview
DG/JIG
Brand: TREND Pages: 14

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands